0% found this document useful (0 votes)

378 views570 pages

Premier en

The SIGNA™ Premier Operator Manual provides essential information about the SIGNA™ Premier MRI system, including safety warnings, regulatory compliance, and operational guidelines. It details the system's capabilities for high-resolution imaging and outlines new features and enhancements introduced in the 29.1 software update. The manual also includes information on equipment disposal, user responsibilities, and contact details for authorized representatives in various regions.

Uploaded by

Đạt Lê

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

0% found this document useful (0 votes)

378 views570 pages

Premier en

Uploaded by

Đạt Lê

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

SIGNA™ Premier

SIGNA™Works Operator Manual

SIGNA™ Premier
29.1 Operator manual, English
5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2
© 2021 General Electric Company
All rights reserved.
This page intentionally left blank.

2 5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

© 2021 General Electric Company
Strong Magnetic Field
The magnet produces a strong magnetic field. The MR magnet is always on even when the system is not
acquiring scan data. For details, Security zone.
Figure 2-1: Security zone warning sign

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 i

Revision history
Table 3-1: Revision history

Revision Date Change

1 2020-11 Release of 5860865: 1
2 2021-07 Release of 5860865: 2

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

ii
© 2021 General Electric Company
Applicable Regulations and Standards
Medical Device Regulation
This product conforms with the requirements of the Medical Device Regulation 2017/245 when they bear the
following CE Mark of conformity:

The year of CE marking for SIGNA™ Premier is 2018.

For revision history details, see:

Operator manual Revision History

EAC MED label

Table 4-1: EAC MED label

Name Description
“Eurasian Conformity” mark; the single This product passed all conformity assessment
conformity mark for circulation of products on (approval) procedures that correspond to the
the markets of member states of Customs requirements of applicable technical regulations
Union. of the Eurasian Economic Union.

Ukrainian mark of conformity

Authorized Representative in Ukraine

Table 4-2: Ukrainian mark of conformity details

Language Address
LLC "GE Ukraine"
Mikhailovsky Str., 7, Kiev,
English
01001 Ukraine
+380443630350
TOB «ДЖИІ УКРАЇНА»
вул. Михайлівська, 7, м. Київ,
Ukrainian
01001, Україна
+380443630350

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 iii

Regulatory Markings-UDI Label

Every medical device has a unique marking for identification. The UDI marking appears on the device labeling.
The following figures are only examples of a UDI marking. The device may have a linear barcode as in Figure 4-1, or a
DataMatrix code as in Figure 4-2, or only alphanumeric identifiers with no barcode. Also the identifiers vary per
product.
Figure 4-1: Example of a UDI linear barcode

Figure 4-2: Example of a UDI DataMatrix code

Manufacturer
GE Medical Systems, LLC
3200 N. Grandview Boulevard
Waukesha, WI 53188, USA

EU Authorized Representative

GE Medical Systems SCS

283, rue de la Minière
78530 Buc
FRANCE
Telephone: +33 1 30 70 40 40

Legal notices
GE and the GE Monogram are trademarks of General Electric Company.
ASSET, VIBRANT, ReportCARD, INSITE and ILinq are trademarks of General Electric Company.
DICOM is the registered trademark of the National Electrical Manufacturers Association for its standards
publications relating to digital communications of medical information.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

Turkey importer details

GE Medical Systems Türkiye Ltd. Şti.
Esentepe Mah. Harman Sok. No: 8

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

iv
© 2021 General Electric Company
34394 Şişli-İstanbul Türkiye

Kazakh authorized representative

Authorized representative in Kazakhstan, which is responsible for accepting claims is General Electric Kazakhstan
LLP.
Table 4-3: Kazakh authorized representative details

Language Address
General Electric
Kazakhstan LLP Timiryazev St 28V, office 307,
English
Almaty, 050040 Kazakhstan
T +7 727 3560020
«Дженерал Электрик
Қазақстан» ЖШС
Қазақстан, Алматы қаласы
Kazakh
050040, Тимирязев кө шесі,
28В ү., 307 кеңсе.
T +7 727 3560020
ТОО «Дженерал Электрик
Казахстан»
Ул. Тимирязева 28 В, офис 307
Russian
Г. Алматы, 050040
Республика Казахстан
T +7 727 3560020
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. The equipment may cause radio frequency
interference with other medical and non-medical devices and radio communications. To provide reasonable
protection against such interference, the:
GE MR Systems
comply with emissions limits for (Group 2, Class A) Medical Devices as stated in IEC 60601-1-2. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.

If this equipment is found to cause interference (which may be determined by turning the equipment on and off), the
user (or qualified service personnel) should attempt to correct the problem by one or more of the following
measures:

reorient or relocated the affected devices;

increase the separation between equipment and the affected device;
power the equipment from a source different from that of the affected device; and/or
consult the point of purchase or service representative for further suggestions.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 v

The manufacturer is not responsible for any interference caused by using interconnect cables that are not
recommended or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or
modifications could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Do not use devices that transmit RF Signals (cellular phones, transceivers, or radio controlled products) in the vicinity
of this equipment as they may cause performance outside the published specifications. Keep the power to these
types of devices turned off when near this equipment.
The medical staff in charge of this equipment is required to instruct technicians, patients, and other people who may
be around this equipment to fully comply with the above requirement.
Immunity/Emissions Exceptions: Note the exceptions from the EMC test results. Check with the business EMC
engineer for this information.
In accordance with the international safety standard IEC 60601-1, this system is:

a Class I device

WARNING
To avoid the risk of electric shock, this equipment must only be connected to a supply mains with protective
earth.

acceptable for Continuous Operation

having ordinary protection against ingress of water (IPX0)
type B and BF applied parts
is not for use in the presence of flammable anesthetics.

Equipment disposal
A WEEE passport report is available from a GE representative upon request.

CAUTION
This symbol indicates that the waste of electrical and electronic equipment must not be disposed as
unsorted municipal waste and must be collected separately. Contact an authorized representative of the
manufacturer for information concerning the decommissioning of your equipment.

CAUTION
Federal law restricts the sale, distribution, and use of this device to or on the order of a physician.

Indications for use

The SIGNA™ Premier system is a whole body magnetic resonance scanner designed to support high resolution, high
signal-to-noise ratio, and short scan times. It is indicated for use as a diagnostic imaging device to produce axial,
sagittal, coronal, and oblique images, spectroscopic images, parametric maps, and/or spectra, dynamic images of the

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

vi
© 2021 General Electric Company
structures and/or functions of the entire body, including, but not limited to, head, neck, TMJ, spine, breast, heart,
abdomen, pelvis, joints, prostate, blood vessels, and musculoskeletal regions of the body. Depending on the region of
interest being imaged, contrast agents may be used.
The images produced by the SIGNA™ Premier system reflect the spatial distribution or molecular environment of
nuclei exhibiting magnetic resonance. These images and/or spectra when interpreted by a trained physician yield
information that may assist in diagnosis.

WARNING
Read the full prescribing information on the contrast media label before use of contrast media. Use contrast
media only in accordance with Indications and Usage as described in full prescribing information.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 vii

What's new in 29.1 software

This topic is provided to communicate important applications training information regarding the 29.1 software
upgrade installation.
GE is pleased to provide a variety of new software features and enhancements designed to improve your image
quality and workflow, promote ease of use and enhance the diagnostic capabilities of your MR system. The following
is a brief overview of several of the key features with your 29.1 software.

New Applications
AIR™ Recon DL is a deep-learning reconstruction application that uses trained neural networks to
reconstruct the good signal and not the noise resulting improved SNR and sharpness and enabling shorter
scan times.
AIR™ Recon is a smart reconstruction algorithm that improves SNR, reduces background noise and
suppresses artifacts.
AIR Touch™ is an automated coil/element selection to optimize uniformity, SNR, artifacts and parallel
imaging tradeoffs.
AIR x™ is a graphic Rx procedure that provides automated slice placement for improved consistency and
accuracy, developed using deep learning. It is available for both Brain and Knee applications.
DISCO Star provides a better patient experience when it comes to abdominal MR imaging. Patients with
limited breath-hold capability or patients unable to follow breathing commands now have the option of free-
breathing dynamic abdominal imaging. With simple, push button dynamic imaging, technologists can overcome
timing challenges for dynamic imaging and avoid repeat scans due to motion artifacts.
Motion Compensation is a new Imaging Option. It is used for cardiac imaging.
MP-RAGE is a one-click application used to acquire high resolution, T1 weighted brain images.
MSDE (Motion Sensitized Driven Equilibrium) is a new Imaging Option. It is used for:
Blood flow suppression to see the vessel wall.
T1 contrast for segmentation of plaque necrotic core, fibrous cap and hemorrhage.
Fat suppression to distinguish plaque from fat.
Multi-station Localizer allows acquisition of a localizer of the patient's whole body or whole spine for up to
5 stations.
MUSE is a one-click application used to acquire high resolution, multi-shot DWI/DTI scans.
STIR Imaging Option is now compatible with MUSE.
No Slab Wrap is a new 3D scan parameter.
The No Slab Wrap is a scan parameter that allows the application to encode additional slices outside of
the prescribed volume to reduce slab wrap artifacts.
Overlap Locs: Overlap Locs is a legacy 3D multislab scan parameter to describe the overlap number of slices
between neighboring slabs for multi-slab scanning.
The number of slab overlap slices is now automatically calculated depending on the number of prescribed
slices. The Overlap Locs button scan parameter has been removed.
oZTEo (MR bone) is a type-in, 3D, Gradient Echo, Fast SPGR sequence used to create images with bright
bone signal, flat soft tissue, and an inverted grayscale.
PROGRES is Distortion Correction, a scan parameter, selected from the Details tab with DWI or DTI
acquisitions to estimate and correct for B0-inhomogeneity induced distortion. It is optimized for neuro scans.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

viii
© 2021 General Electric Company
What's new in 29.1 software

Slice Resolution % is a new scan parameter on the Details screen. It is used to define the zero-padding in on
both side of kz direction in k-space. For example, when Slice Resolution (%) is set to 50, it is equivalent to the
old ZIPx2 Imaging Option. When Slice Resolution (%) is set to 25, it is equivalent to the old Zipx4 Imaging
Option.

Application Enhancements
HyperBand is compatible with EPI: DWI, DTI, GRE EPI and fMRI
HyperSense has been expanded to additional 3D GRE-based sequences including LAVA, LAVA Flex, DISCO,
MP-RAGE, BRAVO, MENSA, MERGE, COSMIC, FIESTA-C.
DWI enhancements includes multiple improvements that were made to DWI and FOCUS DWI to improve
image quality and workflow specifically for liver diffusion.
MAVRIC SL is a 3D isotropic acquisition that now includes T2-weighting (in addition to T1, PD and STIR),
Flexible No Phase Wrap and an automated-parameter setting for streamlined workflow.
HyperMAVRIC SL is a new feature that enables a 40% shorter scan time by automatically tailoring the
acquisition to the patient's implant.
Flexible No Phase Wrap is a scan parameter rather than an Imaging Option. It allows you to adjust the
amount of phase oversampling to avoid wrapping artifacts to reduce scan time.
Scan parameter name change for 3D applications.
# Scan Locs and “Locs per Slab” is changed to “Slices per Slab”. It is the number of reconstructed slices.
PROMO Imaging Option is now compatible with BRAVO and MP-RAGE.
The Scan Advisory area on the scan parameter screen has been updated.
Snapshot SSFSE
Allows multiple slice locations per trigger for Respiratory Triggering.
Allows multiple slice locations per trigger for Navigator.
ZIP x 2 and ZIP x 4 Imaging Options have been retired and replaced by Slice Resolution % scan parameter
located on the Details screen.

User CVs
Several new User CVs are available:

AIR Recon
Chemical Shift Reduction
Reformat Optimization
Region Fraction
Scan Optimization for SAT for SIGNA Premier
Slice encoding order
Slice Partial Fourier
Slice Resolution (70%-100%) User CV has been renamed Slice Partial Fourier.
There is now a Slice Resolution % scan parameter on the Details screen.
Tensor filename
Several User CVs have been retired and therefore the following User CV topics have been deleted from the
manual.
Adaptive WW/WL

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 ix

Classic Annefact Suppression User CV has been retired.

Editable TE User CV
Fast Prescan Phase Correction User CV
Noise Bias Reduction User CV has been retired from the 3DASL one-click application.
Receiver Gain User CV
Slice Uniformity User CV

Post process enhancements

BrainWave AIF has multiple user interface changes including a leakage indicator for functional curves. In
addition, there are changes to the Fiber Track tab and procedure.
MAGiC updates include Measure distance and User Mask to define volumes of interest.
MR General Review has multiple user interface changes.
READY View has multiple user interface changes that includes processing DWI scans acquired with
multiple b-values.
Self-Cal Phase Contrast (SCPC) is an in-line post-processing task that reduces the residual phase error in
2D flow measurements.
SCENIC is a filter designed to reduce coil intensity variations through a calibration process and to improve the
quality of images acquired using surface coils.

System enhancements
Exam Split allows you to split a multi-anatomy and/or modality exam into separate exams.
Added an emergency stop recovery procedure:
SIGNA Premier emergency stop recovery procedure
Password changes, for details, see Password introduction.
All MR system users need to be assigned a username, password and roles by the site administrator. The
username and password are needed for system logon. For details, see Administrator assigns EA3 roles
procedure.
Guided Install SAR/dB/dt, which allowed level 2 SAR dB/dt access is now replaced by a data privacy group:
GELevel2Group.
Guided Install System Preferences, has been replaced by a data privacy group: GESystemPreferenceGroup.
To create or edit a protocol now requires membership to a data privacy group: ProtocolEdit.
McAffee ePo anti-virus software option is now available. For all McAfee content, see the Privacy and
Security operator manual.
The Privacy and security section of Read me First chapter and much of the Data Privacy content has been
moved to a stand-alone Privacy and Security operator manual.
MDR changes have been made to the Applicable Standards and Regulations and Safety chapter.
Image Protocol Management > Notifications topic has been updated.
Image Protocol Management > Register the scanner procedure has been updated.
Remote software patch download procedure has been updated.
Remote full software download procedure is a new procedure.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

x
© 2021 General Electric Company
What's new in 29.1 software

New equipment components

Mobile table for SIGNA Premier
Base plate for SIGNA Premier head and neck scans

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 xi

xii 5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

Strong Magnetic Field i

Revision history ii
Applicable Regulations and Standards iii

What's new in 29.1 software viii

User CVs ix
System enhancements x

Quick guides introduction QuickGuide-1

Auto Navigator Tracker step-by-step picture guide procedure QuickGuide-2
Select a localizer task QuickGuide-2
Select a localizer Breath Hold option QuickGuide-3
Select Post Processing QuickGuide-3
Save and Start localizer scan QuickGuide-5
Setup a Navigator scan QuickGuide-6
Save and start the scan QuickGuide-8
Cube DIR step-by-step picture guide procedure QuickGuide-9
Select Cube DIR QuickGuide-9
Position 3D slab QuickGuide-10
Adjust values QuickGuide-11
Save and Scan QuickGuide-13
DISCO step-by-step picture guide procedure QuickGuide-14
Select series QuickGuide-14
Position 3D slab QuickGuide-15
Define and check parameters QuickGuide-16
Save and Scan QuickGuide-19
Fluoro Trigger step-by-step picture guide procedure QuickGuide-22
Open Fluoro Trigger QuickGuide-22
Set User Control Variables QuickGuide-23
Contrast, Save, Scan QuickGuide-24
Define aorta QuickGuide-25
Visualize Contrast QuickGuide-27
Linking step-by-step picture guide procedure QuickGuide-28
Select series to link QuickGuide-28
Establish parameters to be linked QuickGuide-30
Setup links and scan QuickGuide-32
MAGiC post process step-by-step picture guide procedure QuickGuide-36
Launch MAGiC post process application QuickGuide-36
MAGiC review session QuickGuide-37

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 TOC- 1

Manipulate MAGiC images QuickGuide-40

Save procedures QuickGuide-40
Exit MAGiC post processing QuickGuide-41
Navigator step-by-step picture guide procedure QuickGuide-43
Select a task QuickGuide-43
Select Navigator QuickGuide-44
Select the Tracker GRx tool QuickGuide-44
Position the Tracker QuickGuide-45
Deposit slices QuickGuide-46
Define the Navigator parameters QuickGuide-46
Scan QuickGuide-47
Observe/adjust Waveform QuickGuide-47
View images QuickGuide-49
SmartPrep step-by-step picture guide procedure QuickGuide-50
Open Tracker QuickGuide-50
Position Tracker QuickGuide-51
Set User Control Variables QuickGuide-52
Prescribe the imaging volume QuickGuide-52
Fill in Contrast amount QuickGuide-53
Save Rx and Scan QuickGuide-53

Chapter 1: Read me first 1-1

About this manual 1-2
About MR Scanner 1-6
Access additional operator manual instructions procedure 1-8
Feature List 1-11
Online help 1-26
Online Help introduction 1-26
Open/close the manual procedure 1-28
Add a topic to Favorites procedure 1-29
Print a topic procedure 1-30
View a movie procedure 1-31
Search procedure 1-32
Passwords 1-34
Password introduction 1-34
Password 1-35
Password rules considerations 1-35
Change your password procedure 1-36
User Interface 1-37
System user interface introduction 1-37
User interface terminology 1-38

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

TOC- 2
© 2021 General Electric Company
Header area 1-40
Footer area 1-42
Work areas 1-45
Worklist Manager work area 1-46
Scan work area 1-49
Image Management work area 1-51
Viewer work area 1-57
READY View work area 1-58
MR General Review work area 1-62
System Management work area 1-66
Sessions 1-68
Session introduction 1-68
Preferences 1-69
Preferences introduction 1-69
Graphic Rx Toolbar procedure 1-70
AIR™ Recon DL save source images procedure 1-71
Set Ready Brain reference line preference procedures 1-73
SAR Scout Preferences procedure 1-75
Research/clinical mode activate procedure 1-76
Save localizers preferences procedure 1-77
Scan parameter details procedure 1-78
Save FTMRA Realtime images procedure 1-79
Show Slices in Graphic Rx procedure 1-80
Automatic table movement procedure 1-81
Anatomical Region menu preferences procedure 1-82
Security tools 1-84
Security tools introduction 1-84
Enterprise Audit Trail introduction 1-85
McAfee manual scan procedure 1-86
Data Privacy 1-87
Data Privacy introduction 1-87
Data Privacy Controlled Access considerations 1-89
Applications tab 1-90
Role-based membership considerations 1-91
Administrator assigns EA3 roles procedure 1-93
Local Users tab 1-99
Add or remove a user from a group procedure 1-101
Groups tab 1-102
Add users to a group procedure 1-104
Remove a user's group membership procedure 1-105
Enterprise tab 1-106

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 TOC- 3

Chapter 2: Safety 2-1

Introduction 2-2
Safety Information 2-3
Incident reporting 2-4
Intended use 2-5
Clinical benefit 2-6
Indications for use 2-7
Restrictions on use 2-8
Instructions for use 2-9
Contraindications for use 2-11
Product identification labels 2-13
User Training 2-20
Safety standards 2-21
MR safety standards introduction 2-21
IEC EMC compliance 2-22
Temperature and humidity specifications 2-27
Transportation and storage 2-28
Magnetic fields 2-29
Magnetic field basics introduction 2-29
Static magnetic fields 2-30
Security zone 2-32
Exclusion zone 2-38
Biological effects 2-40
Ferromagnetic objects 2-41
Spatial magnetic field data 2-43
Understanding spatial gradients 2-48
The B0 field 2-49
Spatial gradient 2-51
Locations of spatial gradient occurrences 2-53
Field strength and bore comparisons 2-58
3.0T wide bore MR systems 2-60
Static spatial gradients on concentric cylinders 2-63
Quench/Cryogens 2-65
Quench and cryogen introduction 2-65
Cryogen and quench concerns 2-66
Check cryogen levels procedure 2-68
Handle contact with liquid cryogens procedure 2-69
Magnet rundown concept 2-70
Magnet Rundown Unit test procedure 2-71
Primary magnet rundown procedure 2-73
Secondary magnet rundown procedure 2-74

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

TOC- 4
© 2021 General Electric Company
Quench with vent failure procedure 2-77
Gradient Magnetic fields 2-78
Gradient magnetic fields introduction 2-78
Calculate maximum gradient output 2-79
Gradient output limits 2-80
Peripheral nerve stimulation 2-81
Acoustic noise 2-84
Electromagnetic fields 2-85
Electromagnetic fields introduction 2-85
Tissue heating 2-86
Contact point heating 2-88
Conductive material heating 2-90
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) limits 2-91
MNS frequencies 2-94
Clinical hazards 2-95
Clinical hazards introduction 2-95
High risk patients 2-96
Scanning hazards 2-97
Equipment hazards 2-99
Equipment hazards introduction 2-99
Laser alignment lights 2-100
Cables and equipment connections 2-101
Clinical screening 2-104
Clinical screening introduction 2-104
MR compatibility 2-105
MR compatibility test guidelines 2-105
Screening form 2-107
Patient emergencies 2-109
Patient emergencies introduction 2-109
Patient alert system 2-111
Emergency stop 2-112
Emergency off 2-113
PDU main breaker 2-114
Cradle emergency release: SIGNA™ Premier 2-115
Mobile table emergency release procedure 2-117
Additional warnings and cautions 2-118
Scan and Display introduction 2-118
Scan 2-119
Display 2-129
System maintenance 2-133
System maintenance introduction 2-133

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 TOC- 5

General cleaning and disinfection 2-134

Exhaust fan 2-136
Maintenance services 2-137
Procedures 2-138
Procedures introduction 2-138
Protect the security and exclusion zones procedure 2-140
Screen patients and personnel procedure 2-142
Prepare the patient procedure 2-144
Protect the patient from RF burns procedure 2-146
Protect the patient's eyes and ears procedure 2-153
Patient emergencies procedure 2-155
Equipment or environmental emergencies procedure 2-156
Safety review 2-157
Service schedule 2-158
PM service schedules introduction 2-158
MR system PM service schedule 2-159
SIGNA™ Premier: Planned Maintenance Plan 2-162
China RoHS label directive 2-163

Chapter 3: Equipment 3-1

Startup/Shutdown 3-2
System startup and shutdown introduction 3-2
System startup procedure 3-3
System Power Off procedure 3-5
System logon procedures 3-6
System emergency logon procedure 3-7
System logout procedure 3-8
System restart procedure 3-9
SIGNA™ Premier: startup from an extended shutdown procedure 3-10
SIGNA™ Premier: extended shutdown procedure 3-12
Emergency shutdown procedure 3-13
SIGNA™ Premier: emergency stop recovery procedure 3-14
TPS reset procedure 3-15
Phantom scan 3-16
About phantom scan 3-16
Scan phantom procedure 3-17
SNR test procedure 3-20
System test procedure 3-21
DAQA trend setting procedure 3-23
DAQA messages 3-25
Equipment components 3-29

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

TOC- 6
© 2021 General Electric Company
Equipment components introduction 3-29
Workstation introduction 3-31
Computer concept 3-32
Keyboard concept 3-34
Mouse controls concept 3-36
Equipment cabinet room concept 3-37
Gradient coils concept 3-38
RF coils introduction 3-39
Connect coils procedure 3-41
Coil malfunction consideration 3-42
Coil signal non-uniformity considerations 3-43
TDI coil suite 3-44
TDI coil suite introduction 3-44
TDI coil workflow 3-46
Safety concept 3-50
Coil configurations concept 3-55
PA, AA, and PVA component patient position procedure 3-57
PA, Head Neck Array, and AA component patient position procedure 3-61
PA component patient position procedure 3-65
Two AA components patient position procedure 3-67
Whole body patient position procedure 3-71
Magnet Displays 3-75
Magnet displays introduction 3-75
In-Room Display concept 3-76
In-Room Display coil screen 3-78
In-room Display gating screen 3-80
In-Room Display patient setup screen 3-82
In-Room Display scan time and table location screen 3-84
Setup In-Room Display procedure 3-86
Reset In-Room monitor screen procedure 3-87
Set-up patient information from In-Room Display procedure 3-88
Magnet controls 3-89
Magnet controls introduction 3-89
Magnet controls concept 3-90
Patient comfort procedure 3-92
Patient Alert 3-94
Patient alert introduction 3-94
Patient alert procedure 3-96
Table 3-98
SIGNA™ Premier eXpress mobile table concept 3-98
Table 3-107

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 TOC- 7

SIGNA™ Premier eXpress mobile table Base plate concept 3-107

Table 3-109
SIGNA™ Premier: stationary table concept 3-109
Dock and undock the table procedure for SIGNA™ Premier eXpress mobile table 3-114
Dock and undock the table procedure 3-116
Stop and abort 3-117
Emergency stop and abort scan buttons concept 3-117
Phantom breakage 3-118
Phantom breakage of spillage considerations 3-118
PAC 3-119
SIGNA™ Premier: PAC for stationary table concept 3-119
PAC 3-121
SIGNA™ Premier: PAC for eXpress mobile table concept 3-121
System specifications 3-125
SIGNA™ Premier: system specifications concept 3-125
3.0T technical specifications 3-125
SIGNA Premier eXpress mobile table specifications 3-127
System Management 3-128
System Management introduction 3-128
System Management work area 3-129
Open System Management work area procedure 3-131
Open the Service Desktop Manager procedure 3-132
e-Report procedure 3-133
Error log view messages procedure 3-134
Legacy Image Converter procedure 3-135
Planned Maintenance procedures 3-137
Raw data save procedure 3-138
Secure Service Access procedure 3-139
Remote service configuration procedure 3-141
Create a software download user role procedure 3-143
Remote software patch download procedure 3-147
Remote full software download procedure 3-152
Service Notepad write a message procedure 3-157
TiP Virtual Assist activation procedure 3-158
Guided Install 3-159
Guided Install introduction 3-159
Map a protocol to HIS/RIS code procedure 3-160
Configure MR with the HIS/RIS system procedure 3-162
SPR snap procedure 3-163
Set default protocol library procedure 3-164
Patient anonymize settings procedure 3-165

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

TOC- 8
© 2021 General Electric Company
System date and time procedure 3-166
Auto start procedure 3-169
iLinq procedure 3-171
Connect to Guided Focus Ultrasound system procedure 3-173

Chapter 4: Patient handling 4-1

Patient transfer to a stationary table procedure 4-2
Patient transfer to a SIGNA Premier eXpress mobile table procedure 4-3
Patient position procedure 4-5
Patient landmark procedure 4-10
Landmark with the alignment light procedure 4-12
Patient return to landmark procedure 4-13
Patient padding 4-14
Padding introduction 4-14
Whole body padding considerations 4-15
Surface coil padding considerations 4-16
Cardiac coil padding tips for cardiac scan considerations 4-17

Chapter 5: Scan workflow 5-1

Scan Session open procedure 5-2
Scan Session close procedure 5-3
Scan Worklist Manager 5-4
WorkList Manager introduction 5-4
Worklist Manager open work area procedure 5-5
Edit a patient procedure 5-6
Duplicate a patient procedure 5-7
Delete a patient procedure 5-8
Enter a new patient procedure 5-9
Find procedure 5-10
Patient List control contents procedure 5-11
Refresh data procedure 5-12
Reorganize columns procedure 5-13
Search database procedure 5-14
Sort the patient list procedure 5-15
Scan Workflow Manager 5-16
Workflow Manager introduction 5-16
Anatomical Region procedure 1 5-17
Anatomical Region procedure 2 5-19
Anatomical Region considerations 5-21
Series states considerations 5-26
Show future data procedure 5-27
Save exam as protocol procedure 5-28

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 TOC- 9

Add scan sequence procedure 5-29

Add post process task procedure 5-30
Rename task procedure 5-37
Scan with Auto Paste procedure 5-38
Scan with AutoBind procedure 5-41
Copy/Paste series procedure 5-44
Duplicate series procedure 5-45
Cut series procedure 5-46
Move series procedure 5-47
Link series procedure 5-48
Edit link procedure 5-52
Break link procedure 5-54
Scan workflow 5-55
MR workflow introduction 5-55
New patient workflow 5-57
Multi-station localizer procedure 5-59
Scan with a protocol procedure 5-62
Scan Advisory area considerations 5-65
AIR Touch™ auto coil select procedure 5-68
AIR Touch™ auto coil select considerations 5-70
Scan with multiple coils workflow 5-72
Scan the same series procedure 5-74
AutoScan considerations 5-75
SAR Scout scan procedure 5-76
Calibration scan procedure 5-78
High Order Shim procedure 5-81
Auto carry forward contrast procedure 5-86
Stop scan/end exam procedure 5-88
Scan Anatomy: BrainWave 5-89
BrainWave introduction 5-89
BrainWave RT introduction 5-94
fMRI scan control screen 5-97
fMRI scan minimize screen 5-105
fMRI paradigm screens 5-107
Paradigm scan considerations 5-117
Paradigm Dump tab 5-120
Paradigm Network export/import tab 5-122
Paradigm Settings tab 5-123
Paradigm Software Paradigms tab 5-133
Paradigm MNI Private Tags Dump tab 5-134
Paradigm Help tab 5-136

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

TOC- 10
© 2021 General Electric Company
Equipment and patient setup 5-137
Patient setup procedure 5-138
fMRI data procedure 5-139
fMRI On-view (right-click) procedures 5-144
Paradigm introduction 5-145
Paradigm Manager procedure 5-146
Simple Block procedure 5-148
Complex Block procedure 5-150
Free Form or Event Related procedure 5-152
Resting State procedure 5-154
.txt file procedure 5-156
Paradigm deletion procedure 5-161
Paradigm Studio introduction 5-162
Paradigm Studio screen 5-164
Paradigm terminology 5-168
Software installation procedure 5-172
Software startup procedure 5-173
Open procedure 5-175
Size window procedure 5-176
Paradigm: label procedure 5-177
Contrast selection procedure 5-178
Validate procedure 5-179
Preview procedure 5-180
Save procedure 5-181
Export procedure 5-182
Delete procedure 5-183
Paradigm: General Tool procedure 5-184
Paradigm: Timeline Tool procedure 5-185
Simple Block: Paradigm workflow 5-187
Simple Block: Setup procedure 5-188
Simple Block: Resource Pool procedure 5-192
Simple Block: Control Statistical Condition procedure 5-195
Simple Block: Stimulus Statistical Condition procedure 5-198
Simple Block: Preview and save procedure 5-201
Complex Block Paradigm workflow 5-202
Complex Block: Setup procedure 5-203
Complex Block: Resource Pool procedure 5-207
Complex Block: Statistical Condition procedure 5-209
Complex Block: Left Motor Statistical Condition procedure 5-214
Complex Block: Right Motor Statistical Condition procedure 5-219
Complex Block: Preview and save procedure 5-225

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 TOC- 11

Resting State: Paradigm workflow 5-228

Resting State: Setup procedure 5-229
Resting State: Resource Pool procedure 5-235
Resting State: Statistical Condition procedure 5-237
Resting State: Preview and save procedure 5-239
Free Form: Paradigm workflow 5-241
Free Form: Setup procedure 5-243
Free Form: Resource Pool procedure 5-247
Free Form: Rest Satistical Conditions procedure 5-250
Free Form: Audio Statistical Conditions procedure 5-259
Free Form: Preview and save procedure 5-266
Event Related: Paradigm workflow 5-268
Event Related: Setup procedure 5-269
Event Related: Resource Pool procedure 5-274
Event Related: Task 1 Statistical Conditions procedure 5-277
Event Related: Task 2 Statistical Conditions procedure 5-283
Event Related: Preview and save procedure 5-290
BrainWave Data Apps introduction 5-292
Processing workflow 5-293
Skull Strip: BrainWave SS introduction 5-294
Skull Strip: Scan Task procedure 5-295
Skull Strip: Skull Stripping procedure 5-297
fMRI: BrainWave introduction 5-299
fMRI: Task Activated process procedure 5-300
fMRI: Resting State process procedure 5-303
DTI: BrainWave DTI introduction 5-306
DTI: Scan Task DTI procedure 5-308
DTI: DTI process procedure 5-310
Paradigm import procedure 5-312
Clinical Report procedure 5-315
BrainWave Session Apps introduction 5-318
Work area 5-319
Data Selector tabs 5-320
Data Selector: Background tab 5-322
Data Selector: Foreground tab 5-323
Data Selector: Tracts tab 5-324
Data Selector: Other tab 5-325
Control Panel 5-326
Control Panel: Display tab 5-327
Control Panel: fMRI tab 5-333
Control Panel: DTI tab 5-339

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

TOC- 12
© 2021 General Electric Company
Control Panel: Save tab 5-342
Control Panel: Log tab 5-346
Visualization workflow 5-348
Open procedure 5-349
Deskull check procedure 5-350
Overlay maps procedure 5-351
Fiber tracts procedure 5-357
Right-click image controls procedure 5-364
Clinical Report procedure 5-367
Close procedure 5-370
Scan Anatomy: Breast implant 5-371
Breast implant workflow 5-371
Bright silicon contrast procedure 5-376
Silicon suppressed contrast FSE-IR procedure 5-377
Silicon suppressed contrast FSE procedure 5-378
Saline implants procedure 5-379
Scan Anatomy: Cardiac 5-380
Cardiac introduction 5-380
Record gated signals procedure 5-382
Basic cardiac planes procedure 5-383
Aorta plane procedure 5-385
Aortic valve plane procedure 5-386
Cardiac outflow tracts and chambers procedure 5-388
Mitral valve procedure 5-390
Pulmonary valve procedure 5-392
Tricuspid valve procedure 5-394
Leads and electrodes considerations 5-396
Setup the coil procedure 5-397
ECG gated exam procedure 5-398
Peripheral gated exam procedure 5-404
Acquire a 2D FIESTA Shim Volume procedure 5-406
3D Heart workflow 5-410
Ischemic heart workflow 5-416
Left main coronary artery workflow 5-420
Patent foramen ovale workflow 5-421
Right coronary artery workflow 5-423
Phase sensitive MDE workflow 5-425
2D Single Shot MDE scan considerations 5-429
2D MDE scan considerations 5-432
3D MDE scan considerations 5-434
Scan Anatomy: Ready Brain 5-436

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 TOC- 13

Ready Brain workflow 5-436

Create links to Ready Brain procedure 5-440
Scan Anatomy: respiratory 5-442
Respiratory introduction 5-442
Respiratory bellows procedure 5-443
Scan SAR 5-445
SAR and dB/dt concept 5-445
SAR and dB/dt Limits screen 5-446
Scan SAR 5-450
SAR and dB/dt considerations 5-450
SAR or dB/dt level change within a scan procedure 5-454
Low SAR mode procedure 5-456
Retain SAR dB/dt levels procedure 5-461
RTSAR considerations 5-462
Monitor SAR during an exam procedure 5-463
Scan AutoStart 5-466
AutoStart introduction 5-466
Create/edit protocol procedure 5-467
Scan procedure 5-468
AutoStart from scan room procedure 5-469
Disable procedure 5-470
Scan AutoView 5-471
AutoView introduction 5-471
AutoView considerations 5-472
Scan AutoVoice 5-473
AutoVoice introduction 5-473
Activate AutoVoice procedure 5-474
Control volume procedure 5-475
Speed Control procedure 5-476
Reset the speed to default value procedure 5-477
Fluoro Trigger procedure 5-478
Add a new language procedure 5-479
Record instructions procedure 5-480
Delete a language procedure 5-481
Delete a site message procedure 5-482
Set a language as the default procedure 5-483
Scan Stop Watch 5-484
Count procedure 5-484
Reset procedure 5-485
Scan Contrast/scan timing parameters 5-486
PD/T2 5-486

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

TOC- 14
© 2021 General Electric Company
T1 5-487
T2* 5-488
Vascular 5-489
Scan Artifacts 5-490
Artifacts tips introduction 5-490
Annefact artifact considerations 5-491
Baseline noise on spectrum considerations 5-493
C-spine Fat SAT (Bulk Susceptibility) uniformity artifact considerations 5-494
DWI and DTI ring artifact considerations 5-495
Gradient Echo Chemical Shift artifact considerations 5-496
Metal artifact considerations 5-498
Non-uniformity of signal artifact considerations 5-499
PROPELLER artifact considerations 5-500
RF Inhomogeneity artifact considerations 5-504
Shading artifact considerations 5-505
Silenz streak considerations 5-506
Star artifact considerations 5-507
Surface coil artifact considerations 5-508
Truncation artifact considerations 5-509
Worm hole considerations 5-511
Scan Prescan 5-512
Prescan introduction 5-512
Auto Prescan considerations 5-513
Manual Prescan workflow 5-514
Center Frequency Coarse adjustment procedure 5-515
Transmit Gain adjustment procedure 5-517
Center Frequency Fine adjustment procedure 5-519
Receive Gain adjustment procedure 5-521
Fat/Water in Prescan procedure 5-522
TI time verification procedure 5-524
Prescan a spectroscopy series procedure 5-525
Magnify a region along the axis of a waveform window procedure 5-526
Spectroscopy Auto Prescan considerations 5-527
MNS Prescan procedure 5-528
Scan Protocols 5-529
Protocol introduction 5-529
Protocol Session procedure 5-530
Create/edit procedure 5-531
Save a protocol in scan procedure 5-533
Define protocol as favorite procedure 5-535
Organize Site protocols procedure 5-536

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 TOC- 15

Organize protocols from the Worklist Manager procedure 5-537

Delete protocol procedure 5-538
Delete series procedure 5-539
Peripheral test protocols considerations 5-540
ProtoCopy procedure 5-541
Scan Protocol Exchange 5-542
Protocol Exchange introduction 5-542
Open procedure 5-543
Import pre-requisite procedure 5-544
Import procedure 5-545
Export procedure 5-547
Add site information procedure 5-549
Report preferences procedure 5-550
Preview report procedure 5-551
Print procedure 5-553
Scan Protocols IPM 5-554
Imaging Protocol Manager introduction 5-554
Open the Service browser procedure 5-555
Register the scanner procedure 5-556
Notification considerations 5-560
Restore backed up protocols procedure 5-562
Diagnostics procedure 5-564
Logs procedure 5-566
Scan Protocol Notes 5-568
Protocol Notes introduction 5-568
Add text procedure 5-569
Add an image procedure 5-570
Add an image from CD/USB procedure 5-572
Size an image procedure 5-573
Erase image information procedure 5-574
Delete an image in a Protocol Note procedure 5-576
Copy/paste notes between series procedure 5-577

Chapter 6: Scan parameters 6-1

Scan Rx parameters 6-2
Scan Rx parameters introduction 6-2
Save Rx consideration 6-4
Prep Scan consideration 6-5
Scan consideration 6-6
Scan Messages considerations 6-7
Scan parameter trade-offs 6-8

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

TOC- 16
© 2021 General Electric Company
3D Geometry Correction considerations 6-9
3DASL considerations 6-13
Acceleration Factor considerations 6-14
AIR™ Recon DL procedure 6-15
Auto IR Band procedure 6-20
Bandwidth consideration 6-22
Calibration in Prescan considerations 6-23
Contrast Amount and Type consideration 6-25
Distortion Correction consideration 6-26
RF Drive Mode considerations 6-28
RF Drive Mode: Optimized considerations 6-30
RF Drive Modes: Quadrature (CP) and Preset considerations 6-31
ETL consideration 6-34
Excitation Mode consideration 6-35
Explicit Rx procedure 6-40
Fat shift direction considerations 6-41
Flip Angle - GRE consideration 6-43
Flip Angle - Refocus considerations 6-44
Flow Comp Direction consideration 6-46
FOV consideration 6-47
Frequency Direction consideration 6-48
Maximum Rescan Time consideration 6-49
Mode selection procedure 6-50
NEX consideration 6-51
No Phase Wrap consideration 6-52
No Slab Wrap considerations 6-55
Number of Shots consideration 6-58
Pause before scan procedure 6-59
Phase Correct considerations 6-60
Phase FOV consideration 6-61
Phase and Frequency consideration 6-63
Plane selection procedure 6-64
Patient Orientation consideration 6-65
Real Time Center Frequency consideration 6-66
Real Time Field Adjustment consideration 6-70
Recovery Time considerations 6-73
Save Original considerations 6-74
Start and End Locations considerations 6-75
Slices and slabs considerations 6-76
Slice Resolution % considerations 6-78
Slice Spacing consideration 6-80

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 TOC- 17

Slice Thickness consideration 6-81

Spokes per Segment considerations 6-82
TE and TE2 consideration 6-83
TI consideration 6-84
TR consideration 6-85
Auto TR procedure 6-86
Scan Graphic Rx 6-89
Graphic Rx introduction 6-89
Toolbar open/close procedure 6-90
Wide bore systems with a stationary table considerations 6-91
Wide bore systems with a mobile table considerations 6-93
AIR x™ introduction 6-96
AIR x™ brain procedure 6-97
AIR x™ knee procedure 6-101
2D procedure 6-106
3D procedure 6-109
Copy/Paste procedures 6-110
Erase GRx or SAT procedure 6-112
IR SAT bands procedure 6-113
Magnifying Glass procedure 6-114
Single Voxel spectroscopy procedure 6-115
PROBE 2D CSI Spectroscopy procedure 6-118
3D CSI Spectroscopy procedure 6-121
PROBE-P edit procedure 6-124
Radial prescription procedure 6-126
Report Cursor procedure 6-127
Shim volume procedure 6-128
Select Series procedure 6-132
Drag and drop image procedure 6-133
Graphic Rx Tools procedure 6-134
Tracker and 3D volume procedure 6-137
Graphic Rx Tools procedure 6-139
Reverse slice order procedure 6-142
Save localizer images procedure 6-144
Show slices procedures 6-146
Show Annotation procedure 6-148
Show No Phase Wrap procedure 6-150
Show Coil Extents procedure 6-151
Full Annotation procedure 6-152
Scan Saturation 6-153
SAT introduction 6-153

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

TOC- 18
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chemical SAT Pulses procedure 6-154
Spatial SAT procedure 6-157
Copy/Paste SAT procedure 6-159
Scan Filters 6-160
Intensity Filter and Intensity Correction introduction 6-160
ClariView screen 6-165
reFINE (PURE) cosiderations 6-168
SCENIC considerations 6-169
Filter considerations 6-171
Add an Intensity Filter or Intensity Correction to a scan series procedure 6-174
Add an Intensity Filter as a post-process task in scan procedure 6-176
Run a manual filter task in the Workflow Manager procedure 6-177
Custom Intensity Filter added from ClariView procedure 6-178
Scan Applications 6-181
Applications introduction 6-181
Application annotation 6-183
3DASL: scan procedure 6-184
3DCINE-SPGR and FIESTA: scan procedure 6-189
4DFLOW: scan procedure 6-193
BRAVO: scan procedure 6-196
BREASE: scan procedure 6-199
Cine IR: scan procedure 6-202
COSMIC: scan procedure 6-204
DISCO: scan procedure 6-205
DISCO: with Star considerations 6-212
IDEAL IQ: scan procedure 6-213
IDEAL IQ: display images procedure 6-216
MAGiC introduction 6-218
MAGiC: scan procedure 6-220
MAGiC: post process icon procedures 6-227
MAGiC: post process right-click procedures 6-231
MAGiC: post process menu considerations 6-234
MAGiC: post process procedure 6-238
MAGiC: SyMaps® procedure 6-244
MAGiC: User mask procedure 6-247
MAGiC: Segmentation table procedure 6-252
MAGiC: Image settings procedure 6-254
MAGiC: Zoom procedure 6-256
MAGiC: Keyboard shortcuts considerations 6-257
MAVRIC SL: scan procedure 6-258
MP-RAGE: scan procedure 6-266

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 TOC- 19

MR-Touch concept 6-268

MR-Touch: workflow 6-271
MR-Touch: protocol procedure 6-272
MR-Touch: patient setup procedure 6-275
MR-Touch: scan procedure 6-278
MR-Touch: ROI procedure 6-280
Multi Station: patient preparation procedure 6-282
Multi Station: localizer procedure 6-283
Multi Station: localizer procedure, add the Multi Station protocol 6-284
Multi Station: localizer procedure, setup the localizer for the Multi Station protocol 6-285
Multi Station: localizer procedure, scan the localizers 6-288
Multi Station: setup procedure 6-289
Multi Station: scan procedure 6-292
MUSE: scan procedure 6-294
QuickSTEP: scan procedure 6-298
Real Time: scan procedure 6-301
Real Time: iDrive Pro Plus Acquire tab 6-302
Real Time: iDrive Pro Plus Review tab 6-307
Silent: scan procedure 6-310
Silenz: scan procedure 6-311
Silenz: MRA scan procedure 6-316
PROPELLER Silent Neuro Package and Silent Suite PROPELLER (Quiet): notes and procedure 6-319
SmartPrep: patient preparation procedure 6-322
SmartPrep: localizer procedure 6-323
SmartPrep: setup procedure 6-324
SmartPrep: scan procedure 6-326
T1MAP: scan procedure 6-328
T1 Map considerations 6-332
T1 Map screens 6-333
T1 Map workflow 6-337
T1 Map optional procedure 6-340
T1 Map scan protocol considerations 6-341
T2MAP: cartigram scan procedure 6-343
T2MAP: cardiac scan procedure 6-345
TRICKS: scan procedure 6-347
Scan PSDs 6-350
PSD introduction 6-350
Prescribe and scan a pulse sequence procedure 6-354
Change PSD within a protocol procedure 6-355
3-Plane Localizer introduction 6-356
3-Plane Localizer considerations 6-357

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

TOC- 20
© 2021 General Electric Company
EPI family introduction 6-359
EPI scan parameter selections 6-360
DW EPI scan considerations 6-365
MAGiC DWI (Synthetic DWI) introduction 6-375
MAGiC DWI (Synthetic DWI) scan procedure 6-377
Diffusion Tensor EPI scan considerations 6-380
FLAIR EPI scan considerations 6-382
Gradient Echo EPI scan considerations 6-384
Spin Echo EPI scan considerations 6-386
FSE family introduction 6-388
FSE scan parameter selections 6-389
FSE scan considerations 6-393
FSE Double and Triple IR scan considerations 6-395
FSE-IR scan considerations 6-397
FRFSE scan considerations 6-399
FLAIR scan considerations 6-402
Cube and Cube T2 FLAIR scan considerations 6-406
Cube DIR scan considerations 6-410
SSFSE and SSFSE-IR scan considerations 6-412
SSFSE and SSFSE-IR black blood scan considerations 6-417
GRE family introduction 6-421
GRE scan parameter selections 6-423
GRE scan considerations 6-425
Fast GRE scan considerations 6-427
oZTEo (MR bone) procedure 6-429
SPGR scan considerations 6-432
Fast SPGR scan considerations 6-434
Fast GRE/SPGR applications 6-437
3D FGRE/FSPGR dual echo procedure 6-438
Multi-echo FGRE/FSPGR scan considerations 6-440
FGRE TimeCourse scan considerations 6-442
Fast GRE-ET scan considerations 6-445
Fast GRE-ET copy/paste after heart rate change procedure 6-447
2D FIESTA scan considerations 6-448
3D FIESTA scan considerations 6-453
3D FIESTA-C scan considerations 6-454
FastCINE scan considerations 6-456
LAVA scan considerations 6-458
LAVA with Flex Imaging Option scan procedure 6-459
MERGE scan considerations 6-463
SWAN scan considerations 6-465

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 TOC- 21

VIBRANT workflow 6-469

VIBRANT with Flex Imaging Option scan procedure 6-476
MNS family introduction 6-482
MNS scan parameter selections 6-483
MNS phosphorus spectrum procedure 6-485
MNS patient position procedure 6-486
MNS Graphic Rx procedure 6-487
Power deposition from coils considerations 6-488
PROPELLER family introduction 6-490
PROPELLER scan parameters selections 6-493
PROPELLER T2/FSE resolution comparison considerations 6-498
PROPELLER DW scan considerations 6-499
PROPELLER T1 FLAIR scan considerations 6-504
PROPELLER T2 FLAIR scan considerations 6-508
PROPELLER anatomy considerations 6-510
Spectroscopy family introduction 6-514
Spectroscopy scan parameter selections 6-517
PROBE SVQ scan considerations 6-527
PROBE-P scan considerations 6-529
PROBE-S scan considerations 6-531
PRESS CSI scan considerations 6-533
PROBE 2D CSI scan considerations 6-534
PROBE 3D CSI scan considerations 6-537
STEAM CSI scan considerations 6-540
TEA-PRESS scan considerations 6-541
Spin Echo family introduction 6-542
SE/IR scan parameter selections 6-543
Spin Echo scan considerations 6-547
Spin Echo flip angle procedure 6-549
Inversion Recovery scan considerations 6-551
Vascular family introduction 6-552
Vascular scan parameter selections 6-554
2D TOF GRE/SPGR scan considerations 6-555
2D TOF FGRE/FSPGR scan considerations 6-557
3D TOF GRE/SPGR scan considerations 6-559
3D TOF FGRE/FSPGR scan considerations 6-561
FastCard GRE/SPGR scan considerations 6-563
FastCINE 2D Phase Contrast scan considerations 6-565
2D Phase Contrast scan considerations 6-567
3D Phase Contrast scan considerations 6-569
Self-Cal Phase Contrast procedure 6-570

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

TOC- 22
© 2021 General Electric Company
Phase Contrast VENC scan considerations 6-577
2D CINE considerations 6-579
Phase Contrast with Cine mode scan considerations 6-585
Inhance Inflow scan considerations 6-587
Inhance 3D Inflow IR scan considerations 6-590
Inhance 3D Velocity scan considerations 6-597
Inhance Deltaflow scan considerations 6-599
Scan Imaging Options 6-606
Imaging Options introduction 6-606
Imaging Options annotation 6-607
Imaging Options procedure 6-610
Flex: build a series in an existing protocol procedure 6-611
Flex: scan a series procedure 6-614
Flex: display images procedure 6-615
IDEAL: build a series in an existing protocol procedure 6-617
IDEAL: scan series procedure 6-619
IDEAL: display images procedure 6-620
Multi-phase: parameter selections procedure 6-621
Multi-phase: manual start procedure 6-624
Navigator considerations 6-625
Navigator: Auto tracker placement procedure 6-628
Navigator: acquire a body scan procedure 6-633
Navigator: acquire a coronary scan procedure 6-644
Acoustic Reduction Technology considerations 6-649
ARC considerations 6-651
ASSET procedure 6-654
Blood Suppression considerations 6-658
Bright Blood ASL considerations 6-659
CCOMP considerations 6-660
Classic considerations 6-661
DE Prepared considerations 6-663
Extended Dynamic Range considerations 6-664
Fast Recovery considerations 6-665
Flow Compensation scan considerations 6-667
Fluoro Trigger with Real Time scan procedure 6-668
fMRI considerations 6-670
Full Echo Train considerations 6-671
HyperBand considerations 6-672
HyperSense considerations 6-676
IR Prepared considerations 6-678
Magnetization Transfer considerations 6-680

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 TOC- 23

MART considerations 6-681

Motion Compensation considerations 6-682
MRCP considerations 6-686
MSDE considerations 6-687
Phase sensitive considerations 6-692
PROMO considerations 6-693
Respiratory Compensation considerations 6-696
Respiratory Gating/Triggering considerations 6-698
SR Prepared considerations 6-699
Sequential considerations 6-700
Square Pixel considerations 6-701
Spatial Spectral RF considerations 6-702
Star considerations 6-703
T1 FLAIR considerations 6-706
T2 FLAIR considerations 6-707
T2 Prep considerations 6-708
Tailored RF considerations 6-709
VERSE considerations 6-710
ZIP considerations 6-711
Scan User CVs 6-713
User CV introduction 6-713
1st Echo TE 6-716
Acquisition Order 6-717
AIR Recon 6-719
Apodization Level 6-720
Turbo ARC 6-721
Arrhythmia Monitoring 6-722
Asymmetric SE 180->90 position shift 6-724
Automatic Water Suppression Optimization 6-725
Background suppression 6-726
Black-Blood Slice Factor 6-727
Blurring Cancellation 6-729
Center K refocusing flip angle 6-730
Chemical Shift Reduction 6-732
Classic Sequential Ordering 6-734
Collect All Available Echoes 6-735
Cube Enhance 6-736
Cube STIR Enhance 6-737
Dynamic TG 6-738
Echo Delay 6-739
Echo spacing optimization 6-740

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

TOC- 24
© 2021 General Electric Company
Echo Tuning 6-741
Edge Slice CSF Suppression 6-742
Enhanced fat suppression 6-743
Enhanced Fine Line Suppression 6-744
Extreme High Resolution Optimization 6-745
Fast Single TR Bipolar Acquisition 6-747
Fat Enhancement 6-748
Fat Saturation Efficiency 6-748
FLAIR Inversion 6-751
Flow Quantification Optimization 6-752
FSE T1 Optimization 6-753
Gradient optimization for Diff All 6-755
Half NEX Enhancement 6-756
Image Acquisition Delay 6-757
Invert Slice-selection Gradients 6-758
IR prep pulse type 6-759
K-Space 6-760
Magnitude Weighting Mask 6-762
Maximum Monitor Period 6-763
Maximum Number of Echoes 6-764
Maximum Number of Slices Optimization 6-765
Minimum Acquisitions 6-766
Motion Sensitivity Reduction 6-767
MT Frequency Offset 6-768
MT Pulse Type 6-770
Multiple TR Acquisitions 6-772
NEX Mode 6-773
Number of ddas 6-774
Number of Interleaving Echo Trains 6-775
Number of Points 6-776
Number of TE Steps 6-777
Optimized Satgap for SLIP 6-778
Optimized T2 FLAIR Sequence 6-779
Percentage of pfkr 6-780
Phase Correction 6-781
Prep pulse 6-782
PURE compensation 6-783
Ramp Sampling 6-785
Readout Lobe Polarity 6-786
Real Time SAT 6-787
Recon Acceleration Level 6-788

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 TOC- 25

Recon Type 6-789

Reformat Optimization 6-790
Region Fraction 6-791
Resolution for CSI Scans 6-792
Restricted Real Time Navigation 6-793
Reverse Loop Order 6-794
RF1 Type 6-795
ROI Edge Mask SAT 6-796
SAR Optimization 6-797
SAT Gap 6-798
SAT Playout 6-800
Scan Mode 6-801
Scan Optimization for SAT 6-802
Shim Volume Mode 6-803
Slice encoding order 6-804
Slice Optimization 6-805
Slice Partial Fourier 6-806
Scan Abort Threshold 6-807
Spatial SAT Level 6-808
Spatial SAT Type 6-810
Spectral-Spatial FatSAT 6-812
Spectral Width 6-813
SPGR Mode 6-814
SPGR Mode for Cine IR 6-815
STIR Minimum Acquisition 6-816
SWAN phase background removal 6-817
Temporal acceleration 6-818
Tensor filename 6-819
Total Number of Scans 6-822
Turbo Mode 6-823
Vessel Uniformity 6-825

Chapter 7: Display 7-1

Review Session procedures 7-2
Viewer 7-3
Viewer introduction 7-3
Open Viewer work area procedure 7-6
Open Viewer: from Session Apps procedure 7-7
Open Viewer: from Data Selector procedure 7-8
Open Viewer: click through images procedure 7-9
Viewport control procedure 7-10

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

TOC- 26
© 2021 General Electric Company
On-view: right-click procedure 7-12
On-view: reset to original display procedure 7-14
My Tools procedures 7-15
Image Controls procedures 7-18
Add annotation procedure 7-20
Erase annotation procedure 7-22
Active annotation procedure 7-23
Adjust font size procedure 7-25
Change annotation levels procedure 7-26
Propagate annotation procedure 7-31
Image annotation 7-32
Activate matte procedure 7-34
Propagate matte procedure 7-36
Delete matte procedure 7-37
Measure an area procedure 7-38
Propagate measurement procedure 7-40
Delete measurement procedure 7-41
Activate an ROI procedure 7-42
Propagate an ROI procedure 7-44
Delete an ROI procedure 7-45
Adjust W/L values procedure 7-46
Customize Presets procedure 7-48
Add a slice procedure 7-49
Add all slices procedure 7-50
Add first/last slice procedure 7-51
Add slice interval procedure 7-52
Add slice range procedure 7-53
Remove slices procedure 7-54
Cine: Play movie procedure 7-55
Command line type-in procedure 7-57
Color change procedure 7-58
Compare images procedure 7-59
Display Normal procedure 7-60
Erase or Hide objects procedure 7-61
Filter images procedure 7-62
Flip/Rotate images procedure 7-63
Format display procedure 7-65
Gray Scale enhance contrast procedure 7-66
Grid display procedure 7-67
Image selection procedure 7-69
Invert image procedure 7-71

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 TOC- 27

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

TOC- 28
© 2021 General Electric Company
Algorithms 7-126
ASL measurement units 7-127
READY View protocols that use ASL scan data 7-127
ASL screens 7-128
ASL workflow 7-131
ASL optional procedures 7-132
Brainstat considerations 7-133
Algorithms 7-133
Brainstat AIF measurement units 7-137
Brainstat measurement units 7-138
READY View protocols that use Brainstat scan data 7-138
Brainstat procedure tips 7-139
Optimal acquisition 7-139
Early bolus arrival 7-139
Scan ends early 7-140
Brainstat GVF screens 7-142
Brainstat GVF workflow 7-145
Optional Brainstat GVF procedure 7-146
Brainstat AIF screens 7-149
Brainstat AIF workflow 7-155
Brainstat AIF Optional procedure 7-156
Dynamic Susceptibility Contrast scan protocol considerations 7-161
Diffusion Weighted Imaging considerations 7-163
Algorithms 7-163
DWI measurement units 7-164
READY View protocols that use DWI scan data 7-164
DWI screens 7-165
Diffusion Weighted Imaging workflow 7-170
DWI Optional procedure 7-172
DWI scan protocol considerations 7-177
Diffusion Tensor Imaging considerations 7-178
Algorithms 7-178
DTI measurement units 7-181
READY View protocols that use DTI scan data 7-182
DTI screens 7-183
Diffusion Tensor Imaging workflow 7-187
DTI Optional procedure 7-188
DTI scan protocol considerations 7-189
FiberTrak considerations 7-190
Algorithms 7-190
FiberTrak measurement units 7-190

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 TOC- 29

READY View protocols that use DTI scan data 7-190

FiberTrak screens 7-191
FiberTrak workflow 7-197
Create a merged Volume Rendered view workflow 7-200
FiberTrak optional procedures 7-212
Fuse tracts with other objects and then hide/show the objects procedure 7-213
Change fiber tract color procedure 7-215
View Main EigenVector procedure 7-218
FiberTrak other considerations/procedures 7-221
Mirror ROI consideration 7-221
Display fiber tract statistics procedure 7-221
Manipulate the FiberTrak image procedure 7-221
Functional imaging (fMRI) considerations 7-222
Algorithms 7-222
fMRI measurement units 7-224
READY View protocols that use fMRI scan data 7-225
fMRI screens 7-226
fMRI workflow 7-230
fMRI optional procedure 7-231
fMRI scan protocol considerations 7-234
MR-Touch considerations 7-235
Indications for use 7-235
MR-Touch measurement units 7-237
READY View protocols that use MR-Touch scan data 7-237
MR-Touch screens 7-238
MR-Touch workflow 7-242
MR-Touch optional procedure 7-246
MR-Touch scan protocol considerations 7-247
R2Star considerations 7-248
Algorithms 7-248
R2Star measurement units 7-249
READY View protocols that use R2Star scan data 7-249
R2Star screens 7-250
R2Star workflow 7-255
R2Star Optional procedures 7-256
R2Star scan protocol considerations 7-258
T2 Map considerations 7-259
Algorithms 7-259
T2 Map measurement units 7-259
READY View protocols that use T2 Map scan data 7-260
T2 Map screens 7-261

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

TOC- 30
© 2021 General Electric Company
T2 Map workflow 7-265
T2 Map optional procedure 7-266
T2 Map scan protocol considerations 7-268
Spectroscopy considerations 7-270
Algorithms 7-271
Spectroscopy measurement units 7-272
READY View protocols that use spectroscopy scan data 7-272
Spectroscopy screens 7-273
Spectroscopy workflow 7-284
SVQ spectroscopy workflow 7-294
Adjust voxel correction procedure 7-295
Adjust the ratio procedure 7-297
Adjust the Signal/Noise procedure 7-298
Define a User metabolites procedure 7-299
Display maps on whole image procedure 7-300
Show/hide ROI statistics procedure 7-302
2D ROI procedure 7-304
3D ROI procedure 7-307
Adjust the Voxel shift procedure 7-309
Metabolite display procedures 7-312
Metabolite views procedure 7-313
Set metabolite labels to display procedure 7-314
Adjust metabolites ppm values procedure 7-318
Reports procedure 7-319
Brain CSI scan protocol considerations 7-320
Echo Time (TE) considerations 7-320
TR considerations 7-320
2D spectroscopy considerations 7-320
3D Spectroscopy considerations 7-321
Brain SVQ scan protocol considerations 7-323
Patient setup 7-323
Localizer 7-323
Single voxel spectroscopy scan parameters 7-323
Auto PreScan considerations 7-324
Breast SVQ scan protocol considerations 7-325
Auto Prescan considerations 7-325
MR Standard considerations 7-326
Algorithms 7-326
MR Standard measurement units 7-329
READY View protocols that use MR Standard scan data 7-329
MR Standard screens 7-330

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 TOC- 31

MR Standard workflow 7-335

SER considerations 7-340
Algorithms 7-340
SER measurement units 7-341
READY View protocols that use SER scan data 7-341
SER screens 7-343
SER workflow 7-347
General procedures/consideration 7-351
View another series within a Review Step procedure 7-352
PACS Convert Application procedure 7-353
Threshold adjustment procedure 7-354
Set Clip Min & Max threshold values procedure 7-356
Fuse images/maps procedure 7-358
Pixel Values in saved images considerations 7-360
Functional Maps 7-360
Mirror ROI procedure 7-362
EPI correction procedure 7-366
Save as quantitative maps consideration 7-367
Average Protocol procedure 7-370
Ratio AB/CD Protocol procedure 7-373
Protocol Subtraction procedure 7-376
MR General Review 7-378
MR General Review (Volume Viewer) introduction 7-378
Getting Started introduction 7-382
MR General Review work area 7-385
Open MR General Review (Volume Viewer) procedure 7-389
Volume Viewer workflow 7-392
Review Controller considerations/procedures 7-397
Right-click considerations 7-399
Keyboard shortcuts and tips procedure 7-409
Access additional operator manual instructions procedure 7-412
Preferences introduction 7-413
Display preferences procedure 7-414
Loading preferences procedure 7-416
Viewports preferences procedures 7-418
Annotations preferences procedures 7-421
Toolbar preferences procedures 7-423
Tools preferences procedures 7-426
Export preferences procedures 7-428
Integrated Registration preferences procedures 7-430
Toolbar introduction 7-432

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

TOC- 32
© 2021 General Electric Company
Toolbar move procedure 7-434
Top level toolbar considerations/procedures 7-437
Mouse Modes Toolbar considerations/procedures 7-440
Measure Annotate Toolbar considerations/procedures 7-441
Visualization Toolbar considerations/procedures 7-444
Segmentation Toolbar considerations/procedures 7-447
Export Toolbar considerations/procedures 7-449
Protocols and Review steps introduction 7-451
Protocol selection work area 7-453
Review steps work area 7-458
Review Manager and layouts work area 7-460
Review step reorder procedure 7-465
Protocol reorder procedure 7-468
Create a protocol procedure 7-471
Rename a protocol procedure 7-474
Save a protocol/review step procedure 7-475
Split layout custom procedure 7-477
Save a layout procedure 7-481
Delete a Protocol or Review Step procedure 7-483
Add a favorite protocol procedure 7-485
Series/images/maps/graphs/tables procedures 7-486
Scroll through the images procedure 7-487
View images in a movie procedure 7-488
Change the image/map in a viewport procedure 7-490
Magnification procedures 7-493
W/L procedures 7-494
Save WW/WL presets for functional map protocols procedure 7-497
Rotate or translate image procedure 7-498
Histogram and cross-section procedure 7-501
Profile graph procedure 7-506
Shutter on cursor procedure 7-508
Add a series to the study procedure 7-510
Reference image procedures 7-511
Cross-Reference Image procedure 7-513
Summary table procedure 7-514
Workflow introduction 7-520
MRA workflow 7-521
Curved reformat workflow 7-525
Reformat workflow 7-528
Create a merged Volume Rendered view workflow 7-531
Visualization introduction 7-543

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 TOC- 33

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

TOC- 34
© 2021 General Electric Company
Remove or keep objects procedure 7-635
Export introduction 7-637
Quick Export procedure 7-639
Export BIP images procedure 7-641
Save an individual image procedure 7-643
Save state procedure 7-644
Save/recall a 3D model procedure 7-646
Save functional maps procedure 7-648
Export a movie procedure 7-649
Batch procedure 7-652
Preview a batch movie procedure 7-658
Create a batch protocol procedure 7-660
Delete a batch film protocol procedure 7-662

Chapter 8: Image Management 8-1

Film 8-2
Film introduction 8-2
Film methods 8-3
F1 film an image procedure 8-4
F2 film page procedure 8-5
F3 film multiple image displays procedure 8-6
Film a series procedure 8-7
Drag and drop procedure 8-8
Delete image procedure 8-9
Film Text Page procedure 8-10
Configure (add) a printer procedure 8-11
Hide/show procedure 8-14
View film status procedure 8-15
Patient List 8-16
Patient list/browser introduction 8-16
Image Management open work area procedure 8-17
Modality type considerations 8-18
Series type considerations 8-19
Series numbering considerations 8-21
Find exam procedure 8-26
Sort list procedure 8-27
Filter list procedure 8-28
Remove filter procedure 8-29
Refresh database procedure 8-30
Adjust images procedure 8-31
Keyboard shortcuts procedure 8-32

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 TOC- 35

Remove images procedure 8-33

Size exam/series/image areas procedure 8-34
View remote browser procedure 8-35
Empty contents procedure 8-37
Retrieve images procedure 8-38
Permanently delete exams/series procedure 8-39
Archive/Network 8-40
Archive/Network introduction 8-40
Set the Auto Archive node for the system procedure 8-41
Set the Auto Archive node for the current exam procedure 8-43
Selective auto send by series procedure 8-45
Manual send procedure 8-47
Manual retrieve images procedure 8-49
GSPS series procedure 8-50
Set the Auto Network node for the currently active exam procedure 8-51
Set the Auto Network node for the system procedure 8-52
Check the network history procedure 8-53
Specifications 8-54
Configure host procedure 8-60
Define a host or node procedure 8-62
View backlog/queue procedure 8-63
Compatibility considerations 8-64
How to handle CD/DVDs procedure 8-65
Save images procedure 8-66
Restore images procedure 8-70
Detach a device procedure 8-71
View images on PC or laptop procedure 8-72
Display a DICOM header procedure 8-78
DICOM compatibility between GE MR systems considerations 8-79
Data Applications 8-80
Image Management Data Apps introduction 8-80
Work area open/close procedure 8-81
Work area resize procedure 8-82
Edit Patient Data procedure 8-83
Split patient data into multiple exams procedure 8-85
Compose a report procedure 8-87
Delete items from the Data Export tab procedure 8-88
Export a report procedure 8-89
View a report on a PC procedure 8-91
ViosWorks considerations 8-93
ViosWorks send data procedure 8-95

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

TOC- 36
© 2021 General Electric Company
Synthetic DWI considerations 8-99
Algorithms 8-99
DWI measurement units 8-99
Synthetic DWI screens 8-100
Synthetic DWI workflow 8-104
Synthetic DWI optional procedure 8-107
Synthetic DWI scan protocol considerations 8-109
Session Applications 8-110
Image Management Session Apps introduction 8-110
Data Selector procedures 8-111
View multiple exams in Viewer procedure 8-112
Add/Subtract images procedure 8-113
Add/Subtract bind images procedure 8-115
Add/Subtract extract minimum/maximum pixel values procedure 8-116
AutoBind procedure 8-117
Pasting procedure 8-121
Pasting image manipulation procedure 8-126
Flow Analysis procedure 8-130
Tools applications 8-132
Image Management Tools introduction 8-132
Application Selection reorder list procedure 8-133
Patient anonymize procedure 8-134
CIET extract images procedure 8-135

Chapter 9: Appendix APPX-1

MR terminology APPX-1

Glossary Glossary-1
Index Index-1

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 TOC- 37

TOC- 38 5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

Quick guides introduction

Click the text below the icons to link to the step-by-step quick guide.

Flouro Trigger Linking

Navigator Auto Navigator Tracker

MAGiC
placement

DISCO Cube DIR Smart Prep

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 QuickGuide-1

Q UICK GUIDES

Auto Navigator Tracker step-by-step pic-

ture guide procedure
Select a localizer task

1. From the Workflow Manager, select a 3 Plane Localizer SSFSE task

that you want to use with Auto Navigator Tracker.
2. Click Setup.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

QuickGuide-2
© 2021 General Electric Company
Quick guides introduction

Select a localizer Breath Hold option

1. From the SSFSE Localizer scan parameter screen, select a Breath

Hold option that will match the Localizer scan.
l When Auto Voice is turned on, the Breath Hold box automatically fills and
becomes grayed out.

Select Post Processing

1. From the Workflow Manager, click Add Task > Add Post
Processing.

2. From the Post Processing Task screen,

a. Click Auto Tracker Placement.
b. Click Setup.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 QuickGuide-3

3. From the Auto Tracker Placement screen, click Accept.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

QuickGuide-4
© 2021 General Electric Company
Quick guides introduction

Save and Start localizer scan

From the Workflow Manager, click Save Rx > Scan.

l When the scan is finished, Auto Tracker Placement is automatically started

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 QuickGuide-5

Setup a Navigator scan

1. From the Workflow Manager, select a Navigator task.

2. Click Setup.

3. From the Scan parameters screen click GRx and setup the scan
locations.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

QuickGuide-6
© 2021 General Electric Company
Quick guides introduction

4. From the GRx toolbar:

a. Click Tracker.
b. Click the Auto Tracker option and note the location of the tracker
on the coronal localizer image.

l Optional: if desired, click Hide tracker option to toggle the tracker

on/off the localizer image.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 QuickGuide-7

Save and start the scan

From the Workflow Manager, click Save Rx > Scan.

For more information about Navigator, see:

l Navigator: auto tracker placement procedure
l Navigator: acquire a body scan procedure
l Navigator: acquire a coronary scan procedure
l Navigator considerations

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

QuickGuide-8
© 2021 General Electric Company
Quick guides introduction

Q UICK GUIDES

Cube DIR step-by-step picture guide pro-

cedure
Select Cube DIR

1. Select Cube T2 DIR on the Task.

2. Click Setup.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 QuickGuide-9

Position 3D slab
Position the 3D slab over the localizer images.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

QuickGuide-10
© 2021 General Electric Company
Quick guides introduction

Adjust values
1. To view additional tabs, click the arrow in the upper right corner

.
2. Click the Advanced tab.

l Use Fat Saturation Efficiency to control the amount of fat that is saturated when
either Fat SAT or Classic Fat SAT are selected from the Scan Parameters area.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 QuickGuide-11

3. Click the Details tab.

Cube DIR applies inversion recovery pulses to achieve signal

1
suppression from two different tissues. There are three IR scan
parameters on the Details screen.
l Tissue T1 options: White Matter, Grey Matter or a number you enter in the
text field.
l Inv. Time: Enter a value or select Auto to suppress CSF.
l TI2: enter a value to suppress the second tissue.

1Inversion Recovery

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

QuickGuide-12
© 2021 General Electric Company
Quick guides introduction

Save and Scan

1. Click Save Rx.

2. Click Scan.

For more information about Cube DIR, see Cube DIR considerations.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 QuickGuide-13

Q UICK GUIDES

DISCO step-by-step picture guide pro-

cedure
Select series

1. From the Task tab, select a DISCO series.

2. Click Setup.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

QuickGuide-14
© 2021 General Electric Company
Quick guides introduction

Position 3D slab
Position the 3D slab over the localizer images.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 QuickGuide-15

Define and check parameters

1. To view additional tabs, click arrow in the upper right corner

.
2. Click the Multi-Phase and make selections.

l The Total Phases value does not include the mask phase.
l The number of Wash-in Phases are the phases from the time of injection to the
completion of contrast uptake in the area of interest.
l Variable Delays is forced On for DISCO.
l Preserve options determine if the start time is kept or the delay time is kept for
each phase when the scan time is changed.
l Select Mask Phase to create a mask phase and select Pause after Mask to pause the
scan after the mask phase.
l If desired, click the Series Per Phase option to generate each phase in a
separate series.
3. Note the time and temporal resolution.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

QuickGuide-16
© 2021 General Electric Company
Quick guides introduction

l The first time (1) is the total time excluding Mask.

l The second time (2) is the duration for Mask or non-wash-in phases.
l Temp Res (3) is the temporal resolution for wash-in phases.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 QuickGuide-17

4. A-Click the Advanced tab.

B- Enter a value for Fast, Faster, or Fastest to adjust the scan time
or temporal resolution.
Figure 6-1: Example of User CV Advanced tab

l The Temp Res is how fast each phase is acquired.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

QuickGuide-18
© 2021 General Electric Company
Quick guides introduction

5. Click the Details tab and confirm that protocol scan parameters
are correct.
Figure 6-2: Example of Details tab

Save and Scan

1. Click Save Rx.

2. Click Scan.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 QuickGuide-19

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

QuickGuide-20
© 2021 General Electric Company
Quick guides introduction

3. Observe the Auto View scan time countdown as each phase is

collected.
A - Mask phase is acquired.
B - Scanner pauses
C - Dynamic series is acquired

For more information about DISCO, see DISCO: scan procedure.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 QuickGuide-21

Q UICK GUIDES

Fluoro Trigger step-by-step picture

guide procedure
Open Fluoro Trigger
Position the 3D slab over the area of interest. In this example, the slab is
oriented to the aorta in the sagittal plane.
Figure 6-3: Note that the coil tab appearance in the lower right corner varies based on your system configuration

1. Click on Imaging Options.

2. Select Fluoro Trigger.
3. Click Accept.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

QuickGuide-22
© 2021 General Electric Company
Quick guides introduction

Set User Control Variables

1. To view additional tabs, click the arrow in the upper right corner

.
2. Click Advanced tab.
3. Set image acquisition delay. This time may be used to give the
patient breathing instructions.
4. K space filling options are user CV11 through CV14. Parameters
depend on the anatomy to be scanned.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 QuickGuide-23

Contrast, Save, Scan

1. Enter contrast amount used.

2. Click Save Rx.
3. Click Scan.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

QuickGuide-24
© 2021 General Electric Company
Quick guides introduction

Define aorta
Click Draw Line. Prescribe a cut plane by drawing a line on the image
that becomes that plane.

1. Place the line across the center of the aorta.

2. Click GO.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 QuickGuide-25

3. Adjust the slice thickness to better visualize the vessel.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

QuickGuide-26
© 2021 General Electric Company
Quick guides introduction

Visualize Contrast

1. Click Subtract to eliminate background tissue and view contrast

arrival more robustly.
2. Once contrast is visualized, click Go3D. If an image acquisition delay
has been specified, the scanner will become quiet for that duration
of time. The image acquisition delay can be changed on the fly in the
Fluoro Trigger screen.
For more information about Fluoro Trigger, see Fluoro Trigger with Real Time scan
procedure.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 QuickGuide-27

Q UICK GUIDES

Linking step-by-step picture guide pro-

cedure
Select series to link
1. From the Task tab, select the series you want to link.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

QuickGuide-28
© 2021 General Electric Company
Quick guides introduction

2. From the Task tab, right click and select Create/Edit Link.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 QuickGuide-29

Establish parameters to be linked

1. Check the Scan Coverage box

2. Check the boxes next to the parameters you want to match.
3. Check the Shim Volume box.
4. Click Accept.
5. The series to which the original series is linked appear in the chain
link column.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

QuickGuide-30
© 2021 General Electric Company
Quick guides introduction

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 QuickGuide-31

Setup links and scan

1. Click Setup.

2. Define slice locations and number of slices.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

QuickGuide-32
© 2021 General Electric Company
Quick guides introduction

3. Click Save Rx.

4. Note progress bar. When progress bar completes, series are in RxD
state.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 QuickGuide-33

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

QuickGuide-34
© 2021 General Electric Company
Quick guides introduction

5. Click Scan.

For more information about Linking, see Link series procedure.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 QuickGuide-35

Q UICK GUIDES

MAGiC post process step-by-step pic-

ture guide procedure
Launch MAGiC post process application

1. From the Patient List, select a prospective MAGiC series or QMaps

series.
2. From the Session Apps list, click MAGiC.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

QuickGuide-36
© 2021 General Electric Company
Quick guides introduction

MAGiC review session

1. From the MAGiC review session, note the Contrast navigation

window that indicates the image contrast weight: T1-weighted, T2-
weighted or PD-weighted contrast.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 QuickGuide-37

2. Click the SyMaps Layout icon to change the viewports to

display T1-map, T2-map, PD-map, and T2W synthetic contrast
weighted images.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

QuickGuide-38
© 2021 General Electric Company
Quick guides introduction

3. Click the Contrast Layout icon to change the viewports to

display MAGiC contrast weighted images.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 QuickGuide-39

Manipulate MAGiC images

1. Click the TE icon and left-click and drag to adjust the TE.

2. Click the TR icon and left-click and drag to adjust the TR.

3. Click the TE/TR icon and left-click and drag to adjust the TE and
TR simultaneously.

4. Click the TI icon and left-click and drag to adjust the TI.

5. Click the TI/TI icon to simultaneously adjust TI and TI2, left-

click and drag horizontally to adjust TI vertically to adjust TI2.

Save procedures

1. From the menu bar, click Preferences > Save Current Layout to
save the layout for future viewing.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

QuickGuide-40
© 2021 General Electric Company
Quick guides introduction

2. From the menu bar, click File > Save SyMaps (T1T2PD) to
Browser to save the quantitative maps in a DICOM format to the
patient list.
l A bar displays indicating the save progress.

3. From the menu bar, click File > Save all Visible Stacks to Browser
and Close.
l All visible viewports with synthetic image series are saved in DICOM format to
the patient list and then the MAGiC post process screen closes.
l A bar displays indicating the save progress.

Exit MAGiC post processing

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 QuickGuide-41

1. From the menu bar, click File > Exit MAGiC.

For more information about MAGiC, see:

l MAGiC: scan procedure

l MAGiC: post process procedure

l MAGiC: post process icon procedures

l MAGiC: post process menu considerations

l MAGiC: post process right-click procedures

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

QuickGuide-42
© 2021 General Electric Company
Quick guides introduction

Q UICK GUIDES

Navigator step-by-step picture guide pro-

cedure
Select a task

1. From the Workflow Manager, select a task that you want to use
with Navigator.
2. Click Setup.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 QuickGuide-43

Select Navigator
Figure 6-4: Navigator selections

1. Click Imaging Options.

2. Click Navigator.
3. Click Accept.

Select the Tracker GRx tool

From the Graphic Rx toolbar, click Tracker.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

QuickGuide-44
© 2021 General Electric Company
Quick guides introduction

Position the Tracker

Use a breathold localizer acquired at expiration.
1. From the coronal image, place the tracker on the dome of the liver.
2. From the axial image, place the tracker in the middle of the liver in
the anterior/posterior direction.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 QuickGuide-45

Deposit slices
Place the cursor on the image and click to deposit the Graphic Rx lines.

Define the Navigator parameters

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

QuickGuide-46
© 2021 General Electric Company
Quick guides introduction

1. To view additional tabs, click the arrow in the upper right corner

.
2. Click the Navigator tab.
3. Enter a Resp Rate value if a respiratory device is not in use.
4. Run RR measurement tool to find the correct respiratory rate for
each pateint.

Scan

1. Click Save Rx.

2. Click Scan.

Observe/adjust Waveform

1. Observe the respiratory waveform to see if the peak expiration

occurs at the red threshold line.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 QuickGuide-47

2. Adjust the threshold as needed.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

QuickGuide-48
© 2021 General Electric Company
Quick guides introduction

View images
View images as they appear in AutoView area.

For more information about Navigator, see:

l Navigator considerations
l Acquire a body Navigator scan
l Acquire a coronary Navigator scan

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 QuickGuide-49

Q UICK GUIDES

SmartPrep step-by-step picture guide

procedure
Open Tracker
Figure 6-5: Note that the coil tab appearance in the lower right corner varies based on your system configuration

1. From the Graphic Rx Toolbar, click Tracker.

2. Set Tracker size to 20.0 by 20.0.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

QuickGuide-50
© 2021 General Electric Company
Quick guides introduction

Position Tracker
Place the Tracker in the center of the vessel as close as possible to
isocenter.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 QuickGuide-51

Set User Control Variables

1. To view additional tabs, click the arrow in the upper right corner

.
2. Click the Advanced tab.
3. Set the Max. monitor period (this is the backup scanning time).
4. Set the Image acquisition delay time (this time may be used to
give the patient breathing instructions).
5. K space filling options are user CV11 through CV14. Information
entered here will depend on the anatomy to be scanned.

Prescribe the imaging volume

1. Prescribe the 3D volume by placing the cursor over the desired
image and click to deposit the volume. Prescribe any even number
of slices to balance coverage with scan time

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

QuickGuide-52
© 2021 General Electric Company
Quick guides introduction

2. The tracker should be contained completely inside the imaging

volume to avoid SmartPrep failing to detect the bolus.

Fill in Contrast amount

Fill in a contrast amount of 20 cc or higher.

Save Rx and Scan

1. Click Save RX.

2. Click Scan.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 QuickGuide-53

System acquires baseline data.

Max. monitor begins to count down. This time may be used to give the
patient breathing instructions.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

QuickGuide-54
© 2021 General Electric Company
Quick guides introduction

The scanner will continue to count down until the bolus is detected. The
scanner will go quiet for the amount of time built into image acquisition
delay.
For more information about SmartPrep, see:
l SmartPrep: patient preparation procedure

l SmartPrep: localizer procedure

l SmartPrep: setup procedure

l SmartPrep: scan procedure

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 QuickGuide-55

QuickGuide-56 5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

Chapter 1: Read me first

Before using your system, familiarize yourself with the purpose and design of this manual and an overview of the,
following topics.

About this manual

About MR Scanner
Access additional operator manual instructions procedure
Feature list
Online help
System User Interface
Sessions
Preferences
Security Tools
Enterprise Audit Trail introduction
Passwords
Data Privacy

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 1-1

About this manual

This section explains the purpose and design of this operator manual. It is an introduction to the manual, providing
information on the purpose, prerequisite skills, organization, format, and graphic conventions that identify the visual
symbols used throughout the manual.

The manual does not identify components or features that are standard or purchasable options. Therefore, if a
feature or component included in the manual is not on your system, it is either not available on your
system configuration or your site has not purchased the option.

Safety information
Please refer to the MR Safety chapter. The MR Safety chapter describes the safety information you and the
physicians must understand thoroughly before you begin to use the system. If you need additional training, seek
assistance from qualified GE personnel.
The equipment is intended for use by qualified personnel only.
This manual should be kept with the equipment and should be readily available at all times. It is important for you to
periodically review the procedures and safety precautions. It is important to read and understand the
contents of this manual before attempting to use this product.
Federal Law restricts this device to sale, distribution, and use by or on the order of a physician.

Safety notices
Residual risks are communicated in this manual as limitations, contra-indications, precautions or warnings.
The following safety notices are used to emphasize certain safety instructions. This manual uses the international
symbol along with the danger, warning, or caution message. This section also describes the purpose of an Important
notice and a Note.

DANGER
Danger is used to identify conditions or actions for which a specific hazard is known to exist that will cause
severe personal injury, death, or substantial property damage if the instructions are ignored.

WARNING
Warning is used to identify conditions or actions for which a specific hazard is known to exist that may cause
severe personal injury, death, or substantial property damage if the instructions are ignored.

CAUTION
Caution is used to identify conditions or actions for which a potential hazard may exist that will or can cause
minor personal injury or property damage if the instructions are ignored.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

1-2
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 1: Read me first

Coil CAUTION
Coil Caution is used to identify conditions or actions for which a potential hazard of crossing or looping coil
cables may exist that will or can cause minor personal injury or property damage if the instructions are
ignored.

Pinch Point CAUTION

Pinch Point Caution is used to identify conditions or actions that will or can cause personal injury.

Important indicates information where adherence to procedures is crucial or where your comprehension is
necessary to apply a concept or effectively use the product.

Note provides additional information that is helpful to you. It may emphasize certain information regarding
special tools or techniques, items to check before proceeding, or factors to consider about a concept or task.

Troubleshooting tips provide information that allow you to investigate the resolution of some type of problem,
locate the difficulty, and make adjustments to solve the problem.

Purpose of this manual

This manual is written for health care professionals (namely, the MR technologist) to provide the necessary
information relating to the proper operation of this system. The manual is intended to teach you the system
components and features necessary to use your MR system to its maximum potential. It is not intended to teach
magnetic resonance imaging or to make any type of clinical diagnosis.
This operator manual should be kept with the equipment at all times. It is important for you to periodically review
the procedures and safety precautions. It is important for you to read and understand the contents of this manual
before attempting to use this product.
The medium, format, content, legibility, and location of the manual is appropriate to the MR device, its intended
purpose and the technical knowledge, experience, education or training of the MR user. The instructions are written
in terms readily understood by the MR user and, where appropriate, are supplemented with drawings and diagrams.
This operator manual is originally written in English.

Electronic Instructions for Use

Your MR device is delivered with the electronic Instructions For Use (eIFU) logo. The electronic Instructions For Use
(eIFU) symbol means that the operator manual can be viewed from your MR system or from a PC. For details, see
online help.
Figure 1-1: eIFU symbol

To access eIFU in a pdf format from the internet, see instruction in the MR Multilanguage Operator Documentation
Introduction, e-User Leaflet, delivered with your MR system.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 1-3

Prerequisite skills
This manual is not intended to teach the principles of magnetic resonance imaging. It is necessary for you to have
sufficient knowledge to competently perform the various diagnostic imaging procedures within your modality. This
knowledge is gained through a variety of educational methods, including clinical working experience, hospital-based
programs, or classes offered by many college and university Radiologic Technology diagnostic imaging programs.

User profile

MR worker
MR workers are generally Radiology technologists.

MR Professional
MR Professional are generally Radiologists who use the results from an MR exam to influence patient management.

Service Engineer
A Service Engineer may be an employee of GEHC, third party service group, or an employee of the customer in-house
systems support department. They may be dedicated to a specific clinic or geographic area.

Pop-up windows and text fields

Pop-up message windows require an acknowledgment. Respond to the message and continue on with the workflow.
Note that most procedures in the manual do not identify pop-up messages since the appearance of a message varies
based on the workflow.
If there are multiple floating window on the screen, click on the window title to bring it in front or close the window in
front to access the windows that is behind it. If when you click on the window and it does not come forward, then
press and hold the Shift button and click on the window to bring it forward.
If the system displays a text box in which you are unable to enter text, press and hold the Shift button and click in the
text box.

Graphic conventions and legends

This manual uses special conventions for images and legends to make it easier for you to work with the information.
The table below describes the conventions used when working with menus, buttons, text boxes, and keyboard keys.
Table 1-1: Graphic conventions

Example Description
UI conventions Blue text indicates a link to another topic.
Select Select an option in a check box or radial button and selecting a tab.
Press Enter Press a hard key on the keyboard.
Press and hold Shift Press and holding down a hard key on the keyboard.
Click Viewer A button label or Interface button name that you actively click. If
there is a reference to a button label that is not actively clicked, it is
not displayed as bold or italic.
In the Spacing field... The name of field in which you can select or type text.
Type supine in the Patient Text you enter into a field box followed by pressing the Enter key on
Position text box the keyboard.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

1-4
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 1: Read me first

Example Description
Select Sort > Sort by date The pathway of selecting option(s) in a pull-down menu.
Ctrl X simultaneously Press and hold the Control button on the keyboard and
simultaneously press the X button on the keyboard. Ctrl is the
abbreviation used for the Control keyboard button, and ALT is the
abbreviation used for the Alternative keyboard.
"message" A system message prompt is in quotations.
Cancel/Close Cancel/Close typically closes a screen without executing the
changes on the screen. The instructions to Cancel/Close are
typically not included in procedures in this manual.

Table 1-2: Mouse controls conventions

Operator manual instruction Mouse action

Click Click the left mouse button to select a button or icon.
Right-click Click the right mouse button.
Middle-click Click the middle mouse button.
Click and drag Click and hold the left mouse button down while dragging the
cursor to the desired location.
Right-click and drag Click and hold the right mouse button down while dragging the
cursor to the desired location.
Middle-click and drag Click and hold the middle mouse button down while dragging the
cursor to the desired location.
Double-click Click the left mouse button twice in rapid succession.
Triple-click Click the left mouse button three times in rapid succession.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 1-5

About MR Scanner
The About MR Scanner feature displays useful safety information that may be useful for determining if MR
Conditional requirements are met for certain implants and other devices. Available information includes:

magnetic field strength (B0)

maximum spatial gradient (rate of change with distance) of the static magnetic field
nominal frequency range per nuclei
maximum gradient output on cylinders with diameters of 0.2 m, 0.4 m, and bore diameter minus 0.1 m (for
transverse magnets the “bore diameter” is the magnet gap).

Considerations
Specific Energy limit exams are limited to 14,400 joules (4 W/kg for one hour (3600 s). After a suitable rest
period (perhaps 2 hours) patient scanning may be resumed. A physician may override the specific energy limit
for medical reasons.
B1rms is the root mean square value of the radio frequency (RF) magnetic field for a given protocol. It is useful
to determine how aggressive a protocol may be is terms of RF intensity.

Use these steps to view the About MR Scanner screen, which provides details about your MR scanner. The contents
of the screen varies based on your MR system.
Figure 1-2: Example of an About MR Scanner screen

1. From the header area of the screen, click Tools icon arrow and select About MR Scanner.
The About MR Scanner screen displays.
2. Click and drag the slider to view all the contents on the screen.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

1-6
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 1: Read me first

Note that the top portion of the screen provides system details such as filed strength, gradient, software
build, etc.
3. To close the screen, from the About MR Scanner screen, click Close.

Related topics
Read me first orientation

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 1-7

Access additional operator manual instructions pro-

cedure
An electronic operator manual (eIFU1) is provided on your MR system. If you need more copies, a pdf file can be
downloaded from the internet, free of charge.
Use these steps to access the latest version of the operator manual or security manual in a pdf format.

1. Open an Internet browser on a personal computer.

2. Type the following into the url field and activate the search:
https://www.gehealthcare.com/documentationlibrary
3. Scroll down the page until you view the Customer Documentation Portal.
Figure 1-3: Customer Documentation Portal screen area

4. Click Visit the Site.

5. From the Customer Documentation Portal search by screen area, select the following from the pull-down
menus (note that MR Signa 3.0T is just an example of a product name):
Figure 1-4: Customer Documentation Portal screen

1electronic Instruction For Use

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

1-8
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 1: Read me first

Modality: Magnetic Resonance (MR)

Products: MR Signa Architect
Documentation Type: User and Operator Manual
Language: English (in this example)
Revision: Current Revision

Note that the language may be identified by the following language codes:
Table 1-3: Language codes

Code Language Code Language Code Language Code Language

BG Bulgarian CS Czech DA Danish DE German
EL Greek EN English ES Spanish ET Estonian
FI Finnish FR French HR Croatian HU Hungarian
ID Indonesian IT Italian JA Japanese KK Kazakh
KO Korean LT Lithuanian LV Latvian NL Dutch
Brazilian
NO Norwegian PL Polish PT-PT Portuguese PT-BR
Portuguese
RO Romanian RU Russian SK Slovakian SR Serbian
SV Swedish TR Turkish UK Ukranian VI Vietnamese
ZH-CN Chinese

6. Click Search.
A list of the Class A manuals displays.
Figure 1-5: Example of a search list

7. Optional: If you know the part number of the MR operator manual, enter it into the “Documentation Number
or keyboard” search text box and click Search.
Figure 1-6: Documentation type-in text field

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 1-9

8. View the list of manuals and click the download icon of the desired manual(s).
Figure 1-7: Download icon located in Action column

9. Respond to any prompts.

10. Click Open, or Save to view the manual.
Note that if your computer does not provide an Open or Save option and thus automatically downloaded
the file, navigate to your Downloads to find the document and copy/paste it to a desired location.
Figure 1-8: Example of a download

11. Optional: Click FAQs (Frequently Asked Questions) at the bottom of the screen to view a
menu of frequently asked questions.
a. Click a question from the menu to view the answer to the question.
b. Click the X in the upper right corner of the FAQ to close the window.
Figure 1-9: Frequently Asked Questions menu

Related topics
Read me first orientation

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

1-10
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 1: Read me first

Feature List
Note that the optional features listed in these tables may not be available in all markets.

The table contents are subject to change with a limited degree of variability based on system configuration.

PSD list

3-Plane family
3-Plane PSD Family Description
FGRE IR Prep The FGRE IR Prep Localizer produces T1-weighted images from three planes
Standard that can be used in Graphic Rx to define slices, SAT bands, and tracker pulse
locations while visualizing their exact position in all three planes.
FGRE The FGRE Localizer produces T2*-weighted images from three planes that can
Standard be used in Graphic Rx to define slices, SAT bands, and tracker pulse locations
while visualizing their exact position in all three planes.
FIESTA The FIESTA Localizer produces images with high T2/T1 ratios from three planes
Standard that can be used in Graphic Rx to define slices, SAT bands, and tracker pulse
locations while visualizing their exact position in all three planes.
SSFSE The SSFSE Localizer produces T2-weighted images from three planes that can
Standard be used in Graphic Rx to define slices, SAT bands, and tracker locations while
visualizing their exact position in all three planes.

EPI family
EPI PSD Family Description
DW EPI DW EPI is a single shot EPI pulse sequence designed to create images that
Standard differentiate tissues with restricted diffusion from tissues with normal diffusion.

eDWI eDWI is an enhanced version of Diffusion Weighted imaging that allows

Optional multiple b-values within a single acquisition, Smart NEX, and 3 in 1 and
Tetrahedral imaging techniques.
MAGiC DWI (Synthetic Synthesize b-value diffusion weighted images using scanned DWI data.
DWI)
Optional
DW EPI Tensor DW EPI Tensor or DTI is a technique that produces image contrast proportional
Optional to the local diffusion coefficient of water. Both the diffusion coefficient and its
directional dependence can be measured using DTI. Data can then be used to
image the directional dependence of the local diffusion coefficient in the tissue.
FLAIR EPI FLAIR EPI is designed to minimize the signal from CSF on a T2-weighted EPI
Standard sequence.
Use the FLAIR EPI sequence for brain imaging to minimize signal from CSF. The
sequences can be acquired in a single-shot or multi-shot mode.
GRE EPI Use Gradient Echo EPI for: task activation studies when acquired with Multi
Standard Phase, imaging of the brain to produce cerebral-blood volume maps to aid in
diagnosis of recurrent tumor versus edema in post- therapy patients.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 1-11

EPI PSD Family Description

SE EPI SE EPI is typically used to acquire T2-weighted scans. It can also be combined
Standard with the IR Prepared Imaging Option to acquire T1-weighted or IR images.

FSE family
FSE PSD Family Description
FRFSE Use 2D FRFSE for: PD- and T2-weighted acquisitions of the spine, abdominal
Standard breath hold images and head and joint images .
Use FSE-IR: to suppress the signal from fat in abdominal and extremity images,
FSE IR when you desire a more uniform fat suppression for large FOV or off-center
FOV, FSE-IR is an excellent alternative to FSE Fat SAT.
FSE
FSE is used to acquire T1-, PD-, and T2-weighted image contrast.
Standard
Triple IR with fat suppression for very black blood
Double IR uses an FSE pulse sequence and Triple IR uses an FSE-IR sequence.
FSE Double/Triple IR* Both are acquired by selecting the Blood Suppression Imaging Option.
Standard Double and Triple IR scans are used to visualize cardiac anatomy, myocardial
wall masses, valve leaflets, and black blood. Use a single RR interval for a more
T1-weighted appearance, carotid imaging, and very black blood imaging.
Metal Analysis is a Calib Imaging mode, Fast Spin Echo scan. It is a low
Metal Analysis resolution, 3D, non-selective MAVRIC scan that computes the number of bins
Optional needed for MAVRIC SL.
Metal Analysis is sold as part of the HyperMAVRIC option.

SSFSE SSFSE and SSFSE-IR use an RF pulse design that allows for significantly short
ESP and a 0.5 NEX technique that acquires a data set within a single RF
Standard excitation period.

SSFSE-IR SSFSE and SSFSE-IR use an RF pulse design that allows for significantly short
ESP and a 0.5 NEX technique that acquires a data set within a single RF
Standard excitation period.

T1 FLAIR T1 FLAIR is designed to scan the same number of slices as the T1-weighted Spin
Echo sequence, and in the same or shorter scan time, achieve better tissue
Standard contrast-to-noise as well as signal-to-noise ratios.

T2 FLAIR T2 FLAIR results in bright signal suppressed from CSF on T2-weighted image
structures adjacent to fluid filled structures, therefore becoming more
Standard apparent.
Cube and T2 FLAIR and Cube DIR have a unique acquisition and reconstruction
Cube technique that allows for high resolution imaging in all three dimensions with
Standard the goal of acquiring isotropic voxels (all voxel dimensions, height, width, and
depth, are equal).

GRE family
GRE PSD Family Description
2D FIESTA It accentuates the contrast of spins with high T2/T1 ratios (such as cerebral-
Standard spinal fluid, water, and fat) while suppressing signal from tissues with low

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

1-12
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 1: Read me first

GRE PSD Family Description

T2/T1 ratios (such as muscle and myocardium).
2D Fat SAT FIESTA 2D Fat Sat FIESTA is 2D Fiesta with SPECIAL turned on.
Standard
3D FIESTA 3D FIESTA can be used for whole body imaging and can be used in clinical
Standard applications that benefit from the differentiation of contrast between tissues of
low T2/T1 ratios (low signal intensity) and high T2/T1 ratios (high signal
intensity).
3D FIESTA with fat SAT 3D FIESTA with Fat Saturation is primarily used for coronary artery imaging.
Standard Water and fat contrast is accentuated, while muscle and myocardial tissues are
suppressed.
3D FIESTA-C FIESTA-C can be used in any clinical application that calls for relatively high
Standard spatial resolution and the differentiation of contrast between tissues of low
T2/T1 ratio (low signal intensity) and high T2/T1 ratios (high signal intensity), for
example inter-vertebral discs, hydrocephalus obstructions, biliary tree
dilatation, cholangio-pancreatography, and IAC applications.
Fast GRE (2D and 3D)* Fast GRE sequences are used to produce T2-weighted images. Tissues with
Standard short T2 are dark and tissues with long T2 are bright. In the brain, CSF produces
the brightest signal on moderate to late TE images.
Fast GRE-ET FGRE-ET uses a short TR, GRE sequence that acquires multiple phase steps per
Standard TR using an EPI echo train. FGRE-ET can either be acquired in a multi-phase or
Real Time mode. FGRE-ET MP is used to obtain myocardial images with high
temporal resolution.
Fast GRE-ET Real Time FGRE-ET RT provides real time localization of cardiac anatomy.
Standard
Fast SPGR (2D and Fast SPGR sequences are used to produce T1-weighting in images where
3D)* tissues with short T1 are bright and tissues with long T1 are dark. In the brain,
Standard white matter is brighter than gray matter and CSF is dark.

oZTEo (MR bone) oZTEo (MR Bone) is a type-in, 3D, Gradient Echo, Fast SPGR sequence that
Optional creates images with bright bone signal, flat soft tissue, and an inverted
grayscale.
GRE (dual echo) High resolution dual echo 3D FGRE/FSPGR sequence. It allows the acquisition
Standard of the first out-of-phase TE and the first in-phase TE within a single breathold in
Axial and coronal scan planes. This technique uses ARC parallel imaging
technique
GRE (2D and 3D) GRE scans acquire T2*-weighted image contrast. Sequential GRE acquisitions
Standard eliminate cross-talk because all data is obtained one slice at a time.

SPGR (2D and 3D) SPGR is used to acquire T1-weighted contrast images. Sequential SPGR
Standard acquisitions eliminate cross-talk because all data is obtained one slice at a
time.
FGRE Time Course FGRE Time Course is a cardiac application . It is activated by selecting a Fast
Optional GRE PSD with the following Imaging Options: Multi-phase, Cardiac
Gating/Triggering, Motion Compensation, IR Prepared and ASSET.
2D FGRE with IR Prep Fast GRE with IR-Prep and gating result in a delayed enhancement capability.
(2D MDE)

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 1-13

GRE PSD Family Description

Standard
3D FGRE with IR Prep 3D Fast GRE with IR Prepared uses a non-slice selective IR pulse that allows for
(3D MDE) multiple locations to be acquired within a single breath hold. IR-Prep requires a
Standard Prep Time to be entered in the Scan Parameters area - choose a value that best
suppresses myocardium.
3D FIESTA with Fat SAT 3D FIESTA with Fat SAT is primarily used for coronary artery imaging. Water
and cardiac gating and fat contrast is accentuated, while muscle and myocardial tissues are
Standard suppressed.

LAVA LAVA (Liver Acquisition with Volume Acceleration) is a 3D SPGR acquisition that
Standard automatically uses a Partial Kz filling technique and a segmented SPECIAL
technique. LAVA is used for abdominal scanning, in particular, liver imaging
It can be combined with Imaging Option Flex for a LAVA-Flex scan.
MERGE MERGE (Multi-Echo Recombined Gradient Echo) is a 2D fast GRE pulse
Standard sequence that acquires multiple echoes at several different TEs and then
averages those echoes to form a single T2*-weighted image. Used primarily in
C-spine.
SWAN SWAN pulse sequence is a high-resolution 3D, T2* multi -echo gradient echo
Optional sequence that produces echo-combined images (sum across images with
different TE’s) to achieve higher T2* weighting. SWAN is a neuro application.
Multi-echo Multi-echo FGRE/FSPGR is sold as part of the StarMap option. It is used to
FGRE/FSPGR acquire images to analyze iron-load for blood-transfused patients, in the
Optional clinical management of patients with iron overload diseases such as
Thalassemia, in liver and myocardium examinations. These images can be post
processed in READY View to measure the relaxation time variants using the
R2Starmap application.
3D FGRE/FSPGR dual This is a high resolution dual echo 3D FRGRE/FSPGR sequence. It allows the
echo acquisition of the first out-of-phase TE and the first in-phase TE within a single
Standard breathold in Axial and coronal scan planes. This technique uses ARC parallel
imaging technique
VIBRANT VIBRANT is a 3D bilateral breast application.
Optional It can be combined with Imaging Option Flex for a VIBRANT-Flex scan.

SE family
SE PSD Family Description
SE Spin Echo sequences are used to acquire images with T1-, PD-, or T2- weighted
Standard contrast in all anatomical areas.

IR Use Inversion Recovery sequences produce T1-weighted or fat-suppressed

Standard images, particularly in abdomen or extremities. This sequence is also used for
very heavily weighted T1 brain images.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

1-14
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 1: Read me first

Vascular family
Vascular PSD
Description
Family

2D Phase Contrast Phase Contrast imaging is an optional 2D and 3D imaging technique that relies
on velocity-induced phase shifts to distinguish flowing blood from stationary
Standard tissues.
Use Fast 2D Phase Contrast for:

l cardiac gated multi-phase data set within a breath hold time frame (Fast
2D Phase Contrast Fast Card part) and quantitative data analysis (Phase Contrast part)
Standard l imaging with Flow Analysis, to provide the ability to quantify flow in the
great vessels, carotids, and extremity vasculature
l imaging as a localizer for gated TOF acquisitions when looking for peak
flow in READY View
Use CINE PC:
2D Phase Contrast with
Cine Mode l to determine blood flow direction
Standard l to estimate flow velocity
l for quantitative analysis in Flow Analysis software

3D Phase Contrast Phase Contrast imaging is an optional 2D and 3D imaging technique that relies
on velocity-induced phase shifts to distinguish flowing blood from stationary
Standard tissues.

2D TOF-GRE TOF images are created by repeatedly exciting a predefined volume of anatomy
until the stationary tissue is partially saturated and the signal from the tissue is
Standard suppressed.
Like TOF, Fast TOF imaging is based on conventional Gradient Echo scanning
2D TOF-GRE Fast with flow compensation. This imaging technique relies primarily on flow-related
Standard enhancements to distinguish moving from stationary spins in creating MRA. The
2D Fast TOF sequence can be acquired with a Fast GRE or a Fast SPGR.
Use 2D TOF-GRE and TOF-SPGR sequences to:

l demonstrate the carotid bifurcation or venous anatomy

2D TOF-SPGR
l evaluate suspected basilar artery occlusive disease
Standard l Image pelvic and lower extremity vasculature
l map cortical veins
l evaluate suspected intra-cranial venous thrombosis
Like TOF, Fast TOF imaging is based on conventional Gradient Echo scanning
2D TOF-SPGR Fast with flow compensation. This imaging technique relies primarily on flow-related
Standard enhancements to distinguish moving from stationary spins in creating MRA. The
2D Fast TOF sequence can be acquired with a Fast GRE or a Fast SPGR.
3D TOF-GRE 3D TOF uses a volume acquisition to obtain image data and can be acquired
Standard with a GRE or SPGR pulse.
3D TOF-GRE Fast Use Fast 3D TOF-GRE and Fast TOF-SPGR with SmartPrep to acquire signal
Standard change over time to evaluate vascular disease.
3D TOF-SPGR 3D TOF uses a volume acquisition to obtain image data and can be acquired
Standard with a GRE or SPGR pulse.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 1-15

Vascular PSD
Description
Family
3D TOF-SPGR Fast Use Fast 3D TOF-GRE and Fast TOF-SPGR with SmartPrep to acquire signal
Standard change over time to evaluate vascular disease.
FastCard GRE Fast Card is a fast, 2D, GRE or SPGR sequence that acquires multiple phases of
Standard the cardiac cycle at single or multiple locations.
Use Fast Card for:

l breath-hold cardiac imaging (Fast Card GRE makes blood brighter and
SPGR makes the myocardium brighter)
FastCard SPGR
l removing motion in pediatric studies by using Fast Card with multiple
Standard NEX
l coronary artery imaging when used with Fat SAT
l cross-sectional studies of the cardiac chambers or the aortic arch
l evaluating cardiac function and valve assessment
FastCINE uses a k-space segmenting technique that reconstructs all phase
FastCINE steps regardless of when they are acquired within the cardiac cycle. This allows
Standard for complete imaging of the RR interval allowing better visualization of end
diastolic events.
FastCINE PC combines Phase Contrast and the Cine scan mode to enable data
FastCINE PC acquisition throughout the entire cardiac cycle. The RR Interval is monitored and
the information is used to retrospectively sort the data before reconstruction.
Standard Images are reconstructed using CINE interpolation that compensates for
differences within the cardiac cycle.

Inhance 3D Velocity Inhance 3D Velocity is a modified 3D Phase Contrast PSD. It is designed to

acquire contrast-free angiography images with excellent background
Optional suppression at a shorter scan time in comparison to 3D PC.
Inhance Inflow Inhance Inflow is designed to acquire angiography images of arteries that flow
Optional in a relatively straight line such as the femoral, popliteal and carotid arteries.
Use Inhance 3D Inflow IR to acquire contrast-free angiographic images with
Inhance 3D Inflow IR excellent background suppression that are free of venous contamination.
Optional Inhance Inflow IR can also be used to image venous vasculature. This can be
achieved by placing IR bands to suppress upstream arterial flow.
Inhance Delta-Flow is a non-contrast MRA technique that relies on arterial flow
Inhance DeltaFlow differences between systolic and diastolic phases. The data is acquired with two
interleaved, 3D FSE gated (PG or ECG) scans: one in systolic and one in diastolic
Optional phase. Systolic images are subtracted from the diastolic images to create an
arterial only image data set.

Spectroscopy family
Spectroscopy Description
PSD Family
PROBE - single voxel A version of the PRESS sequence that acquires a double spin echo from a
Optional localized volume. You can prescribe the volume manually or graphically.
A 2D CSI acquisition allows you to increase the spatial coverage and spatial
PROBE 2D CSI
resolution of a spectroscopy data acquisition relative to single voxel

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

1-16
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 1: Read me first

Spectroscopy Description
PSD Family
Optional acquisitions.
With PRESS 3D CSI, phase encoding gradients are applied along three
orthogonal axes to acquire data that, after processing, produces a 3D array of
PROBE 3D CSI spectra. Long scan times are an inherent disadvantage of this technique, as are
Optional the small, practical number of phase encoding steps along each dimension. The
clear advantages are increasing SNR and spatial coverage in the third
dimension.
PROBE SVQ (PRESS and PROBE-P is a version of the PRESS (Point RESolved Spectroscopy) sequence that
STEAM) acquires a spin echo from a localized volume defined by the intersection of
Optional three orthogonal slices.

MNS family
MNS PSD Family Description

Echo CSI The Echo CSI (MRS) sequence is most suitable for performing proton CSI studies
when no additional localization (such as that provided by STEAM CSI and PRESS
Optional CSI) is required.

FID CSI The FID CSI sequence is most suitable for performing multi-nuclear CSI studies
when a very short echo time is required for species with short T2 relaxation
Optional
characteristics. First order phasing is required for spectrum analysis.

Spin Echo (MRS) The Spin Echo (MRS) sequence is most suitable for performing multi-nuclear CSI
studies when a very short echo time is required for species with short T2
Optional
relaxation characteristics.

PROPELLER family
PROPELLER PSD Family Description
Brain DWI PROPELLER Brain DWI is used for high resolution head imaging where DWI is
Standard traditionally used. It is particularly useful in areas of high susceptibility relative
to standard EPI methods. PROPELLER Brain DWI does not reduce motion
artifact.
T1 FLAIR T1 FLAIR is a PROPELLER PSD that produces T1-weighted images with null
Standard CSF signal and optimal gray/white matter contrast. It is typically used to acquire
T1-weighted image contrast for patients with uncontrollable motion.
T2 FLAIR PROPELLER T2 FLAIR imaging provides robust T2-weighted imaging with CSF1
Standard suppression. .

PROPELLER PROPELLER is a generic PSD that can be used in brain, abdominal and
Standard musculoskeletal areas with any coil.
Select Imaging Option Fast Recovery that results in similar T2 image
contrast as an FRFSE scan.
Select Imaging Option IR Prepared that results in similar T2 image
contrast as an FSE-IR scan.

1Cerebral Spinal Fluid

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 1-17

Imaging Options
Imaging Options Description
ARC ARC is a data-driven parallel imaging technique that synthesizes missing data
Standard from neighboring source data in all three imaging dimensions: slice, phase
and frequency. Fewer calibration lines are required and reconstruction
accuracy and speed is improved resulting in highly accelerated MR data
acquisition with improved image quality and reduced artifacts.
ASSET Use ASSET to scan faster with brain, abdomen, chest, fMRI, extremities and
Standard breath hold angiography imaging. You can also use it to decrease artifacts
with EPI sequences and to decrease blurring with FSE sequences.
Blood Suppression Use Blood Suppression to obtain “black blood” cardiac images and reduce
Standard flow-related ghosting.

Cardiac Comp Use CCOMP for breath-hold abdominal images to reduce pulsatile flow
(CCOMP) artifact.
Standard
Cardiac Cardiac Gating/Triggering is used for: imaging the heart’s structure and
Gating/Triggering function, imaging in the thorax, and Cine-PC arteriography to examine flow.
Standard
Classic Use Classic to reduce the contribution of off-resonant signals to spin-echo
Standard images.

DE Prepared Use DE Prepared to apply a 90/180/90° RF DE preparation pulse to produce

Standard more T2-weighted contrast with 2D, sequential Fast GRE sequences.

Extended Dynamic Use Extended Dynamic Range to improve SNR in applications such as 3D
Range scans.
Standard
Flex Use Flex (a two-point Dixon method ) to acquire in-phase and out-of-phase
Optional echoes resulting in water only and fat only images.

Flow Compensation Use Flow Compensation to reduce motion artifacts when slow-moving blood
Standard and CSF are flowing in the direction of the applied FC gradient.

Fluoro Trigger Use Fluoro Trigger to detect the arrival of a contrast bolus in MRA exams.
Standard
fMRI (BrainWaveRT) fMRI (commonly referred to as Brain Mapping) is an option that uses a single-
Optional shot SE EPI or GRE EPI pulse sequence in conjunction with neural activation
paradigms to visualize signal intensity changes in the brain during task
performance.
Full Echo Train The Full Echo Train method completes all echo trains for Effective TE1 before
Standard Effective TE2 is initiated. The phase encoding process is altered to place the
central phase encodings at the selected Effective TE1 or TE2.
IDEAL IDEAL (Iterative Decomposition of Water and Fat With Echo Asymmetry and
Optional Least-Squares Estimation) uses a three-point Dixon method to acquire
multiple echoes resulting in water only, fat only, fat and water in-phase, and
fat and water out-of-phase processed images.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

1-18
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 1: Read me first

Imaging Options Description

HyperSense HyperSense is an acceleration technique that allows further decreases in scan
Optional time. It uses pseudo-random k-space data sampling followed by an iterative
reconstruction.
Use HyperSense with ARC to acquire higher spatial resolution or faster scans
in multiple body regions.
HyperBand Use HyperBand with EPI (brain single and dual spin echo DWI, DTI, and GRE)
Optional scans to acquire multiple slices simultaneously to reduce scan time or
increase slice coverage.
IR Prepared Use IR Prepared to enhance T1-weighting and to suppress signals from
Standard selective tissues.

Mag Transfer Use Magnetization Transfer to suppress brain parenchyma signal relative to
Standard contrast-laden blood.

MART Use MART to reduce the SAR by modifying the RF pulse throughout the
Standard acquisition, resulting in more slices per given unit of time. This technique uses
appropriate flip angles for the center of k-space filling, thus preserving image
contrast. Use MART with all SSFSE pulse sequences to reduce SAR to the
patient.
Motion Compensation Use with cardiac time course scans and T1MAP one-click applications to
Standard reduce motion. It is purchased as part of T1MAP and it is standard with time
course perfusion.
MRCP Use MRCP to acquire heavily T2-weighted images, such as MRCP or
Standard myelogram.

MSDE Use Motion Sensed Driven Equilibrium (MSDE) to suppress flow in a volume.
Optional
Multi-Phase Use Multi-Phase to prescribe a series of consecutive scans (or phases)
Standard separated by configurable delays. It is compatible with a wide range of pulse
sequences and imaging options.
Multi-Station Use Multi Station an alternative to QuickSTEP. It provides automatic table
(SmartStep) movement and switching of coils between stations for peripheral vascular
Standard run-offs. It allows you to prescan at multiple stations to optimize image quality
and it properly annotates image locations based on the landmark.
Body Navigator Use Navigator to perform a navigated, free-breathing, liver and renal imaging
Standard acquisition.

Phase Sensitive Use with 2D, FGRE and Cardiac Gating to acquire PSMDE1 cardiac images.
Optional
PROMO PROMO2 is an Imaging Option used to prospectively correct for patient motion
Optional when acquiring 3D Cube (T2, T2FLAIR, DIR), MP-RAGE, and BRAVO images.

Real Time Standard Use Real Time to acquire an interactive scan that allows you to:

1Phase Sensitive Myocardial Delayed Enhancement

2PROspective MOtion correction

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 1-19

Imaging Options Description

localize complex anatomy that lies in double oblique planes
navigate through the patient anatomy for rapid visualization
monitor temporal physiological events, including patient breathing,
kinematic studies, and bolus activity
determine the boundaries of a desired imaging region, which can then
be passed to a subsequent image application (another batch series in
the Workflow Manager)
initiate an MRA scan when you combine it with Fluoro Trigger
perform a kinematic study
detect Patent Foreman Ovale when you combine it with IR Prepared
Respiratory Use Respiratory Compensation to reduce phase ghosting from breathing
Compensation motion when scanning in the chest or abdomen.
Standard
Respiratory Use Respiratory/Gating Triggering to reduce breathing artifacts by
Gating/Triggering synchronizing the acquisition with the respiratory cycle. It can be used to
Standard acquire PD- or T2-weighted images.

Sequential Use Sequential with breath-hold abdominal or chest scans, quick localizers,
Standard and 2D TOF vascular sequences to prevent cross-talk.

SmartPrep Use the SmartPrep tracking pulse to increase the accuracy of synchronizing
Standard image acquisition with the arrival of a contrast bolus to acquire images.

Spatial Spectral RF Use SSRF to reduce signal from fat by selectively exciting a narrow range of
(SSRF) chemical shifts at the prescribed location through the application of a series of
Standard very short RF pulses.

Square Pixel Use Square Pixel to provide a square pixel within a rectangular FOV when you
Standard select asymmetrical matrix values. The pixel size is determined by the FOV
divided by the frequency matrix.
Star Star can be used with DISCO and LAVA for free breathing scans. It is sold as
Optional DISCO Star.

T2 Prep Use T2 Prep to apply a sequence of non-slice selective 90° and 180° RF pulses
Standard to suppress cardiac muscle tissue and therefore, increase the contrast
between coronary vessels and background tissue.
Tailored RF Use Tailored RF to stabilize the echo amplitudes in the FSE sequences (Spin
Standard Echo and Inversion Recovery). Tailored RF produces images with the following
characteristics: less blurring, slightly less SNR, flatter contrast for T2 weighted
images, and slightly more slices per TR.
VERSE Use VERSE to reduce the SAR by modifying the RF pulse through a reduced RF
Standard power technique. Use VERSE for all FSE acquisitions to reduce SAR to the
patient.
ZIP 512 Use ZIP as an optional reconstruction technique to create the appearance of
ZIP 1024 increased in-plane resolution. Zero-filling enhances the apparent image
resolution, it does not create resolution.
Standard

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

1-20
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 1: Read me first

Application list
One-click
Description
applications
3DASL Use 3DASL to acquire a non-invasive whole brain scan for CBF
(Arterial Spin Labeling) measurements. It uses a 3D Spiral FSE pulse sequence with Extended
Dynamic Range to acquire a set of images (PW and PD) which post-process
Optional
into CBF image maps.
3D Heart 3D Heart is an improvement to 3 PSD used to acquire coronary vessels:
Optional 3D gated Fiesta, 3D gated Fast GRE/SPGR and 3D myocardium delayed
enhancement (Fast GRE with IR-Prep and cardiac gated imaging options).
3DCINE-FIESTA Use 3D Cine Fiesta and 3D Cine SPGR to obtain volumetric cine images..
3DCINE-SPGR They are cardiac gated, segmented breathold scans.
Optional
4DFLOW Use 4DFLOW to acquire 3D Cine, free-breathing, phase-contrast images of
Optional a targeted volume throughout the entire RR that are velocity encoded in all
directions.
BRAVO Use BRAVO to acquire a high-resolution, T1-weighted sequence for fMRI.
(BRain VOlume)
Standard
BREASE Use BREASE to acquire a spectrum for breast spectroscopy. The spectrum
(BREAst Spectroscopy is displayed in the Viewer.
Examination)
Optional
COSMIC Use COSMIC to acquire a 3D axial Cervical-spine sequence.
(Coherent Oscillatory
State acquisition
for the Manipulation
of Imaging Contrast)
Standard
CineIR Use CineIR to select the optimal TI to visualize normal or viable
Optional myocardium versus myocardium with an infarct.

DISCO Use DISCO (DIfferential Subsampling with Cartesian Ordering) to acquire

Optional improved temporal resolution images in comparison to multi-phase non-
view-shared T1 weighted sequences.
MAGiC MAGiC1 is both an acquisition and post processing application. Based on the
Optional MAGiC MDME images the MAGiC post-processing generates quantitative
maps of the T1 and T2 relaxation times and Proton Density (PD) of the
imaged tissue.
MAVRIC SL MAVRIC SL is a one-click application that uses a multi-spectral 3D imaging
technique to help reduce susceptibility artifacts caused by the presence of

1MAGnetic resonance image Compilation

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 1-21

One-click
Description
applications
Optional MR conditional metallic implants.
MP-RAGE MP-RAGE1 is a one-click application that uses an IR-Prepared 3D Fast GRE
Standard with variable recovery time.

MR-Touch MR-Touch is a Phase Contrast (PC) application that generates an image

Optional contrast related to the shear stiffness of soft tissue. MR-Touch is a single
touch application that sensitively images the propagation characteristics of
acoustic shear waves generated in the tissue of interest. A liver exam is an
example of where the application is used.
MUSE MUSE2 is used to acquire high resolution, multi-shot DWI/DTI scans
Optional
QuickStep QuickStep is a multi-station, multi-phase acquisition technique that
Standard minimizes the set-up and acquisition time for lower extremity run-off
examinations. The acquisition technique eliminates the need for a localizer
scan and employs efficient prescription methods including an auto volume
prescription system with specific coils, which reduces the exam time to
approximately 6 to 8 minutes.
Silenz Silent Scan (Silenz) is a one-click application neurological data acquisition
Optional and reconstruction technique. It is designed to significantly reduce the
acoustic noise generated during an MR examination.
T1MAP-SPGR T1MAP is used to acquire scans that sample the T1 recovery curve at mul-
T1MAP-FIESTA tiple inversions times that allow the application to measure T1 using curve
fitting methods.
Optional
T2 Map T2 Map is used cardiac images that can be processed in READY View to pro-
(Cardiac) duce T2 color maps.
Optional
T2 Map T2 MAP is used to noninvasively detect changes in the collagen component
(Cartigram) of the extracellular matrix of cartilage. T2 MAP acquires multiple scans at
each location; each set of scans has a unique TE resulting in a set of gray
Optional
scale images that represent different T2 weighting.
TRICKS TRICKS is a CEMRA multi-phase, single station, acquisition technique to
(Time Resolved visualize dynamic processes, such as the passage of blood with contrast
agent through the peripheral vascular system. It eliminates the need for a
Imaging of
timed or automatic triggering of contrast.
Contrast Kinetics)
Optional
IDEAL IQ IDEAL IQ expands on the IDEAL technique to produce triglyceride fat
Optional fraction images and R2* maps in addition to water and triglyceride fat
images from the collected multi-echo images of an IDEAL IQ acquisition.

1Magnetization Prepared Rapid Gradient Echo

2MUltiplexed Sensitivity Encoding

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

1-22
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 1: Read me first

Post Processing
Post Processing Description
ADC and eADC These READY View parametric maps The ADC algorithm subtracts the T2
maps in READY View information from the DWI image. The Ratio (eADC) map is a relative inverse of
Standard the ADC map.

Synthetic DWI The data sets are provided by the DWI Synthetic scan to produce DWI Synthetic
Optional post processed images.
BOLD Correlation
Coefficients in READY The correlation coefficient algorithm returns a value, on a pixel-by-pixel basis,
View that characterizes similarity between the temporal variations in time course
data and a user-specified reference pattern.
Standard
The BrainStat algorithms provide accurate spatial resolution for brain tissue
viability given by hemodynamic parameters: BV (Blood Volume relative), BF
BrainStat in READY View (Blood Flow relative), TTP (Time to Peak), MTT SVD (Mean Transit Time with
Standard standard deviation). These hemodynamic parameters can provide unique
information on tissue changes and improve delineation of vascular-deficient or
vascular-rich regions in normal and abnormal anatomy.
FiberTrak in READY View FiberTrak is an optional feature with Diffusion Tensor, that allows you to display
Standard white matter tracks.
MAGiC post-processes a single scan to create Qmaps and several conventional
MAGiC contrast weighted images such as T1W, T2W, PDW, FLAIR. The image contrast
is controlled by virtual scanner settings of TE, TR and TI that can be adjusted
Optional after the scan has been completed. The resulting contrast-weighted images can
be viewed in real-time.
Fusion in
Fusion is a READY View feature that allows you to fuse and overlay high-
READY View
resolution anatomical images with computed functional maps.
Standard
MR-Touch READY View application allows you to draw ROIs on an MR Touch
MR-Touch in READY View image and to view the wave images in a movie mode. You can fuse magnitude,
wave or elastogram images with the original or user selected series and then
Optional display two images types side-by-side as you draw an ROI over the desired
area.
R2 Starmap The R2 Star feature uses a water proton transverse relaxation rates (R2)
in READY View technique. The R2 Star values vary with tissue characteristics such as iron
Optional concentration.

SER and MR Standard The SER and MR Standard READY View applications allow you to use SER or
algorithms in READY Standard MR for analyzing T1-contrast changes in the breast and use MR
View Standard to analyze T2 contrast changes in the brain. SE-EPI is used rather than
Standard GRE-EPI because it results in fewer artifacts.

Spectro in READY View The READY View Brain and Prostate MR spectroscopy protocols are used to
display functional maps for metabolites and metabolite ratios in the brain and
Standard prostate.
T2 Map (Cartigram) in The T2Map READY View application displays the T2 Map acquisition, where the

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 1-23

Post Processing Description

READY View T2 relaxation time color map is coded to capture T2 values from the TE range of
the acquired images. Blue and green reflect the longer T2 values, yellow the
Optional
intermediate T2 values, and red and orange the shorter T2 values.

Flow Analysis The Flow Analysis feature allows automatic segmentation of 2D FastCine Phase
Contrast and Cine Phase Contrast (PC) images with through plane encoding, to
Optional
calculate flow and velocity information at various points in the cardiac cycle.
SAGE 7
Sage is a spectroscopy tool.
Optional
3D, MRA, and Reformat are Volume Viewer applications that allow you to view :
a 3D view is different in that it displays an image of the 3D model
MR General Review (which may consist of one or more 3D objects), and that you can
(Volume Viewer): manipulate this 3D model.
MRA, Reformat, an MRA view, which is projection images from a 2D stack or 3D volume
3D of MRA images and allows you to view the data from different angles.
Standard a Reformat view, which is allows you to define and display cross-
sections of a 2D stack or 3D volume of image data that are oriented
differently from the original acquisition images.
BrainWave is the post processing and visualization software for fMRI data
BrainWave collected with BrainWave RT. BrainWave PA allows you to interactively view and
Optional edit fMRI data. It is important you read and understand BrainWaveRT before you
use the visualization tool.
BrainWave Fusion BrainWave Fusion adds the capability of displaying white matter tracks with
Optional functional data on a high-resolution image.

Other
Feature Description
PURE PURE1 is designed to reduce coil intensity variations through a calibration
Standard process. PURE is an intensity correction scan option selected from the
Details tab that can only be used with compatible coils. PURE requires that a
calibration scan be acquired prior to the PURE scan.
SCENIC SCENIC2 is designed to reduce coil intensity variations through a calibration
Standard process and to improve the quality of images acquired using surface coils.
SCENIC automatically corrects the low spatial frequency intensity
modulations.
ConnectPro ConnectPro is a feature that allows your MR system to connect to a
Standard HIS/RIS system.

SPECIAL SPECIAL uses an inversion pulse transmitted at the frequency of fat and
Standard timed to the null point of fat. This results in a signal produced from protons
bound in water and a decreased signal from nuclei precessing at the

1Phased array UnifoRmity Enhancement

2Surface Coil ENhancement for Imaging Clarity

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

1-24
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 1: Read me first

Feature Description
frequency of fat.
Cardiac Tagging Cardiac tagging is available with FastCard. Stripe tagging is typically used for
Optional long axis images and grid tagging is used for short axis images.
BrainWaveRT BrainWaveRT is a brain mapping software to record the acquisition data. It
Optional integrates the sensor device with the software and is used to start your
functional brain acquisition and the real-time visualization of brain maps.
Performed Procedure PPS is a feature that allows your MR system to connect to a HIS/RIS system.
Step
Standard

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 1-25

O N L IN E HEL P

Online Help introduction

Your manual can be viewed in an Online Help format from a CD/DVD that is formatted for your GE system or as a pdf
file from a personal computer.
The Online Help is an HTML document, which allows much of the content to be hyper-linked and allows the use of
various display effects.

Click blue text to link to another topic for more information.

Use the Contents, Index, Search, Glossary and Favorites tabs to navigate to the information you need. If you have
linked to another topic, use the back and forward arrow icons to navigate between topics.
Figure 1-10: Online Help on GE system

Use the menu bar icons to navigate in your online help or add a favorite topic to the Favorite tab.
Table 1-4: Online Help GE system icons

Icon Description

Toggles navigator pane: Hide/Show.

Home returns content pane to the topic that

appears when online help is first opened.

Moves back and forward between selected topics.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

1-26
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 1: Read me first

Icon Description

Moves to next or prior topic in the TOC.

Favorites adds a topic to the Favorites tab.

Searches for a term only in the currently displayed

topic.

PDF file of the manual

Use the bookmarks or the Table of Contents to navigate to the information you need. Simultaneously press Ctrl + F
to open a search user interface, from which you can type and enter key words for a search.
Figure 1-11: Example of Online Help on PC

Procedures
Open/close the manual
Add a topic to Favorites
Print a topic
View a movie

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 1-27

O N L IN E HEL P

Open/close the manual procedure

1. To open the manual on your system, follow these steps.

a. On your GE system, click the Online Help icon located in the footer area of the screen.
The default state for the Table of Contents is open.
b. Click a book to display the topics related to the book title.
c. To view the Index or Glossary or to perform a search, click the appropriate tab in the lower-left corner of
the screen.
d. To return to the Table of Contents, click Contents.
2. To resize the Online Help window, click and drag any edge of the window.
3. To close the Online Help manual, click the Close icon in the upper-right corner of the Online Help window.
The next time you open help, it will open to the default page, size, and location.
4. To open the manual in a PDF format on a personal computer, follow these steps.
a. Load the CD/DVD that contains the manual into the CD/DVD drive of a PC that has a PDF reader
application.
b. Click My Computer on your desktop.
c. Navigate to your CD/DVD drive.
d. Select the desired operator manual file (language PDF file) and right-click > Open.
The pdf file title page displays.
e. From the bookmark panel, click a chapter to display the related topics.
f. Click the topic link to open the desired topic.
g. Consider using the PDF search function to navigate to the desired topic. Simultaneously press Ctrl + F to
open a search user interface, from which you can type and enter key words for a search.

Related topics
About this manual
Online Help

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

1-28
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 1: Read me first

O N L IN E HEL P

Add a topic to Favorites procedure

Use this procedure to add a topic to the Favorites tab in your Online Help. This lets you save links to topics that you
may reference frequently.

Online Help on your system

1. Select the topic that you want to add as a Favorite.

2. From the menu bar of your Online Help, click the Favorites icon .
The selected topic displays in the Favorites tab.

To remove a favorite topic, select the checkbox next to the topic to be removed in the Favorite's list and click
the red X.

Related topics
About this manual
Online Help

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 1-29

O N L IN E HEL P

Print a topic procedure

Use this procedure to print topics from a Personal Computer displaying a pdf file of your operator manual.

1. Open the pdf version of the manual on a PC.

2. Navigate to the topic you want to print.
3. From the PDF menu bar, click File and navigate to the Print selection.
4. From your PDF print window, make the appropriate selections.
5. Click OK.

Related topics
About this manual
Online Help

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

1-30
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 1: Read me first

O N L IN E HEL P

View a movie procedure

Movies are only available on the MR system online help. They are not available on the PDF version of the manual.

1. Navigate to a topic that has a movie file. For example, chapter 4: Patient handling > Padding > Padding
introduction.
2. Click the view movie link to view the movie.
A new browser tab opens in which the move plays.
Figure 1-12: Example of a movie

3. Move the cursor over the movie to view the movie controls at the bottom of the movie.

4. Click the movie Pause icon to pause the movie.

5. Click the movie Play icon to resume play of the movie.

6. Click and drag the slider to scroll to a new movie location.

7. Click the X on the tab to close the movie.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 1-31

O N L IN E HEL P

Search procedure
Use these steps to search the contents of the entire online help.

1. From the Navigation pane, click Search.

Figure 1-13: Navigation pane

2. In the search text field, type text that describes what you want to search for and surround the content with
quotes. For example, "Safety label".
3. Click Search.
Figure 1-14: Example of search results with content surrounded by quote marks

It is important to surround the text with quote marks. If the text has no quote marks, it will widen the
search to include topics that have parts of words that are in the search field.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

1-32
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 1: Read me first

Figure 1-15: Example of search results with content not surrounded by quote marks

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 1-33

P ASSW O RDS

Password introduction
This section provides information on defining a password and how to change your password.
For more information regarding passwords, see your MR Privacy and Security operator manual.

Procedures
Password rules considerations
Change your password procedure

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

1-34
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 1: Read me first

P ASSW O RD

Password rules considerations

It is recommended all passwords meet the following criteria:

Minimum: 1 lowercase alphabetic character.

Minimum: 1 of these special characters: @#%_-
Minimum: 1 numeric character.
Minimum: 1 uppercase alphabetic character.
Has between 8-63 characters.
Does not repeat more than 3 consecutive characters.
Is not a dictionary word.
Has not been a password used within the last 5 passwords.
Is not a palindrome.
Has at least 8 characters different from the last password.
Must not contain a white space character.

From the Local User tab > password area, there are minimum and advanced password rules. These rules are a
subset of the recommended rules listed above.
Figure 1-16: Password area on Local Users tab

Procedures
Change your password procedure

Related topics
Data Privacy introduction

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 1-35

P ASSW O RD

Change your password procedure

Use these steps to change your password.

1. From the header area of the screen, click the Tools icon.
2. From the System Management work area, click the Service Desktop Manager tab.
3. From the Service Desktop Manager, click Lock Screen Switch User.
4. From the Logon screen (Figure 1-17), click Change Password.
Note the upper area of the logon screen (GE logo area) changes based on your MR system.
Figure 1-17: Button and text box area of logon screen

5. From the Change Password screen, update your password.

Type your Logon name.
Type your old password.
Type your new password.
Type your new password again to confirm.
6. Click OK.

Related topics
Password procedures
Data Privacy introduction

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

1-36
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 1: Read me first

USER IN TERF ACE

System user interface introduction

The system screen design has three major areas:

1. Header: contains the Worklist Manager, Image Management, and System Management icons and Scan,
Protocol, and Review session tabs for changing the work area display.
2. Work area: contains the Scan, Display, Tools, or Patient List work area, depending on the icon or session tab
selected in the Header area. For details see:

Image Management work area

Scan work area
Viewer work area
MR General Review work area
READY View work area
System Management work area

3. Footer: contains system status messages, icons for Reconstruction, Network, Archive, Film, and Disk Space
status, and icons to access Hardware, Stopwatch, and Online Help.

Procedures
Open Image Management work area procedure
Protocol session procedure
Review session procedure
Scan Session open procedure
Scan Session close procedure
Scan workflow
Open System Management work area procedure
Worklist Manager open work area procedure

Related topics
Terminology
Session introduction

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 1-37

USER IN TERF ACE

User interface terminology

Control panels
Control panels are comprised of selectable buttons. Feature applications such as READY View , Volume Viewer, and
Viewer all have control panels.

Linking
Linking allows you to connect series or images in scan and volume viewer.

Pull-down menus
A drop-down or pull-down menu capability is indicated by an arrow. For example, all session tabs have drop-down
menus.

Screen
Screens or windows are free floating. They typically appear within a workflow and require you to respond before you
can move to the next step in the workflow. An example of a screen is the SAR and dB/dt screen that appears in the
New Patient workflow.

Session
A session is a workflow activity involving scan, review, and/or protocols. Sessions are identified by tabs displayed in
the header or across the top of the screen. The tab always indicates the session type.

Tabs
Tabs are used through-out the user interface to organize applications and features. For example, in the Workflow
Manager area of the Scan work area, there are two tabs: Task and Series Data tab. Click a tab to view it's contents.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

1-38
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 1: Read me first

Figure 1-18: Workflow Manager screen

Task
A task is a piece of work assigned in the Workflow Manager. The tasks can be scan data or post-processed data
tasks.

Workflow
A workflow provides an order in which specific tasks are to be performed. You can find workflows in Procedure
folders, such as the Manual Prescan workflow. Another example is the Workflow Manager, used for scan and post-
processed data tasks.

Worklist
A worklist displays a list of "to do" tasks. From the Worklist Manager, you can schedule and select patients for scan
activities, enter patient demographic information, complete HIS/RIS tasks, and start an exam.

Related topics
User Interface introduction

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 1-39

USER IN TERF ACE

Header area
The icons and session tabs in the header area always appear on the screen.
Header area Work area
Click Scan Session tab to view the:
Scan work area screen
Viewer work area displays when
Viewer is active in the scan session
Three scan sessions are allowed
(one active and two Scan Done)

Click Protocol Session tab to view the

Protocol work area.
One protocol session is allowed.

Click Review Session tab to view Review

work area.
Up to two review sessions are allowed if
system resources are available.

Click Worklist Manager icon to display

the Worklist Manager work area. The
Worklist Manager area is used to:
Schedule patients
Select patients for scan activities
Enter patient demographic
information
Complete HIS/RIS tasks
Start an exam
Click Image Management icon to
display the Image Management work
area. The Image Management work area
is used to:
Archive/network images

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

1-40
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 1: Read me first

Header area Work area

Select an exam/series/image
Launch an application from the
Session Management, Data
Management or Tools lists

Click the Tools icon to display

the Tools work area and Tools menu. The
Tools work area has multiple tabs that
open unique work areas that are used
to:
Open a protocol session to create or
edit protocols from the Protocol
Organize tab.
Initiate a TPS Reset from the Service
Desktop Manager tab
Define multiple system settings
from the Guided Install feature on
the Service Desktop Manager tab
Define several system preferences
from the System Preferences
selection on the Tools pull-down
menu
View error log and write a note to
your service representative. For
details, see Service Notepad write
a message procedure.
View and select options on the
Gating Control screen from the
GATING tab
The menu allows access to
additional functions

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 1-41

USER IN TERF ACE

Footer area
The message and icons in the footer area always appear on the screen.

Footer area Description

Message area that displays messages
regarding the system status. Click the
arrow next to the message to display the
error log screen.
The Scan Parameter area also has a Scan
messages area that is related to the series
in an INRX state.
Click the Gating, Fan, Light controls icon to
display the Gating Controls screen for:
gating
magnet light and fan
The current Date and Time is displayed. See
System date and time procedure to
change the date or time.

The Reconstruction Status area displays the

status of the examination, series, and
images currently being reconstructed. The
most recently reconstructed image is
displayed until the next image is ready for
reconstruction.

The Job Manager icon displays the network

status of the examination, series, and
images currently being networked and the
destination location.

The Archive/Remove Status area displays

the status of the examination, series, and
images currently being archived to the
primary archive device. The Remove Status
simply shows "Removing" or "Removed."
The individual exams, series or images are
not listed.

The Film Status area displays the status of

the examination, series, and images
currently being filmed.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

1-42
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 1: Read me first

Footer area Description

Roll the cursor over the icon to display the

disk capacity for 256 and 512 images.
The graph displays multiple disk capacity
states:
empty
¼ full
½ full
¾ full
a red segment when there is
insufficient space available for the
currently prescribed acquisition.

Click to open an iLinq window.

Click to open the Stop Watch screen. See

Set count down time on Stop Watch.
Click to open the online help window.

Click SAR1 icon to open the SAR display.

Click the External Host icon to open the

External Hosts screen and select a Guided
Focus Ultrasound host from the menu. For
details, see Connect to Guided Focus Ultra-
sound system procedure.

1Specific Absorption Rate

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 1-43

Footer area Description

This icon displays when a new service pack

is available and the MR system is up and
operational. For more details, see in
Remote software download procedure
Click e-Reporting icon to launch the e-
Reporting tool, from which you can view,
export or print a report. The icon displays "i"
when there are unread reports.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

1-44
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 1: Read me first

USER IN TERF ACE

Work areas
The Work area content changes based on the session or icon selected from the header. Once a session tab or icon
has been selected, the work area content can be changed based on your selections. Below is a list of work areas.

AutoView work area

The upper right corner of the screen displays AutoView.

Gating/Protocol Notes work area

There are two tabs in the lower right corner of the screen: Protocol Notes and Gating. Both are covered when the
Details tab is selected from the Scan Parameters area.

Scan related work areas

Scan work area
Worklist Manager work area
Viewer work area

Display related work areas

Viewer work area
MR General Review work area
READY View work area

System Management work areas

System Management work area

Image Management work areas

Image Management work area

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 1-45

USER IN TERF ACE

Worklist Manager work area

Click the Worklist Manager icon from the header area of the screen to open the Worklist Manager work
area.
Scroll to the bottom of the graphic to view details.
Figure 1-19: Worklist Manager work area

Table 1-5: Worklist Manager image legend

# Description
1 Screen header area
2 Worklist Manager header area
3 Worklist Manager Patient List
4 New Patient screen
5 New Exam screen
6 New Other Information screen
7 AutoView
8 Gating waveform or Protocol Notes area

Header area
Figure 1-20: Header

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

1-46
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 1: Read me first

Patient Record area

Figure 1-21: Patient Record area: New Patient (1), Edit Patient (2), Duplicate Patient (3), Delete Patient (4)

The New icon allows you to enter a new patient into the Worklist Manager. The patient is added to the
Patient List once you click Save in the Other Information area.

The Edit icon opens the currently selected patient in the Worklist Manager so that you can change patient
information.

The Duplicate icon duplicates the currently selected patient in the Worklist Manager. This feature is
typically used to generate a new scan session on a patient that is still listed in the Worklist.

The Delete icon removes a patient from the Worklist Manager.

View area
The Patient List contents, by default, is comprised of all patients that have been added to the Worklist but have not
been scanned. There are two Status options that change the patient list contents.

In Progress: expands the Patient List contents to include patient exams that are still in progress. An exam in
progress means that the exam has had scanning ended or placed in suspension but it has not been placed in
an End Exam state.
Completed: expands the Patient List contents to include patient exams that have been completed. An exam
is completed when End Exam has been selected from the End menu on the Workflow Manager.

Find area
Figure 1-22: Find area pull down menu

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 1-47

The Find menu contains all the patient list menu bar columns. Several of the menu selections require text fields to be
completed resulting in a more refined sorted Patient List.

Last Time Refreshed

The last date and time the list was refreshed.

Refresh
Refresh updates the Patient List with the most recent data from the HIS1/RIS2 system.
The Refresh arrow opens the Refresh screen.

Search Data
The Search Data button opens the Search Data screen.

Footer area
Figure 1-23: Start Exam button

Start Exam
The Start Exam button starts a new scan session.

Related topics
WorkList Manager introduction

1Hospital Information System

2Radiology Information System

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

1-48
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 1: Read me first

USER IN TERF ACE

Scan work area

Click Start Exam on the Work List Manager to view the scan work area.
Scroll to the bottom of the graphic to see details.
Figure 1-24: Scan work area

Table 1-6: Scan work area image legend

# Description
1 WorkFlow Manager: for details, see the Workflow Manager introduction.
2 Scan controls
Graphic Rx area

3 The localizer viewports display the images from which you graphically prescribe a series. Images
from the localizer series are the default images displayed. Images from other series can be
displayed in these three viewports. For details see Select a series for GRx viewport.
Scan Parameters area
The system default is to have the lower right quadrant viewport display an image. This viewport is
4 overlaid with more scan parameters when you click the arrow on the Scan Parameter menu bar.
You can change the system default so that the normal behavior is to display more scan parameters
rather than the third localizer image. For details, see the Scan parameter details procedure.
AutoViewer area
5
For details see AutoView considerations.
Tabs: Waveform display, Protocol Notes area, Coil
For detail on Protocol Notes, see the Add an image.
6
For details on Coil tab:
see Air Touch™ auto coil select procedure.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 1-49

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

1-50
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 1: Read me first

USER IN TERF ACE

Image Management work area

From the header area of the screen, click the Image Management icon to open the Image Management
work area.
Scroll to the bottom of the graphic to see details.
The exact content of all the screen areas may vary based on your system configuration.
Figure 1-25: Image Management work area

Table 1-7: Image Management image legend

# Description
1 Screen header area
2 Image Management Patient List controls
3 Image Management Patient List
4 Archive/Network destinations
5 Screen footer area
6 Session Apps list
7 Data Apps list
8 Tools
9 Message area
10 AutoView
11 Gating waveform or Protocol Notes area or Coil tab

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 1-51

# Description
12 SAR screen

Patient List controls

Source menu
The Source menu controls the contents of the Patient List and displays the host databases to which you are
currently connected. The host data base names are also visible at the bottom of the Image Management work area.
The default source list is the Local data base of your scanner.
Figure 1-26: Source menu

The Archive device icon identifies the node as a DICOM1 device that can be used as an archive device. Not all hosts
can be used as archive nodes (for example, another MR system cannot be used as an archive node, but a PACS2 can
be used as an archive node). To be a successful archive node, the node must meet certain DICOM requirements so
that when the data is transferred from the host system to the node, the DICOM handshake can be successful. This is
not necessary for networking images. The same handshake is not required. This icon is assigned if Archive node is
selected on the Archive Node Settings area of the Configure Network Hosts screen.
The Network node icon indicates that the node is identified as a network and not archive node. The network icon is
assigned if Archive node is not selected on the Archive Node Settings area of the Configure Network Hosts screen.

Filter menu

The Filter icon opens the Filter Data screen.

The Eraser icon removes the filter and display all of the exams in the active remote Patient List.

Refresh

The Refresh icon updates the currently active data base that is listed next to Source.

Patient List
The Patient List contains the information in the following order:

1Digital Imaging and COmmunications in Medicine

2Picture Archiving Communications System

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

1-52
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 1: Read me first

Exams
Series
Images
Image thumbnails.

The size and sorting of each data area can be adjusted. For details, see the Size exam/series/image areas in
patient list procedure.
Figure 1-27: Patient list

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 1-53

Figure 1-28: Patient List from remote browser

Note that the remote browser has an exam and series column that displays the images in the remote and local exam
and series. For details, see View remote browser procedure.
The image thumbnails do not display on the remote browser; this is expected behavior.
Figure 1-29: Exam title area

The # Exams displays the total number of exams listed in the currently selected data base.
The Select menu selects all exams, all archived exams, all unarchived exams, or no exams.
The Find menu finds a category or a descriptive word of the specific exam you are trying to locate.

The Remove icon removes a selected exam from the local data base.
Figure 1-30: Series title area

The # Series displays the total number of series listed in the currently selected exam.
The Select menu selects all series, all archived series, all unarchived series, or no series.

The Remove icon removes a selected series from the local data base.
Figure 1-31: Image title area

The # Images displays the total number of images in the currently selected series.
The Select menu selects all images or no images.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

1-54
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 1: Read me first

The Remove icon removes a selected images from the local data base.

Destinations

Local DB displays the name of the data base that is currently active in the Patient List.
The Archive area displays all the available Archive Nodes. The slider becomes active when more than three archive
1

nodes are available. If the archive node is a device such as an UDO , then a bar graph icon appears above
the button. Roll the cursor over the button and a tool tip appears indicating the available space on the device.
Figure 1-32: Archive destinations

The Network area displays all the available Network Nodes. The slider becomes active when the number of nodes is
greater than the space available.
Figure 1-33: Network destinations

Recycle Bin

The Recycle Bin icon opens the Recycle Bin screen from which you can retrieve exams that were deleted
before they were archived.

Job Management

The Job Management icon opens the Job Management screen from which you can view jobs in a queue and
jobs that are completed.

Image Management messages

The Image Management message area displays messages related to archive, network, and image display.

1Ultra Density Optical disk

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 1-55

Figure 1-34: Message area

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

1-56
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 1: Read me first

USER IN TERF ACE

Viewer work area

The Viewer is accessed from two locations:

From a scan session Task or Series tab, select the desired series and click View from the Workflow Manager.
The series must be in the "Done" state.
From the Session Apps list on the Image Management desktop.
Figure 1-35: Viewer work area

Table 1-8: Viewer work area image legend

# Description
1 Viewer control panel
2 Data selector tab
3 Film Composer
4 Viewports

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 1-57

MR GEN ERAL REVIEW USER IN TERF ACE

READY View work area

Open READY View to display the READY View work area.
Figure 1-36: READY View work area

Table 1-9: Image legend

# Description
1 List of review steps
2 Application panels
3 Tool menus that can be displayed at the top or side of the image viewports
4 Source image/ image maps/graph viewports

Review steps area

Review steps are displayed at the top of the MR General Reviewscreen: the displayed review steps correspond to
the series that exist in the current exam and were selected from the Series Loading Page.

Mini Patient List

Click the Mini Patient List icon to open the list of series for the currently active exam. The series already
present in the session are shown in italics. To add series not present in the session, select a series from the list and

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

1-58
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 1: Read me first

drag and drop it into any viewport.

Figure 1-37: Mini Patient list screen

Click the X on the Mini Patient List screen to close the Mini
Patient List and return to the current review session.

Protocols
For more details see Protocol selection work area.

The + icon opens/closes the Protocol List screen from which you can select another review step. Protocol list
is the list of all the protocols and review steps compatible with your data set. The list is filtered based on the
selections made from the Protocol Filters menus.
Click My Protocols to only display protocols you have chosen as favorites.
Type any key words in the Search field to easily find protocols within the protocol list.
The protocol list is ranked alphabetically with first the favorite protocols and in a second part, all the other protocols.
Click Protocol Page to open the Application Selection screen. If a new protocol is chosen within the protocol page,
the loaded / selected series is launched into a new session and the previous session is lost.

Application screens area

The content in this panel changes based on the currently active application and the selected review step.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 1-59

Figure 1-38: Example of a DWI application screen area

Screens that have a hash-marked symbol in front of the screen name can be picked up and moved to a
new location on the screen.

The Tools icon displays additional selections. It is a toggle button that moves the screen area between
two sets of screens.

The Help icon located at the top of each panel is a toggle button. It opens and closes a screen with
explanations about the application screen.

Source image/ image maps/graph viewports

The content in the viewports changes based on the currently active application and selected review step. The
viewport can display images, image maps, spectrum, graphs, etc.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

1-60
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 1: Read me first

Tools panels
Note that this panel may be placed either on the user interface at the top of the screen (horizontal display) or at the
side of the screen (vertical display).
Each tool panel has an arrow in the lower right corner. Click on the arrow to see other icons in that tool group. Click
on an icon and many display a screen in the upper right corner of the user interface.
For details on all tools, see MR General Review (Volume Viewer) introduction

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 1-61

MR GEN ERAL REVIEW USER IN TERF ACE

MR General Review work area

Open MR General Review, 3D Viewer, Reformat or READY View to display the Volume Viewer work area.
Figure 1-39: Example of Volume Viewer work area

Table 1-10: Image legend

# Description
1 Mini Patient list
2 List of review steps
3 Top level toolbar icons, for details, see Top level toolbar considerations/procedures
4 Toolbar icons, for details, see Toolbar introduction
5 Application panels
6 Source image/ image maps/graph viewports

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

1-62
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 1: Read me first

Mini Patient List

Click the X on the Mini Patient List screen to close the Mini
Patient List and return to the current review session.

Review steps area

Review steps are displayed at the top of the MR General Review screen: the displayed review steps correspond to
the series that exist in the current exam and were selected from the Series Loading Page.

Protocols
For more details see Protocol selection work area.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 1-63

Type any key words in the Search field to easily find protocols within the protocol list.
The protocol list is ranked alphabetically with first the favorite protocols and in a second part, all the other protocols.
Click Protocol Page to open the Application Selection screen. If a new protocol is chosen within the protocol page,
the loaded / selected series is launched into a new session and the previous session is lost.

Global icons
These icons are always available. For details, see Top level toolbar considerations/procedures.

Toolbar icons
Note that this panel may be placed either on the user interface at the top of the screen (horizontal display) or at the
side of the screen (vertical display), for details, see Toolbar move procedure.
Each tool panel has an arrow in the lower right corner. Click on the arrow to see other icons in that tool group. Click
on an icon and many display a screen in the upper right corner of the user interface.
For details on all tools, see Toolbar introduction.

Application screens area

The content in this panel changes based on the currently active application and the selected review step.
Figure 1-41: Example of an application screen area when MR General Review is open

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

1-64
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 1: Read me first

Figure 1-42: Example of a READY View application screen with the Help icon active

Screens that have a hash-marked symbol in front of the screen name can be picked up and moved to a
new location on the screen.

The Tools icon at the top of each panel displays additional selections. It is a toggle button that moves the
screen area between two sets of screens.

The Help icon at the top of each panel opens toggles a screen on/off with explanations about the
application screen.

Source image/ image maps/graph viewports

The content in the viewports changes based on the currently active application and selected review step. The
viewport can display images, image maps, spectrum, graphs, etc. For details, see
Series/images/maps/graphs/tables procedures.

Related topics
Getting Started introduction
MR General Review (Volume Viewer) introduction

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 1-65

USER IN TERF ACE

System Management work area

In the header area, click the Tools icon to open the System Management work area.
Scroll to the bottom of the graphic to see details.
Figure 1-43: System Management work area

Table 1-11: Systems Management work area image legend

# Description
1 Tools icon
2 Applications area
3 System Management work area

Applications and work area

Each tab displays different screens in the System Management work area.

Service Desktop Manager screen

Error Log screen

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

1-66
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 1: Read me first

Gating Control screen

System Management Protocol screen

Related topics
System management Introduction

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 1-67

SESSIO N S

Session introduction
This section contains information about sessions. In general, a session initiates a workflow in one of three areas:
scan, review, and protocols. Sessions are identified by tabs displayed in the header or across the top of the screen.
The tab always indicates the session type.

Procedures
Scan Session open procedure
Scan Session close procedure
Open Image Management procedure
Open Service Desktop Manager procedure
Open Worklist procedure
Protocol Session Procedure
Review Session Procedure

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

1-68
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 1: Read me first

PREFERENCES

Preferences introduction
Preferences allow you to set default behaviors for a number of different features. Some system preferences require
a password to change the status.

Procedures
Graphic Rx Toolbar procedure
Set Ready Brain reference line preference procedure
Research/clinical modes activate procedure
Save localizers preferences procedure
Scan parameter details procedure
Save FTMRA realtime images procedure
Show Slices in Graphic Rx procedure
AIR™ Recon DL save source images procedure
Automatic table movement procedure
Anatomical Region menu preferences procedure
SAR Scout Preferences procedure
Set the Auto Archive node for the system procedure
Set the Auto Archive node for the current exam procedure
Set the Auto Network node for the currently active exam procedure
Set the Auto Network node for the system procedure

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 1-69

PREFERENCES

Graphic Rx Toolbar procedure

Use these steps to specify whether the Graphic Rx Toolbar automatically displays when a series is in Setup mode or
to open it manually.

1. Click the Tools icon menu and select System Preferences.

Toolbar click the Graphic Rx icon on the Scan Parameters screen.

Select Show to have the Graphic Rx Toolbar always visible when a series is in Setup mode. To temporarily
hide the toolbar, click the X icon on the Graphic Rx Toolbar.
4. Click Close.

Related topics
Preferences introduction

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

1-70
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 1: Read me first

PREFERENCES

AIR™ Recon DL save source images procedure

Use these steps if you want both the original and the AIR™ Recon DL images.

1. From the screen header area, click the Tools icon arrow
2. From the Tools menu, select System Preferences.
3. From the System Preferences screen, type and enter your password in the Admin Password text field and
click Apply.
Only MR users that have been assigned to the GESystemPreferenceGroup by the site administrator will
have a password and thus the privilege to make changes.
4. From the System Preferences screen, click the Save Recon DL Source Images On option button to turn it on.
The result is that both the original and AIR™ Recon DL images will be reconstructed into separate series.
Note that the images from the Original series do not appear in AutoView; only the AIR™ Recon DL images
display in the AutoView window. Both series appear in the Patient List.
Note that since the change is on a system level, you must end the current exam and start a new exam
before the Save Recon DL Source Images option is activated.
Figure 1-44: Preferences screen

5. Click Close to exit the Preferences screen.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 1-71

Considerations

Consider the following scenarios when selecting Save Original scan parameter option box.

l If AIR™ Recon DL is turned Off and Save Original is turned On, then:
N (the scanned series displayed in the Patient List) only has the image enhancer (for example, PURE)
applied.
the saved original series is N + 40000, which has no image enhancer applied.
If AIR™ Recon DL is turned On, Save Original is turned On and the Save Recon DL Source Images option on the
Preferences screen is turned On, then:
N (the scanned series displayed in the Patient List) has both AIR™ Recon DL and any image enhancer (for
example, PURE) applied.
the saved original series is N + 40000, which has neither an image enhancer (for example, PURE) nor AIR™
Recon DL applied.
If AIR™ Recon DL is turned On, Save Original is turned Off and the Save Recon DL Source Images option on the
Preferences screen is turned On, then:
N (the scanned series displayed in the Patient List) has both AIR™ Recon DL and any image enhancer (for
example, PURE) applied.
the saved original series is N + 40000, which has no AIR™ Recon DL applied but the image enhancer is
applied.
Table 1-12: Save Original summary

Save AIR
AIR Save N+40000
Recon DL N
Recon DL Original
Source
No AIR Recon DL No AIR Recon DL
Off On Off
Yes Image enhancer No Image enhancer
Yes AIR Recon DL No AIR Recon DL
On On On
Yes Image enhancer No Image enhancer
Yes AIR Recon DL No AIR Recon DL
On Off On
Yes Image enhancer Yes Image enhancer

Related topics
Preferences introduction

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

1-72
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 1: Read me first

PREFERENCES

Set Ready Brain reference line preference procedures

Use these steps to set a default preference for the reference line used in a Ready Brain scan.

The Ready Brain reference line can be set from the Exam Preference screen before saving the first task or the
System Preference screen before starting an exam. To set the Ready Brain reference line from the Exam Preference
screen, click the Scan Session menu and select Preferences. and follow step 3 in the steps below.

1. Click the Tools icon menu and select System Preferences.

ACPC sets the ACPC line, which extends from the superior surface of the anterior commissure to the
center of the posterior commissure.
Figure 1-45: ACPC line

OM set the Orbitomeatal line, which extends from the nasal root through the pontomedullary junction.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 1-73

Figure 1-46: OM line

4. Click Close.

Related topics
Preferences introduction
Ready Brain workflow

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

1-74
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 1: Read me first

PREFERENCES

SAR Scout Preferences procedure

Use these steps to set the default for the SAR Scout menu to Auto, On or Off. This Preference only applies to 3.0T
MR systems.

1. From the screen header area, click the Tools icon arrow and select System Preferences.
2. From the System Preferences screen, type and enter your password in the Admin Password text field and
click Apply.
Only MR users that have been assigned to the GESystemPreferenceGroup by the site administrator will
have a password and thus the privilege to make changes.
3. From the System Preferences screen, or from the Exam Preferences screen, make a selection from the SAR
Scout menu:
Auto, which only applies to the first 3-plane localizer scan since the last landmark was established or the
last patient position or patient entry change was made.
On, which always causes SAR Scout tasks to be inserted on the Workflow Manager when the patient
position is Supine, the anatomy is set to head or neck, or the landmark is within 600 mm of the head end of
the scanning area.
Off, which suppresses the insertion of a SAR Scout task. This can possibly result in a longer wait time
between clicking Scan to the start of the acquisition. The wait time is due to the system's inability to
determine head SAR as accurately as is done with a SAR Scout task scanned.
4. Click Close to exit from the either the System Preferences screen or the Exam Preferences screen.

Related topics
Preferences introduction
SAR Scout scan procedure

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 1-75

PREFERENCES

Research/clinical mode activate procedure

Use these steps to activate the research/clinical mode for all exams or an individual scan session.

1. Click the Tools icon menu and select System Preferences.

2. From the System Preferences screen, select Research or Clinical. Respond to any message prompts.
Research is only available if your site has a research agreement with GEHC.
The new selection will apply to the next scan session. For example, if you are currently scanning in clinical
mode and you select research mode, the current scan session remains in clinical mode and the next scan
session opens in research mode.
3. Click Close.
4. To set Research mode preference for the currently active scan session, follow these steps.
a. Click the Scan Session menu and select Preferences.
b. On the Exam Preferences screen, select Research. Respond to any message prompts.
All remaining un-scanned series in the Workflow Manager will be acquired in research mode. You
cannot switch from research mode back to clinical mode within a scan session.
c. Click Close.

Related topics
Preferences introduction

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

1-76
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 1: Read me first

PREFERENCES

Save localizers preferences procedure

Use these steps to automatically save the graphic lines displayed in all three graphic viewports to a series within the
exam.

The Save Localizers option button must be selected from the Graphic Rx toolbar for a successful save
localizer action.

1. Click the Tools icon menu and select System Preferences.

2. From the System Preferences screen, type and enter your password in the Admin Password text field and
click Apply.
Only MR users that have been assigned to the GESystemPreferenceGroup by the site administrator will
have a password and thus the privilege to make changes.
3. From the System Preferences screen, click the Enable Save Localizers option buttonOn orOff.
This action allows Save Localizer on the Graphic Rx toolbar to be an active selection. If it is turned off, the
Enable Save Localizer option button on the Graphic Rx toolbar is grayed out or inactive.
If you change the on/off state during an exam, it is not active until the next exam.
4. Click Close to exit from the System Preferences screen.
5. From the Exam Preferences screen, click the Enable Save Localizers option button On or Off.
If you select Off, then the localizer is not saved to a separate series in the patient list, even though you
have set the system preference for Save Localizers On.
If you select On, then the system saves the localizer to the patient for each series within the exam for
which you have selected the Enable Save Localizer option button on the Graphic Rx toolbar.
6. Click Close to exit the Exam Preferences screen.

Related topics
Save localizer images procedure
Save localizer viewer procedure
Preferences introduction

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 1-77

PREFERENCES

Scan parameter details procedure

Use these steps to automatically hide or show the scan Details tab in the third Graphic RX viewport.

1. Click the Tools icon menu and select System Preferences.

Related topics
Preferences introduction

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

1-78
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 1: Read me first

PREFERENCES

Save FTMRA Realtime images procedure

Use these steps to set a default preference to save pre-trigger FTMRA1 real-time images as a separate series. The
series number for these pre-trigger images may contain a duplicate series number with some existing series of the
same exam.

1. Click the Tools icon menu and select System Preferences.

4. Click Close.

Related topics
Preferences introduction
Fluoro Trigger with Real Time scan procedure

1Fluoro Trigger Magnetic Resonance Angiography

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 1-79

PREFERENCES

Show Slices in Graphic Rx procedure

Use these steps to set a default preference to hide or show the 2D scan lines on a localizer when in Graphic Rx.

1. Click the Tools icon menu and select System Preferences.

For details on how to turn Show Slices on/off within a graphic prescription regardless of the system preference,
see Show Slices in Graphic Rx.

Related topics
Preferences introduction

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

1-80
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 1: Read me first

PREFERENCES

Automatic table movement procedure

Use these steps to specify automatic or manual start of the table movement for all exams or an individual scan
session.

When a session is saved to a protocol, the last preferences selected during the session are saved and then
restored when the protocol is loaded. This can be useful if you want to disable one of the on/off options such as auto
table movement for all emergency trauma protocols because you are concerned about life lines, for example.

1. Click the Tools icon menu and select System Preferences.

2. From the System Preferences screen, type and enter your password in the Admin Password text field and
click Apply.
Only MR users that have been assigned to the GESystemPreferenceGroup by the site administrator will
have a password and thus the privilege to make changes.
3. To set preference to cross exams, follow these steps.
a. Choose the desired table movement option.
Select On to have the table move automatically to the scan location if the table travel distance is less
than 5 cm.
Select Off to have the table not move to the scan location, thus requiring you to press Move to Scan on
the keyboard.
b. Click Close.
4. To set preference for currently active scan session, follow these steps.
a. Click the Scan Session menu and select Preferences.
b. On the Exam Preferences screen, choose the desired table movement option.
Select On to have the table move automatically to the scan location if the table travel distance is less
than 5 cm.
Select Off to have the table not move to the scan location, thus requiring you to press Move to Scan on
the keyboard.
c. Click Close.
The changes apply to the currently active scan session as soon as you close the Exam Preferences
screen.
Whichever selection is made from the Exam Selection screen, it only applies to the currently active
scan session. Therefore, the next scan session reverts to the selection made from the System
Preference screen.

Related topics
Preferences introduction

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 1-81

PREFERENCES

Anatomical Region menu preferences procedure

Use these steps to set the default for the Anatomical Region menu to either an extended or limited list.

a. From the Extended Anatomy Selection list option, click Hide for a limited number of options to display on
the list.
Figure 1-49: Limited Anatomical Region list

b. From the Extended Anatomy Selection list option, click Show for all options to display on the list.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

1-82
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 1: Read me first

Figure 1-50: Extended Anatomical Region list

Related topics
Anatomical Region procedure 1
Anatomical Region procedure 2
Anatomical Region considerations
Preferences introduction

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 1-83

SECURITY TO O L S

Security tools introduction

The security tools accessed from the Service Desktop Manager Utilities tab, allow you to:

import a certificate or to configure a certificate.

to set filters that restrict which system services are allowed to be controlled by other devices trying to access
the Operator console.
to view Enterprise audit messages and to send those messages to an audit repository.
to update McAfee ePo and scan your MR system. For all McAfee content, see the Privacy and Security
operator manual: 5848748.

Introductions/Procedures
Enterprise Audit Trail introduction
McAfee manual scan procedure

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

1-84
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 1: Read me first

SECURITY TO O L S

Enterprise Audit Trail introduction

EAT1 is a component to generate and transport standard audit messages about protected health information. The
audit message format is compliant with DICOM2 supplement 95 and IHE extensions.
The concept of protecting Patient Health Information is becoming more important within the medical industry today.
This is caused by HIPAA3 regulations and a heightened awareness of electronic security. Although it is ultimately the
clinical site’s responsibility to protect PHI, GE Healthcare should provide tools to help secure electronic systems.
Audit Trails provides key information when PHI4 is accessed, transferred, exported or imported. The major benefit in
Enterprise Audit Trails is enterprise integrated audit information: audit event logs can be stored either in 3rd party
Audit Repositories or within the scope of GE Healthcare products (in protected local files).
The EAT component provides industry standard audit trailing feature and comes standalone or with the EA3
authentication and authorization component.
For more Enterprise Audit details, see your MR Privacy and Security operator manual.

1Enterprise Audit Trail

2Digital Imaging and COmmunications in Medicine
3Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act
4Protected Health Information

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 1-85

SECURITY TO O L S

McAfee manual scan procedure

Use these steps to start an antivirus scan on a GE MR system connected to a MCAfee ePo server.

Prerequisites
Existing and functional ePo server, along with the server details and access to the machine it is set up on.
A GE MR system that is to be scanned for threats.
The antivirus scan might take over an hour. Therefore, do not start an antivirus scan until you are finished
with clinical scanning for the day.

Procedure

5. From the Security Tools folder, click Antivirus.

Figure 1-52: Toolbox list

6. Click the Antivirus Scan tab.

7. Click Start Scan.
When the antivirus scan starts, the Status Information box notifies you that the it is running.
When the antivirus scan is complete, the Status Information box displays that the scan is completed, and
the Scan Results details can be seen in the lower half of the screen.

Related topics
Security tools introduction

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

1-86
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 1: Read me first

DATA P RIVACY

Data Privacy introduction

Globally, laws and requirements for patient data privacy have been enacted to protect the health information of
individuals against access without consent or authorization. Examples of global privacy standards are:

Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (HIPAA)

Directive 95/46/EC on Data Protection (the Data Protection Directive)
Personal Information Protection and Electronic Documents Act (PIPEDA)
Department of Defense Platform IT (PIT)
EA3 (Enterprise Authentication, Authorization & Audit trail)
Data Protection Act UK
European Union Data Protection Direction EU

EA3 is the global term for data privacy. HIPAA is the term used for data privacy on the MR system user interface.
The Privacy Rule establishes regulations for the use and disclosure of Protected Health Information. Your MR
system's Data Privacy features help your site control access to the scanner and to patient data.
GE Medical Systems has a longstanding reputation of providing customizable, clinical solutions to protect the privacy
and security of your organization’s unique clinical workflow, as well as your patient’s confidentiality.
Please recognize the intended use of the product when determining how critical any privacy risk is, relative to patient
care and safety. GE is very concerned with providing the best care to the patients, and in some cases we have
determined that patient care is more important than the risk to privacy. In these cases we take every precaution to
minimize privacy risk.
Security and Privacy are maintained across a Healthcare system. Any product that is placed into an uncontrolled
environment will not be secure and cannot protect privacy. As we design scanners, we design them to be
implemented in a “Secure Environment”. A secure environment is based on multiple layers of security, a concept
known as defense in depth. For example, a Best Practice that is gaining much attention places firewalls between
departments, as well as at a DMZ1, between all extranets, and the external Internet access point. In this example a
radiology firewall may allow DICOM and HL7 traffic through, but no other protocols. These DICOM and HL7 protocols
would be blocked at the DMZ and again at the Internet Firewall.
Data Privacy using EA3 requires you to log on to the scanner and log off when you are done scanning for a period of
time. If you do not log off, the system will log you off and you will have to log back on. Data Privacy using EA3 contains
the following permissions. You can have Administrative, GE Service, Standard User or Limited User. Standard User
can perform scanning functions and modify protocols. Administrator can set up and delete users. Limited users can
perform all scanning functions. GE Service can do all functions. You must have Administrative permission to add or
delete users.
When you are adding users for local databases, certain rules apply. You must use the following guidelines:

Users/Groups – Lower case letters and numbers only

Users/Groups – No limit on length
Passwords – for details, see Password rules considerations.

Data Privacy using EA3 contains the following 2 default users:

1Demilitarized Zone

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 1-87

Administrative User (admin) - can add and delete users

GE Service (gesvc) - Limited User scanning functions

Procedures and screens

If you make modifications to the following tabs the changes don’t appear until after a system reboot:

Local Users tab

Groups tab
Applications tab
Enterprise tab

Passwords
Password rules considerations
Change your password procedure

EA3
Applications tab
Role-based membership considerations
Administrator assigns roles procedure

Local Users
Add or remove a user from a group procedure

Groups
Groups tab
Add users to a group procedure
Remove a user's group membership procedure

Enterprise
Enterprise tab

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

1-88
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 1: Read me first

DATA P RIVACY

Data Privacy Controlled Access considerations

Data Privacy using Controlled Access always enables the Logon screen and a level of security for your system. The
security level setting is set by your service representative during software installation. Your site should collaborate
with your service representative to choose the security settings for your system. Once configured, this security
setting cannot be changed without reinstalling the software.
There are two levels of security:

Signa Secure Advanced Settings

Typical Security Settings
Recommended for most customers. Customers can increase security settings from the defaults provided
by selection.

At installation, a default account is provided. After a software load from cold, your site administrator determines an
operating system password for use by the site administrator. For details, see your Privacy and Security operator
manual.
It is highly recommended that your site administrator creates accounts, user names, passwords and assign roles to
each MR user. The administrative user can perform the following functions:

Create a unique account for each user with unique username, password, and roles.
Assign users to various groups, which means that they have permission for certain features.
Delete accounts.
Enable/disable an Emergency Logon feature that allows a user to log on without a password.
Set an inactivity timeout to automatically lock the screen.

Related topics
Data Privacy introduction

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 1-89

DATA P RIVACY

Applications tab
When you log in as an administrator to your system, you can access EA3, which opens to the Application tab. System
administrators can perform a number of tasks that affect what users can do or will see when they log into the
system.
System administrators can perform a number of tasks that affect what users can do or will see.

Procedures
Role-based membership considerations
Administrator assigns EA3 roles procedure
Figure 1-53: Applications tab

Related topics
Data Privacy introduction

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

1-90
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 1: Read me first

DATA P RIVACY

Role-based membership considerations

Every person who has permission to use the system is a user. Users are set up by a system administrator (there can
only one system administrator). The administrator may be an IT personnel in an enterprise environment, or a site
manager or lead tech in stand-alone environments.
The administrator adds new users and assigns the users to a group, which dictates the level of privileges a person
will have. For example, a user named Sue Smith could belong to a group called technologists, radiologists,
administrators, or any combination. Sue may have privileges for ProtocolEdit, GESystemPreferenceGroup but no
permission for GELevel2Group.

Groups
All groups require a password. You can create new groups. Groups that are standard with your MR system include
the following:

LinuxShellGroup, which means that you must have this role assigned to enter information on the Command
line window.
GELevel2Group, which means that for research sites, Second level SAR and dB/dt are available options.
Figure 1-54: 3.0T SAR and dB/dt limits screen

ProtocolEdit, which means that the user can edit site protocols.
GESoftwareInstaller Group, which means you have the authority to accept and install a new GE software
update.
GESystemPreferenceGroup, which means that a user can make changes to the System Preferences screen.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 1-91

Figure 1-55: System Preferences screen

Enterprise
If your facility uses the Enterprise option with Role-based membership, and you have clicked Enable
Authorization on the Application tab and clicked Enable Enterprise Authentication on the Enterprise tab,
contact your IT department for the Group Membership name that has access to the scanner.
After obtaining the Enterprise Group Membership name, from the Groups Tab, click Add Enterprise Group
and enter the name provided by the IT department. From the Groups Tab, apply the roles for the group; at a
minimum a single role must be selected.
Failure to add these roles to the Group tab may inadvertently lock all users out of the scanner.

Related topics
Data Privacy introduction

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

1-92
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 1: Read me first

DATA P RIVACY

Administrator assigns EA3 roles procedure

Use these steps to assign roles for each MR system users. Only administrative users have permission to access the
User Accounts configuration.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 1-93

4. Type the administrative user name and password.

Figure 1-57: User accounts screen

5. Click Login.
When you log in as an administrator, the User Accounts interface opens to the Application tab.
System administrators can perform a number of tasks that affect what users can do or will see when they
log into the system.
6. From the Application tab, follow these steps.
Figure 1-58: Application tab

a. Enable Authorization: confirm that it is turned on, the default state.

When authorization is enabled, anyone logging in through EA3 (both local and enterprise users) must
have a role. Anyone without a role is denied access. Basically this means that everyone in your
department must have a password to log onto the MR system.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

1-94
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 1: Read me first

b. Emergency Logon Allowed; enable or disable it. Disabled is the default and the recommended option.
Enable Emergency Logon Allowed option button if you want the ability for an MR tech who does not
have a password to access the system.
Disable Emergency Logon Allowed option button, which prevents emergency user access.
c. Emergency Roles: the roles assigned to the emergency user, which is a Standard user role.
d. Configure delay after authentication failure: defines a delay time, in seconds, that a user is prevented
from logging onto the system after an authentication failure. The value must be a number of 1 or greater.
The recommended value is 3-5 seconds.
e. Inactivity Timeout (Minutes): - The minutes that must elapse without any mouse/keyboard, etc. activity
before a timeout is generated. When a timeout is generated, the EA3 logon screen is displayed. This value
can be any positive integer, or it can be 0. If the value is 0, this indicates NO inactivity timeout; regardless
of how much time has elapsed the system does not timeout.
f. Display Last Logon Name: when enabled, each time the splash logon screen is displayed, it displays the
user ID of the last user that has logged in. As an administrator, you can see who had the last access to the
system.
g. Administrator Message: under certain circumstances / error conditions, the user of EA3 is asked to
contact an administrator. This field allows the administrator to specify contact details for himself / herself
and a custom message.
h. Emergency Prompt: the text that is displayed to any user logging in as emergency. The user is asked to
enter information (usually their actual user name). This text appears in that prompt for information.
i. Click Apply Configuration to accept your configuration changes.
If there was a problem with making the changes (such as an invalid value or a problem contacting the
back end Servlet) an error message box appears with a description of the error.
If the changes are successful, then a brief message appears indicating that the changes were applied in
a green label.
j. Click Restore Configuration to Undo any changes made that have not yet been saved.

7. From the EA3 Administration screen, click Local Users tab.

8. From the Local User tab, click Add Local User.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 1-95

Figure 1-59: Local User tab

9. From the Add User screen, type information for each of the following and then click Add User:
A unique User ID
Full Name
Password
Confirm Password
For password guidelines, see Password rules considerations.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

1-96
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 1: Read me first

Figure 1-60: Add User screen

10. Click Add To Groups.

Figure 1-61: Groups area of Local User tab

11. From the Add Membership for User screen, select the desired group and click Add Memebership.
Press Shift and click each desired role if you want more than a single role assigned to the user.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 1-97

Figure 1-62: Add Membership for User screen

12. From the bottom area of the screen, click Apply Configuration and close the screen.
Figure 1-63: Bottom area of screen

13. Logout .
For details, see System logout procedure.
14. Reboot the system.

For details, see System restart procedure.

Related topics
Data Privacy introduction

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

1-98
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 1: Read me first

DATA P RIVACY

Local Users tab

The Local Users tab lists all of the users that have permission to use the system. With a local user name selected,
the user's logon password can be changed, the user's name can be changed, or the user can be deleted from the
Local User's list. The tab is available when you are logged in as an administrator on your MR system.

Considerations
When you are adding users for local databases, password rules apply. For details, see Password rules
considerations.

Procedures
The following procedure is to be performed by an administrative user with access to EA3. All procedures assume EA3
is open and the Local Users tab is selected.
For more Local user tab details, see your MR Privacy and Security operator manual.

Add or remove a user from a group procedure

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 1-99

Figure 1-64: Local User Management tab

Related topics
Data Privacy introduction

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

1-100
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 1: Read me first

DATA P RIVACY

Add or remove a user from a group procedure

Use these steps to add or remove a user from a defined group.

1. From the Local Users tab, select the user you want to modify from the Local Users list.
The groups that the selected user has membership are listed in the Groups area.
2. From the Groups area, click Add To Groups or Remove From Groups.
Figure 1-65: Add To Groups > Add Membership For User

3. Select the group you wish to add or remove for this user.
4. Click Add Membership or Remove Membership.

Related topics
Data Privacy introduction

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 1-101

DATA P RIVACY

Groups tab
The groups tab lists all of the groups that are set up on the system. From the Group tab, each user can be assigned
to a group. The members of a specified group will have the privileges that are assigned to that group. You can also
remove a user from an assigned group.
When you log in as an administrator to your system, you can access EA3. To view the Groups tab, open EA3 and click
Groups to add/remove Local or Enterprise Groups, change group roles, or change group memberships.
Every person who has permission to use the system is a user and each user is assigned to one or more groups. The
group to which a user is assigned determines the level of access a user will have. Users and groups are set up by
system administrators. These administrators may be IT1 personnel in an enterprise environment, or a site manager
or lead tech in stand-alone environments. For example, a person named Sue Smith could belong to a group called
technologists, radiologists, administrators, or any combination.
The group to which a person belongs has privileges. If you do not have an enterprise system, it means that only local
users and groups that reside on the machine can log into the system. If your system is set up for enterprise logon,
your IT person or administrator will be using more of the features.

Considerations
Only one group and user can be in context at a time. If you choose multiple users, the system selects the top
user in your selected list. Once a user or group is in context, you can make any necessary modifications to that
user or group.
If there are no users or groups, then there no items in context. All of the buttons in the center panel are
disabled until a user or group is added.
To save the changes, Apply Configuration needs to be performed when the changes are completed.
Some fields and buttons on the Group tab are not selectable. The following roles, users or groups have one or
more of these criteria and they cannot be modified.
Roles: limited user, standard user, GE service, administration.
Users: root, sdc, insite.

If you make modifications to the following tabs the changes don’t appear until after a system reboot:

Local Users tab

Groups tab
Applications tab
Enterprise tab

Procedures
The following procedures are to be performed by an administrative user with access to EA3. All procedures assume
EA3 is open and the Groups tab is selected.
For more Group tab details, see your MR Privacy and Security operator manual.

1Information Technology

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

1-102
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 1: Read me first

Add users to a group procedure

Remove a user's group membership procedure
Figure 1-66: Groups tab

Related topics
Data Privacy introduction

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 1-103

DATA P RIVACY

Add users to a group procedure

Add users to a group procedure
Use these steps to give users membership to a defined group.

1. From the Groups tab, select a group in the Local Groups list.
2. In the Group Members area, click Add Membership.
The Add Users To Group screen lists all the users that are eligible to be added to the selected group.
3. Select the users you want to add to the group.
If no users are eligible to be added to this group, an error message displays.
4. Click Add To Group.

Related topics
Data Privacy introduction

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

1-104
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 1: Read me first

DATA P RIVACY

Remove a user's group membership procedure

Use these steps to remove a user's membership from a specified group.

1. From the Group tab, select a group from the Local Groups list.
2. Click Remove Membership.
The Remove Users From Group screen lists all of the users that are eligible to be removed from the
selected group.
If no users are eligible to be removed from this group, an error message displays.
3. Select the users that you want to remove from the group.
4. Click Remove From Group.

Related topics
Data Privacy introduction

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 1-105

DATA P RIVACY

Enterprise tab
When you log in as an administrator to your system, you can access EA3. To view the Enterprise tab, open EA3 and
click Enterprise. The Enterprise tab is used by your site’s IT1 or GE Service personnel. It provides connectivity to the
site’s user database.
If you do not have a network established in your hospital or clinic, the Enterprise tab will not be used.
For more Enterprise tab details, see your MR Privacy and Security operator manual.
Figure 1-67: Enterprise tab

Related topics
Data Privacy introduction

1Information Technology

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

1-106
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

Chapter 2: Safety
This section presents the concepts necessary to successfully complete the working safely process. Specifically, you
need to understand:
Introductions
Safety standards
Magnetic fields
Gradient fields
Electromagnetic fields
Clinical hazards
Equipment hazards
Clinical screening
Patient emergencies
Additional scan and display cautions and warnings
System maintenance
Safety procedures
Safety Review
MR Compatibility
Service Schedules
China RoHs

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-1

Introduction
The MR Safety Guide contains information applicable to several MR system configurations. A topic heading, a note, or
other wording indicates information that is applicable to a specific system configuration.
This chapter focuses on the visible and invisible sources of hazard and concern in the magnetic resonance (MR)
imaging environment and emphasizes the need to work safely. To ensure safe operation of your scanner, you must
understand several components of your imaging system. This chapter provides brief guidelines for working in a
magnetic field, key concepts regarding the patient alert system, as well as magnet, quench, radio frequency (RF),
laser light, metal sliver, acoustic, peripheral nerve stimulation (PNS), and equipment hazards. It contains the step-by-
step instructions to help you learn how to:

Eliminate Magnet Hazards

Respond to Emergencies
Check the Cryogen Levels
Handle Contact with Liquid Cryogens

This chapter contains important safety information that you and the physician must understand thoroughly
before using the system.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-2
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

IN TRO DUCTIO N

Safety Information
The Magnetic Resonance Imaging (MRI) system uses a magnet, which can have a field strength several thousand
times greater than that of the earth’s magnetic field. The magnetic field surrounding the magnet may present a
hazard to personnel and equipment within the immediate area. Therefore, the magnetic field safety information
described in this chapter is very important. You and your physician must understand it thoroughly before you begin to
use the system. You can find additional safety information throughout your Operator Manual. If you need additional
training, seek assistance from qualified General Electric (GE) personnel.
Make sure your training guides are readily available at all times. Review the procedures and safety precautions
periodically. Through Magnetic Resonance (MR) safety education, careful planning, and diligent upkeep of your MR
facility, a safe environment can be provided for both patients and personnel.

WARNING
Do not modify this equipment without the specific authorization of GE.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-3

IN TRO DUCTIO N

Incident reporting
Any serious incident related to the use of this GE Healthcare device should be reported to both the manufacturer
and the health authority/competent authority where the device is installed.
Complete a GE Healthcare report to one of the following:

Contact your local service representative

Report to: [email protected]

Provide the following information in the report:

The catalog number or the model designation of the device as stated on its identification plate affixed on the
device
The SystemID/serial number/lot number of the device
Date of incident
Description of incident, including any patient or user impact/injury
Your contact information (facility, address, contact name, title, and telephone number)

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-4
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

IN TRO DUCTIO N

Intended use
The SIGNA™ Premier system is a whole body magnetic resonance scanner used to produce images of the inside of
the human body that help aid the diagnosis of disease. In a clinical setting, Magnetic Resonance imaging (MRI) may be
used to distinguish diseased or compromised tissue from normal tissue.
MRI technology is routinely used to help the diagnosis in diseases such as oncology, stroke, heart and peripheral
vascular disease, pediatric diseases, etc. MRI technology in general, however, is not limited to specific diseases, stage
and condition of diseases, or clinical forms.
MRI technology is intended to be used by the healthcare professionals (clinicians and trained technologists) following
good clinical practice. It can be used in broad patient population including adults, children and infants, following good
clinical practice.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-5

IN TRO DUCTIO N

Clinical benefit
The clinical benefit of an MR System is to help healthcare professionals provide accurate diagnostic information that
enhances the diagnostic and treatment care pathways of patients for a variety of diseases and conditions.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-6
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

IN TRO DUCTIO N

Indications for use

To view indications for use statement, click Indications for Use.

CAUTION
These devices are limited by federal law to investigational use for indications not in the “Indications for Use”
statement for a specific system type. Under federal law, these devices should only be used for the functions
set forth in the “Indications for Use” statements.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-7

IN TRO DUCTIO N

Restrictions on use

CAUTION
Federal law restricts the sale, distribution, and use of this device to or on the order of a physician.

CAUTION
Do not load non-system software onto the system computer.

WARNING
The MR system is not designed to provide information for clinical stereotactic use. The spatial accuracy
obtainable with your MR system may not be adequate for stereotactic procedures and can vary depending
on the patient, the pulse sequence used, and the system itself. It is therefore recommend that MR images
not be used for stereotactic applications.

WARNING
Electrically conductive stereotactic devices may lead to high localized SAR. Excessive transmit power may
result from interactions between the structure and the transmit coil. In addition, improper padding between
the patient and any conductor may lead to excessive localized heating.

Clinical stereotactic use refers to being used in localization for surgical procedures.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-8
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

IN TRO DUCTIO N

Instructions for use

IEC 60601-2-33 assumes that because no chronic effects from exposure to MR fields are known, worker safety limits
are the same as for patients. However, it is prudent to minimize worker exposures.
Workers must prevent ferromagnetic materials from entering the magnet room. Ferrous projectile hazards are a
major safety concern. Note that some materials that are initially non-magnetic may become magnetic when
subjected to a static magnetic field over a period of time. Motion in static magnetic fields (especially near large
spatial field gradients) may induce metallic tastes, vertigo, nausea, and possibly flashes of light (magneto-
phosphenes). These motion effects are considered to be non-hazardous, provided they do not cause the worker to
fall.
Time-varying gradient magnetic fields may induce peripheral nerve stimulation if the worker intercepts sufficient
time-varying flux. Peripheral nerve stimulation is non-hazardous unless it causes the worker to injure himself when
startled by the effect. MR workers shall be adequately trained to minimize health effects of high static magnetic field
as described above. Field plots of the maximum time-varying gradient |B| workers could experience outside the
magnet bore is shown in the figure below.

Figure 2-1: Maximum Magnitude Gradient Magnetic Field from three Simultaneous Axes at the Patient Bore Radius (worker exposure is limited to
these levels as a function of z).

Table 2-1: Image legend

# Description
1 Isocenter
2 Magnet from isocenter to front
Radio frequency fields at sufficiently high levels may cause heating. Outside the magnet bore the radio frequency
fields rapidly decay. Let B1 be the magnetic field strength of the radio frequency magnetic field. A plot of the square
B1 normalized to its value at isocenter is shown in figure below. At most B1 at isocenter may produce the whole-
body Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) limit. If as much of the body were exposed outside the bore then the graph
below shows the scale factor for each Z location. This is a very conservative estimate of SAR since the total flux into
the body is likely to be much smaller.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-9

Figure 2-2: Plot of the Square of B1 Normalized to Isocenter for the Body Birdcage Coil on Axis.

Table 2-2: Image legend

# Description
1 Square of B1 normalized to isocenter.
2 Square of B1 normalized to isocenter for body birdcage coil on axis.
3 The point (0.707) at which RF transmission is reduced by 3 dB from maximum at isocenter.
4 The point (0.316) at which RF transmission is reduced by 10 dB from maximum at isocenter.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-10
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

IN TRO DUCTIO N

Contraindications for use

Contraindications for use statement

In general, patients with conductive (e.g. metallic) implants are contraindicated for MR scans. Some implantable
devices have been labeled as MR Conditional under certain operating conditions. MR Safe implants will have the MR
Safe symbol in their implant documentation.
When evaluating whether to proceed with MR scanning on patients with such implants, consult the implantable
device’s labeling.

MR Safe: For patients with implants that are labeled as MR Safe, consult the implantable device’s labeling.
MR Conditional: For patients with implants that are labeled as MR Conditional, consult the implantable
device’s labeling.
MR Unsafe: Patients with implantable devices that are MR Unsafe are contraindicated.

If the level of MR compatibility is not known, then an implantable device should be considered MR
Unsafe.

MR environment safety terminology

The MR Environment Safety Terminology is intended to help explain labeling matters for medical devices and other
items that may be used in the MR environment to ensure the safe use of MR technology.
Terminology for defining the safety of items in the MR environment is provided in ASTM F2503 Standard Practice for
Marking Medical Devices and Other Items for Safety in the Magnetic Resonance Environment. FDA recommended
using the terminology MR Safe, MR Conditional, and MR Unsafe, defined in ASTM F2503 (FDA guidance document,
“Establishing Safety and Compatibility of Passive Implants in the Magnetic Resonance (MR) Environment Document”).

Definitions

MR safe: or
An item that poses no known hazards in all MR imaging environments.
With this terminology, MR safe items are non-conducting, non-metallic, and non-magnetic items, such as a plastic
Petri dish. An item may be determined to be MR safe by providing a scientifically based rationale rather than test
data.

MR Conditional:

Risk of serious injury. This device shall only be used under the conditions described below. Consult your MR system
operator manual for further information. Non-clinical testing has demonstrated a device with this symbol is MR
Conditional and can be scanned safely only under the following conditions:

Maximum Static Magnet Field: 3.0 Tesla

Maximum Spatial Gradient:

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-11

Transmitter 3,800 [G/cm] (38 [T/m])

Maximum Whole Body Average SAR:
4W/kg for 60 minutes of scanning produces a temperature of less than 41 Centigrade

Note that the signal from this device may be visible in the images.

MR Unsafe:
An item that is known to pose hazards in all MR environments.
MR unsafe items include magnetic items such as a pair of ferromagnetic scissors.
ASTM standard F2503 also describes how MR Safe, MR Conditional and MR Unsafe device Icons are to be used for MR
labeling of implants and devices. For details see MR safety labels.

CAUTION
Safe scanning of patients with MR Conditional devices or implants may be complex. Health care professionals
that scan patients with MR Conditional devices or implants should consult the implant or device
manufacturer for instructions with respect to safety guidelines.

WARNING
Scanners are not designed to regulate SAR and dB/dt for levels other than the IEC NORMAL MODE (WB SAR
<= 2 W/kg, head SAR <= 3.2 W/kg and dB/dt <= 80% of the mean nerve stimulation limit) and IEC FIRST MODE
(WB SAR <= 4 W/kg, head SAR <= 3.2 W/kg and dB/dt <= 100% of the mean nerve stimulation limit). No other
limits are enforced.

WARNING
The magnetic field of the MR system can cause a ferrous implant (e.g., surgical clip, cochlear implant,
intracranial aneurysm clip etc.) or prosthesis to move or be displaced, resulting in serious injury. Patients and
MR workers should be screened for implants and those individuals with implants should, in general, not enter
the scan room. For patients and MR workers with implants that are labeled as “MR Safe” or “MR
Conditional”, consult the implantable device’s labeling and the technical information about the MR system.
Prostheses should be removed before scanning to help prevent injury.

WARNING
The tests commonly employed to determine MR Conditional implant heating safety (standard, ASTM F2182,
ASTM.org), require quadrature excitation. Heating results for non-quadrature excitation (such as parallel
transmit, MultiDrive, or elliptical drive) are unknown.
For patients with MR Conditional implants or devices, applying Preset or Optimized RF Drive Modes may
violate the MR Conditional specifications.
When scanning patients with MR Conditional implants, check with GEHC to ensure your system has quadrature
transmit.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-12
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

IN TRO DUCTIO N

Product identification labels

Product identification labels (ratings) can be found on the tops and sides of the cabinets, the rear of monitors, and
other exterior surfaces on the equipment. Such product labels alert you to specific hazards and the level of hazard
importance. The labels may also contain messages that communicate the specific hazard, the probable consequence
of involvement with the hazard, and how the hazard can be avoided. In the event you are unable to identify these
labels, contact your service personnel.
One or more of the product identification labels in the tables below may be on your system or peripheral equipment.
Please familiarize yourself with the labels that apply to your particular system.
Table 2-3: Warning symbols

Label Description (typical use)

Warning: Crushing of hands

Warning: Hot surface

Warning: Magnetic field

Warning: Electricity (barriers, points of entry)

Warning: General warning sign

Warning: Laser beam

Warning: Non-Ionizing radiation

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-13

Table 2-4: Prohibited symbols

Label Description (typical use)

Prohibited: Do not obstruct

Prohibited: No access for unauthorized persons

Prohibited: Do not touch - hazardous voltage

Prohibited: No metallic articles or watches

Prohibited: No access for people with metallic implants*

Prohibited: No access for people with active implanted cardiac devices*

Prohibited: Do not loop cable

*In general, patients with conductive (e.g. metallic) implants are contraindicated for MR scans. Some implantable
devices have been labeled as MR Conditional under certain operating conditions. Only use quadrature transmit for
MR Conditional devices. MR Safe implants will have the MR Safe symbol in their implant documentation.
When evaluating whether to proceed with MR scanning on patients with such implants, consult the implantable
device’s labeling.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-14
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

Table 2-5: Mandatory symbols

Label Description (typical use)

Mandatory: Maintenance instructions

Mandatory: Refer to instruction manual/booklet

Mandatory: Wear ear protection

Table 2-6: Manufacturer information symbols

Label Description (typical use)

Manufacturer

Date of manufacture

Model reference

Serial number

Symbol indicates that this product is a medical device

CE - European Conformity Marking; 0197 – Notified Body designation

Authorized Representative in the European Community

Table 2-7: Patient comfort symbols

Label Description (typical use)

Patient comfort lighting

Patient comfort ventilation (fan)

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-15

Table 2-8: Environmental symbols

Label Description (typical use)

Atmospheric pressure limitation

Temperature limitation

Humidity limitation

Table 2-9: Respiratory, ECG, peripheral, and patient alert symbols

Label Description (typical use)

Figure 2-3: Type BF applied part

Patient alert port.

Figure 2-4: Type BF applied part

Peripheral gating port.

Figure 2-5: Type BF applied part

ECG leads port.

Figure 2-6: Type BF applied part

Respiratory bellows port.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-16
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

Table 2-10: MR safety symbols

Label Description (typical use)

or MR Safe

MR Conditional

MR unsafe

or Receive only coil

or Transmit/Receive coil

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-17

Table 2-11: Product identification symbols

Label Description (typical use)

Alternating current (rating plate, terminals)

Direct current (rating plate, terminals)

Three-phase alternating current

Earth (ground terminals)

Protective earth (ground terminals)

Equipotentiality (terminals)

Dangerous voltage (components, points of entry)

Main power on (main disconnect/power switch)

Main power off (main disconnect/power switch)

Power on (only for a part of equipment)

Power off (only for a part of equipment)

Emergency off (system power)

Emergency stop

Class II equipment (double insulated) (ratings)

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-18
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

Label Description (typical use)

Type B Applied Part (ratings, AP connections)

Type BF Applied Part

Non-ionizing electromagnetic radiation (ratings)

Consult operator manual

Attention – Consult accompanying documents

CAUTION – Static Sensitive (Electrostatic discharge (ESD) susceptible parts)

Laser Radiation (laser devices)

Table mass in Kg. including table safe working load

Table 2-12: Environmental packaging symbols

Symbol Description

This way up.

Keep away from rain.

Fragile, handle with care.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-19

IN TRO DUCTIO N

User Training
GE provides a purchasable training program in Milwaukee for new system operators. You may arrange to participate
through your local sales representative. In addition, GE provides purchasable on-site training by an MR Applications
Specialist. GE advises that anyone who operates the system should attend this session after reading the Operator
Manual and related training materials.
GE strongly recommends that physicians who prescribe studies and review images on the MR system, attend at least
two full days of professional meetings dealing with MR imaging each year. Such meetings include the Radiological
Society of North America (RSNA), the Society for Magnetic Resonance in Medicine (SMRM) and the American
Roentgen Ray Society (ARRS). In addition, MR system user groups present symposia and workshops throughout the
year that provide additional learning opportunities.
The healthcare facility is responsible for training outside emergency personnel (e.g., fire department and other
outside emergency personnel) not to bring any ferrous fire-fighting equipment, including axes, ferrous stretchers, or
oxygen tanks into the magnet room. Be sure to show such outside emergency personnel where the Emergency
Magnet Rundown switch is located.
MR workers shall be adequately trained to minimize health effects of high static magnetic field as described above.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-20
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

SAF ETY STAN DARDS

MR safety standards introduction

In most countries the MR safety standard IEC 60601-2-33 provides safety limits for MR exams, for ventilation, and for
occupational exposure of MR workers. The International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) developed a widely-used
MR safety standard. The IEC MR safety standard is three-tiered. The NORMAL OPERATING MODE is for routine
scanning of patients. The operator must take a deliberate action (usually an ACCEPT button) to enter the FIRST
CONTROLLED OPERATING MODE. This mode provides higher scanner performance, but requires monitoring of the
patient. Finally, there is a SECOND CONTROLLED OPERATING MODE used only for research purposes under limits
controlled by an Investigational Review Board (IRB).
The scanner employs a whole body gradient system whose IEC 60601-2-33 compliance volume is:

a cylinder with axis coinciding with the magnet axis and with a radius of 0.20 meters, for cylindrical magnets,
or
a volume bound by planes parallel to the magnet poles and separated by a distance of 0.40 meters, for
vertical-field magnets.
Table 2-13: IEC safety limits

Maximum
allowed spe- Local
Whole Local Short dB/dt (%
Operating cific Head SAR Partial body SAR extremity
body SAR head/trunk term SAR mean
mode absorbed (W/Kg) (W/Kg) SAR
(W/Kg) SAR (W/Kg) (W/Kg) PNS)
energy per (W/Kg)
MR Exam
14.4 kj/kg
IEC Normal 2 x long
(240 2 3.2 10 20 80% PNS
Mode term
W⋅min/kg)
IEC 1st
14.4 kj/kg
Controlled 2 x long 100%
(240 4 3.2 10 20
Operating term PNS
W⋅min/kg)
Mode
IEC 2nd
14.4 kj/kg
Controlled
(240 IRB Limit IRB Limit IRB Limit IRB Limit IRB Limit IRB Limit IRB Limit
Operating
W⋅min/kg)
Mode
Local SAR is averaged over the worst-case 10 g. Short term SAR is averaged over 10 s. SAR limits are reduced if
temperature can exceeds 24 degrees C or if humidity exceeds 60%. Hearing protection (only earplugs have been
validated) with NRR >/= 29 dB to reduce the A-weighted root-mean-squared sound pressure level below 99 dB(A)
shall be used. IEC 60601-1 limits surface contact temperatures to 41 degrees C.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-21

SAF ETY STAN DARDS

IEC EMC compliance

Per IEC 60601-1-2, Medical Electrical Equipment needs special precautions regarding Electromagnetic Compatibility
(EMC) and needs to be installed and put into service according to the EMC information provided in the following
tables. The tables below provide details about the level of compliance and provide information about potential
interactions between devices.
Portable and mobile RF communications equipment can affect Medical Electrical Equipment.

WARNING
The MR System may be interfered with by other equipment, even if that other equipment complies with
CISPR EMISSION requirements.

WARNING
The MR System should not be used adjacent to or stacked with other equipment; if adjacent or stacked use is
necessary, the MR System should be observed in order to verify normal operation in the configuration in
which it will be used.

WARNING
The MR System should be used only in a shielded location named as the Magnet Room. Magnetic and RF
Shielded Room requirements are defined in the Preinstallation Manual.

WARNING
The use of accessories, transducers and cables other than those specified, with the exception of transducers
and cables sold by GE or replacement parts for internal components, may result in increased emissions or
decreased immunity of the MR system.
Adhering to the recommendations provided herein for the interaction of the MR System with other electrical devices
within the electromagnetic environment may not eliminate all the disturbances.
The MR system has no essential performance per IEC 60601 standards, however, the MR system will maintain its
critical functions by continuing to acquire, display, and store scanning images safely.
The MR system complies with emissions limits (Group 2, Class A) Medical devices as stated in IEC 60601-1-2.
Table 2-14: Guidance And Manufacturer’s Declaration – Electromagnetic Emissions

The MR System is intended for use in a typical health care electromagnetic environment specified
below. The customer or the user of the MR System should assure that it is used in such an
environment.
Emissions Test Compliance Level Electromagnetic Environment - Guidance
The MR system must emit electromagnetic
energy in order to perform its intended
RF emissions CISPR 11 Group 2
function. Nearby electronic equipment may
be affected.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-22
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

The MR System is intended for use in a typical health care electromagnetic environment specified
below. The customer or the user of the MR System should assure that it is used in such an
environment.
Emissions Test Compliance Level Electromagnetic Environment - Guidance
RF emissions CISPR 11 Class A The MR system is suitable for use in all
Harmonic emissions IEC establishments other than domestic and
Not Applicable
61000-3-2 those directly connected to the public low-
Voltage fluctuations/flicker voltage power supply network that supplies
Not Applicable buildings used for domestic purposes.
emissions IEC 61000-3-3
NOTE: The emissions characteristics of this equipment make it suitable for use in industrial areas and hos-
pitals (CISPR 11 class A). If it is used in a residential environment (for which CISPR 11 class B is normally
required) this equipment might not offer adequate protection to radio-frequency communication services.
The user might need to take mitigation measures, such as relocating or re-orienting the equipment.

Table 2-15: Guidance And Manufacturer’s Declaration – Electromagnetic Immunity

The MR System is intended for use in a typical health care electromagnetic environment specified
below. The customer or the user of the MR System should assure that it is used in such an
environment.
IEC 60601-1-2 Test Electromagnetic Environment –
Immunity Test Compliance Level
Level Guidance
Floors should be wood, concrete or
Electrostatic ±8 kV contact ±8 kV contact ceramic tile. If floors are covered
discharge (ESD) IEC
±15 kV air ±15 kV air with synthetic material, the relative
61000-4-2
humidity should be at least 30%.
±2 kV for power ±2 kV for power
Electrical fast supply lines supply lines ±1 kV for Mains power quality should be that
transient/burst IEC of a typical commercial or hospital
61000-4-4 ±1 kV for input/output input/output lines environment.
lines
±0.5 kV, ±1 kV ±0.51 kV, ±1 kV
Line to line Line to line Mains power quality should be that
Surge IEC 61000-4-5 of a typical commercial or hospital
±0.5, ±1 kV, ±2 kV ±0.5, ±1 kV, ±2 kV environment.
Line to ground Line to ground
U t = 0%, 0.5 cycle (0,
45, 90, 135, 180, 225, Mains power quality should be that
Voltage dips IEC 270, and 315 degrees) of a typical commercial or hospital
U t = 0%, 1 cycle Not applicable environment. If the user of the MR
61000-4-11
System requires continued
U t = 70%, 25/30
operation during power mains
cycles (0 degrees)
interruptions, it is recommended
Short interruptions that the MR System be powered
and voltage variations U t = 0%, 250/300 U t = 0%, 250/300 from an uninterruptible power
on power supply input cycles cycles supply.
lines IEC 61000-4-11
Power frequency 30 A/m 30 A/m Power frequency magnetic fields
(50/60 Hz) magnetic 50 Hz or 60 Hz 50 Hz or 60 Hz should be at levels characteristic of

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-23

The MR System is intended for use in a typical health care electromagnetic environment specified
below. The customer or the user of the MR System should assure that it is used in such an
environment.
IEC 60601-1-2 Test Electromagnetic Environment –
Immunity Test Compliance Level
Level Guidance
a typical location in a typical
field IEC 61000-4-8 commercial or hospital
environment.
Portable and mobile RF
communications equipment should
not be used closer to any part of
the equipment, including cables,
than the recommended separation
distance calculated from the
3 Vrms 3 Vrms equation applicable to the
150 kHz to 80 MHz 150 kHz to 80 MHz frequency of the transmitter.
Conducted RF IEC
6 Vrms 6 Vrms Recommended separation
61000-4-6 distance.
150 kHz to 80 MHz at 150 kHz to 80 MHz at
ISM bandsa ISM bands d = 1.2 √P 150 kHz to 80 MHz
d = 1.2 √P 80 MHz to 800 MHz.
d = 2.3 √P 800 MHz to 2.7 GHz
where P is the maximum output
power rating of the transmitter in
watts (W) according to the
transmitter manufacturer, and d is
the recommended separation
distance in meters (m).
Field strengths from fixed RF
transmitters, as determined by an
electromagnetic site
surveyc should be less than the
Radiated RF 3 V/mb 3 V/m
compliance level in each frequency
IEC 61000-4-3 80 MHz to 2.7GHz 80 MHz to 2.7GHz ranged.
Interference may occur in the
vicinity of equipment marked with
the following symbol:

NOTE U t is the AC mains voltage prior to application of the test level.

a The ISM (industrial, scientific and medical) bands between 0.15 MHz and 80 MHz are 6.765 MHz to
6.795MHz; 13.553 MHz to 13.567 MHz; 26.957 MHz to 27.283 MHz; and 40.66 MHz to 40.70 MHz.
b For more information, see section Proximity field immunity compliance.
c Field strengths from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular/cordless) telephones and
land mobile radio, AM and FM radio broadcast, and TV broadcast cannot be predicted theoretically with
accuracy. To assess the electromagnetic environment due to fixed RF transmitters, an electromagnetic site
survey should be considered. If the measured field strength in the location in which the MR equipment is
used exceeds the applicable RF compliance level above, the equipment should be observed to verify

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-24
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

Table 2-16: Recommended Separation Distances between portable and mobile RF communications equipment and the MR system

The MR System is intended for use in an electromagnetic environment in which radiated RF

disturbances are controlled. The customer or the user of the MR System can help prevent
electromagnetic interference by maintaining a minimum distance between portable and mobile RF
communications equipment (transmitters) and the MR System as recommended below, according to
the maximum output power of the communications equipment.
Rated maximum output Separation distance according to frequency of transmitter stated in meters
power of transmitter W 150 kHz to 80 MHz 80 MHz to 800 MHz 800 MHz to 2.7GHz
d = 1.2 √P d = 1.2 √P d = 2.3 √P
0.01 0.12 0.12 0.23
0.1 0.37 0.37 0.74
1 1.17 1.17 2.33
10 3.69 3.69 7.38
100 11.67 11.67 23.33
For transmitters rated at a maximum output power not listed above, the recommended separation
distance d in meters (m) can be estimated using the equation applicable to the frequency of the
transmitter, where P is the maximum output power rating of the transmitter in watts (W) according to the
transmitter manufacturer.
NOTE 1 At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the separation distance for the higher frequency range applies.
NOTE 2 These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by
absorption and reflection from structures, objects and people.

Table 2-17: Proximity field immunity compliance

The MR System is intended for use in a typical health care electromagnetic environment specified below. The
customer or the user of the MR System should assure that it is used in such an environment.
Test Immunity com- Immunity
Maximum Distance
Frequency Band [MHz] Service Modulation pliance level test level
power [w] [m]
[MHz] [V/m] [V/m]
Pulse
385 380 ~ 390 TETRA 400 Modulation 1.8 0.3 27 27
18 Hz
GMRS 460, FM ±5 kHz
450 430 ~ 470 2 0.3 28 28
FRS 460 deviation

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-25

The MR System is intended for use in a typical health care electromagnetic environment specified below. The
customer or the user of the MR System should assure that it is used in such an environment.
Test Immunity com- Immunity
Maximum Distance
Frequency Band [MHz] Service Modulation pliance level test level
power [w] [m]
[MHz] [V/m] [V/m]
1 kHz sine
710 LTE Band Pulse
745 704 ~ 787 13, Modulation 0.2 0.3 9 9
780 17 217 Hz

GSM
810
800/900,
TETRA 800, Pulse
870 800 ~ 960 Modulation 2 0.3 28 28
iDEN 820,
18 Hz
CDMA 850,
930
LTE Band 5
GSM 1800;
1720
CDMA 1900;
GSM 1900; Pulse
1845 1700 ~ 1990 DECT; Modulation 2 0.3 28 28
LTE Band 1, 217 Hz
3,
1970
4, 25; UMTS
Bluetooth,
WLAN,
Pulse
802.11 Modulation
2450 2400 ~ 2570 2 0.3 28 28
b/g/n,
217 Hz
RFID 2450,
LTE Band 7
5240 WLAN Pulse
5500 5100 ~ 5800 802.11 Modulation 0.2 0.3 9 9
5785 a/n 217 Hz

Note: The distance values represent the recommended separation distance between interfering equipment and
components of the MR system.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-26
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

SAF ETY STAN DARDS

Temperature and humidity specifications

System Suite
Use the specifications listed in Table 2-18 for designing your HVAC (heating, ventilation, and air conditioning) system.
Proper insulation and moisture barrier should be installed within the environmental controlled space (e.g. area above
drop ceiling) for humidity, condensation, and temperature control.

To help prevent a patient from feeling uncomfortably warm during a scan, make sure the magnet room
temperature does not exceed 69.8.F (21.C) maximum. If the scan room temperature exceeds 72.14°F (22.3°C), then
the SAR is automatically derated, which means that the current scan parameters may trip the SAR monitor.
Table 2-18: Temperature and humidity specifications

Temperature Humidity
Area Change °F/Hr
Range °F (°C) Range% Change%/Hr
(°C/Hr)
Equipment Room at Inlet to Equipment 59-89.6* (15-32)* 5 (3)* 30-75* 5
Magnet Room 59-69.8 (15-21) 5 (3) 30-60* 5
Operator's Control Room 59-89.6* (15-32)* 5 (3) 30-75* 5
Note
* Non-condensing humidity with 50% nominal at 65.F (18.3.C).

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-27

SAF ETY STAN DARDS

Transportation and storage

Use the specifications listed in the table for transportation and storage of your MR system.
Table 2-19: SIGNA Premier transportation and storage

Temperature Temperature
Relative Humidity
System range: change:
humidity: change:
equipment °F °F/Hour
% non-condensing %/Hour
(°C) (°C/Hour)
Electronic cabinets -22 to 140
10-80
and equipment (-30 to 60)
-22 to 140 68
Resonance module 10-80 30
(-30 to 60) (20)
-22 to 122
Surface coil 10-95
(-30 to 50)

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-28
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

MAGN ETIC F IEL DS

Magnetic field basics introduction

Though it is generally accepted that no published evidence exists supporting cumulative or long-term negative effects
of EMF1 exposure, it is advisable for pregnant MR workers to exercise extra precaution in limiting their exposure as
much as possible. Health effects increase with increasing magnetic field strength. The existence of local regulations
establishing upper limits for MR workers may not apply to pregnant MR workers, although no epidemiological
evidence exists supporting negative effects of EMF exposure on the health of a pregnant worker or her fetus. The
User is responsible for determining whether local or country legislation may exist establishing occupational limits for
exposure to EMF. If such limits exist it is the User’s responsibility to ensure they are being observed.
To ensure safe operation of your system, for both you and your patient, you must understand several components of
your MR system. Your MR system includes the following magnetic fields:

Static Magnetic Field (the magnet)

Gradient Magnetic Fields (the gradients)
Electromagnetic Fields (the RF)

The following definitions are used throughout Magnetic Field Basics section. Not all modes of operation apply to all
GEHC MR scanners.

Normal Operating Mode (Clinical Mode): mode of operation of the MR equipment in which none of the
outputs have a value that may cause physiological stress to patients.
First Level Controlled Operating Mode: mode of operation of the MR equipment in which one or more
outputs reach a value that may cause physiological stress to patients, which needs to be controlled by
medical supervision.
Second Level Controlled Operating Mode: mode of operation of the MR equipment in which one or
more outputs reach a value that may produce significant risk for patients, for which explicit
ethical approval is required (i.e., a human studies protocol approved to local requirements).

1Electro Magnetic Field

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-29

MAGN ETIC F IEL DS

Static magnetic fields

The main magnet is a stable and very intense magnetic field.

Note that the MR magnet is always on even when the system is not acquiring scan data. The only exception to
this is if service has ramped down the magnet or it has been quenched.
The main safety issues regarding the static magnetic field include the potential for biological effects, the potential for
attraction of ferromagnetic objects, and the potential for a quench of the cryogens.
The MR system static magnetic field may be classified under several modes:

Normal: the normal operating mode, admissible for all individuals.

First Level: controlled operating mode, admissible for patients on whom a medical decision was made
ensuring they can handle the increased physiological stress.
Second Level: controlled operating mode, approval of an IRB or Human Ethical Committee required, with the
static field limit explicitly stated.
Table 2-20: Static magnetic field

Mode System
> 2T </= 4T for First Level Mode 3.0T
> 4T for Second Level Mode N/A
The magnetic field of a 3.0T system is classified in normal controlled operating mode.
A magnet produces invisible lines of force that extend beyond the magnet that are called the fringe field. The size of
the fringe field depends on the strength of the magnet and whether or not it is shielded. Active and inactive shielding
are used to reduce or tighten the fringe field.
Figure 2-7: Fringe field

CAUTION
For some patients or MR workers, rapid movement of the head while in the magnetic field may cause
dizziness, vertigo, or a metallic taste in their mouth. None of these motion effects are considered to be
hazardous, provided they do not cause the worker to fall.
It is recommended that the patient and the MR worker endeavor to remain still while in the region of high
static magnetic field. The MR worker should always vacate the area of the static magnetic field when duties
do not require otherwise.
The tesla to gauss conversion is 1 tesla = 10,000 Gauss.
The magnetic field exerts force on susceptible materials and biomedical implants and can create hazards. There are
two critical zones: the Security Zone and the Exclusion Zone. Each zone has specific restrictions regarding people and
materials.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-30
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

WARNING
It is your responsibility to ensure permanent creation of the Security Zone and the Exclusion Zone and to
establish rules for access. Ensure occupational exposure to static magnetic field complies with local
requirements.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-31

MAGN ETIC F IEL DS

Security zone
The Security Zone is the magnet room and the walls of the magnet room.
Figure 2-8: Security Zone

Table 2-21: Image legend

# Description
1 Magnet room
2 Room length = 21 feet (6.4 m)
3 Room width = 13 feet (3.96 m)
Static magnetic field plots for siting (rule of thumb - assumes no ferromagnetic materials) may be found at:
https://www.gehealthcare.com/support/site-planning

NOTE: The figure above states the approximate minimum room size for your MR system. Consult your GE System
Pre-Installation Manual for specific dimensions of your system and additional magnetic field plot information.

Consult your GE System Pre-Installation Manual for specific dimensions of your system and additional magnetic field
plot information.

IMPORTANT!: You need to understand the meanings of ferromagnetic and ferrous substances or items:

A substance that is ferromagnetic has a large positive magnetic susceptibility. (Example: Iron.)
An item that is ferrous can posses intrinsic magnetic fields and react strongly in an applied magnetic field.
(Examples: Iron, nickel, and cobalt.)

The attractive force of the magnetic field in the Security Zone can cause ferromagnetic items to become projectiles
and contraindicated biomedical implants to fail. In short, ferromagnetic items and contraindicated biomedical
implants are NOT allowed in the Security Zone.

The MR System operates with a highly sensitive RF receiving front end to be able to capture the signal of an object
scanned. The Magnet Room part of the MR System installation provides the RF isolation to reduce the interference
from electrical devices outside the shielded location.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-32
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

It is possible that any device that functions with active electronic circuitry may potentially interfere the operation of
the MR System if such device is introduced inside the Magnet Room even though the device does not have an
intentional RF Transmitter. Extreme EMC measures must be taken into account in the design and manufacturing of
an electrical device if such device is intended to operate inside the Magnet Room.

A device that may potentially interfere the MR System if introduced inside the Magnet Room are those containing
active electronics. Some examples include: Switching Mode Power Supply (SMPS), microprocessor, Digital Signal
Processors, analog to digital converters, LCD displays, keypad controllers, motors, battery operated devices.

WARNING
The Security Zone warning sign must be posted on the entrance to the magnet room to alert personnel to
the high magnetic field and warn not to bring ferromagnetic objects into the magnet room.

WARNING
Ensure that the Security Zone complies with your local statutory requirements.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-33

Security Zone Warning sign

The Security Zone Warning Sign alerts personnel and patients of the following:

Strong magnetic field

Hearing protection: During a scan, all persons in the scan room are required to wear hearing protection to
avoid possible hearing impairment.
No pacemakers*
No neurostimulators*
No conductive/metallic implants*
Persons with pacemakers, neurostimulators or metallic implants must not enter this area. Serious injury
may result.
No loose metal objects: Iron, steel and other ferrous material must not be taken into this area. Serious injury
or property damage may result.
Risk of non-ionizing radiation: If a scan is performed with the magnet room open.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-34
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

Figure 2-9: Security zone warning sign

Your system may have a slight variation of this sign.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-35

3.0T Security Zone warning sign

3.0T magnets have a specialized Security Zone warning sign to distinguish the 3.0T magnet from a lower magnetic
field.
The Security Zone Warning Sign for 3.0T magnets alerts personnel and patients of the following:

Strong magnetic field

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-36
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

Figure 2-10: Security zone warning sign for 3.0T magnets

Your system may have a slight variation of this sign.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-37

MAGN ETIC F IEL DS

Exclusion zone
The Exclusion Zone begins at the 5-gauss line. Magnetic shielding may, however, restrict the 5-gauss line to the
magnet room, making the security and the exclusion zone the same.
Figure 2-11: Exclusion Zone, 1 = 5 gauss line

Static magnetic field plots for siting (rule of thumb - assumes no ferromagnetic materials) may be found at:
https://www.gehealthcare.com/support/site-planning
All personnel should be aware of the gauss line and actively screen the changing conditions of the environment.
There are gauss lines and equipment that must remain outside certain limits. Consult your GE Service Engineer to
know where these gauss lines are located in your facility.

WARNING
The Exclusion Zone warning sign must be posted at the 5 gauss boundary. Locate and read the Exclusion
Zone signs at your facility.

Exclusion Zone Warning sign

The Exclusion Zone Warning Sign alerts personnel and patients of the following:

Strong magnetic field

No pacemakers*
No neurostimulators*
No conductive/metallic implants*
Persons with pacemakers, neurostimulators or metallic implants must not enter this area. Serious injury
may result.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-38
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

Figure 2-12: Exclusion zone warning sign

Your system may have a slight variation of this sign.

WARNING
Ensure that the Exclusion Zone complies with your local statutory requirements.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-39

MAGN ETIC F IEL DS

Biological effects
The static magnetic field strengths used by your MR system are within the guidelines provided by the United States
Food and Drug Administration (FDA) for clinical imaging. However, there are several cautions that need to be
understood:

CAUTION
Minimize the time spent near the magnet. Spend only the time necessary to attend to the needs of the
patient.

CAUTION
Carefully compare the benefits of MR versus alternative procedures before scanning to control risk to the
patient. A physician should consider whether to limit scanning of pregnant or infant patients to the Normal
dB/dt and Normal SAR operating mode. It is not advisable to scan pregnant patients in the first trimester or
unknown pregnancy status as the fetus is especially sensitive to potential thermal events during the first
trimester.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-40
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

MAGN ETIC F IEL DS

Ferromagnetic objects
Ferromagnetic objects brought within close proximity of the static magnetic field can become projectiles, which could
cause harm to someone standing between the object and the magnet. The force of attraction between a magnet and
a ferromagnetic object is determined by the magnetic field strength (fringe field), the magnetic susceptibility of the
object, its mass, its distance from the magnet, and its orientation to the field.
Use only non-ferrous oxygen tanks, wheelchairs, gurneys, intravenous (IV) poles, ventilators, etc. in the magnet room.
Be sure anyone who has access to the MR suite is aware that only non-ferrous items are allowed in the magnet
room. Make them aware that policies and procedures are in place for bringing medical devices and other equipment
into the magnet room.
In addition to the projectile hazard, the static magnetic field can cause ferromagnetic objects within the patient (e.g.,
surgical clips, prostheses) to move, thus possibly causing harm. Electrically, magnetically, or mechanically activated
implants can become dysfunctional due to the static magnetic field. If these devices are life-supporting, harm could
result. For medical devices that are labeled as MR Safe or MR Conditional consult the device manufacturer's
documentation.

WARNING
The attractive force of the magnetic field of the MR system can cause ferrous objects to become projectiles
that can cause serious injury. Post the security zone warning sign on the entrance to the magnet room and
keep all hazardous objects out of the magnet room. If a ferromagnetic object has become attached to the
magnet, contact GE Service for assistance.

WARNING
To help prevent patient or operator injury, do not bring ferrous materials such as battery operated devices
into the magnet room.

WARNING
To help prevent patient or operator injury, do not bring ferrous oxygen bottles into the magnet room.

CAUTION
Common hospital equipment, which often have ferrous battery packs, such as patient monitoring, and life
supporting devices, may be adversely affected when in proximity to the magnetic field or image quality may
be affected by the presence of this equipment.

CAUTION
The only GE supplied tools recommended for use inside the Security zone are the phantoms supplied with
your system.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-41

WARNING
Electrical discharges between conductive devices and the MR coils can startle or burn the patient and
possibly cause the patient to injure himself/herself. To help avoid such reactions, do not place metal objects
(e.g., limb braces, traction mechanisms, stereotactic devices, etc.) in the MR magnet.

WARNING
The fringe field can cause injury by interfering with the normal operation of biomedical devices.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-42
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

MAGN ETIC F IEL DS

Spatial magnetic field data

MR environment safety terminology
The MR Environment Safety Terminology is intended to help explain labeling matters for medical devices and other
items that may be used in the MR environment to ensure the safe use of MR technology.
Terminology for defining the safety of items in the MR environment is provided in ASTM F2503 Standard Practice for
Marking Medical Devices and Other Items for Safety in the Magnetic Resonance Environment. FDA recommended
using the terminology MR Safe, MR Conditional, and MR Unsafe, defined in ASTM F2503 (FDA guidance document,
“Establishing Safety and Compatibility of Passive Implants in the Magnetic Resonance (MR) Environment Document”).

Definitions

MR Conditional:

Maximum Static Magnet Field: 3.0 Tesla

Maximum Spatial Gradient:
Transmitter 3,800 [G/cm] (38 [T/m])
Maximum Whole Body Average SAR:
4W/kg for 60 minutes of scanning produces a temperature of less than 41 Centigrade

Note that the signal from this device may be visible in the images.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-43

Magnet information
The peak main magnetic field (B0), peak gradient of the main magnetic field (grad(B0)), and the peak force product
(main magnetic field times the peak gradient of the main magnet field [B0 grad(B0)]) and their spatial locations are
provided in cylindrical coordinates with centers at magnet isocenter.

Note that peak accessible values typically occur (see figure below) at or near the magnet covers (shroud) in a
patient accessible area. To find the magnet type used with your system, contact your GE field service engineer.

Definitions
Peak main magnetic field (B0), maximum magnetic field magnitude at patient accessible locations.

For solenoid magnets these values typically lie on circles with radius R from the axis of the magnet on both
the front and the back of the magnet at ±Z from isocenter.

Peak gradient of the main magnetic field (grad(B0)).

The peak gradient of the static magnetic field, B0, is the maximum rate of change of the main magnetic field
magnitude along any direction at a patient accessible location. For solenoid magnets these values typically lie
on circles with (see table and figure below) radius R from the axis of the magnet on both the front and the
back covers of the magnet at ± Z from isocenter.

Note that the strength of time-varying gradients are small and not relevant to magnetic force considerations.

Peak force product (B0 grad(B0)).

The peak force product is the maximum product of B0 and grad(B0) at accessible locations. Note that
maximum forces and torques will occur at this location. Only values in a patient accessible area with magnet

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-44
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

covers in place are given in the table below. For solenoid magnets (see figure below) these values typically lie
on circles with radius R from the axis of the magnet on both the front and the back of the magnet at ± Z from
isocenter.

Locations

Defined in cylindrical coordinates, (Z, R) with (Z=0, R=0) being magnet isocenter apply to both the front and
back of the magnet (see table and figure below). For solenoid magnets the same maximum values occur at R,
± Z for all angles, i.e., the same peak values form a circle with radius R at ±Z.

Translational Force

Force acting to move the center of mass of an object. Ferromagnetic objects in non-uniform magnetic fields
experience translational forces.

Torque

A pair of opposite forces some distance apart acting to rotate an object without changing the position of the
center of mass. Asymmetrically-shaped ferromagnetic objects (such as needle-shaped objects) experience
torques in magnetic fields.
Figure 2-13: Magnet location of fringe-field maximum. Spatial locations of peak fields accessible to patients. The origin of the cylindrical coordinates
is magnet isocenter. Cylindrical coordinates locate points a radius R from the magnet axis (centerline) and a distance z from isocenter on axis.

Table 2-22: Image legend

# Description
1 Side cut-away view of magnet.
2 Front view of magnet.
3 Cylindrical magnet and cover (shroud).
Peak B
Peak grad (B)
Peak B* grad (B)
4 Typically, peak B, peak grad (B), and peak B*grad(B) are close to the magnet covers in a patient
accessible area and are symmetric for rotations about the long axis of the magnet (equal fields for
(Z,R) along a circle centered on axis). The peak values are in the shaded regions. Specific locations
(R.Z) are identified in table below.
5 Patient bore.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-45

Spatial Magnetic Field

Maximum forces and torques on ferromagnetic objects depend on the force product.

Forces and Torques

Spheres of uniform ferromagnetic material experience translational forces near magnets, but no torque.

Asymmetric ferromagnetic objects (for example long cylinders) may experience both translational forces and
torques. For such objects the translational force can be orders of magnitude lower than those related to
torque.
Magnetic translational force depends on the force product (B0 grad(B0)) with the maximum force occurring
for the maximum force product.
Torques increase rapidly with (B0 )2 and depend on angle from B0 and shape of object.
MR compatibility investigators have reported the maximum static magnetic fringe field gradient in the past as
a safety criterion. For each maximum the maximum values, the spatial locations (cylindrical coordinates
(Z,R)), and the values of the other (typically non-maximum) parameters are given below for GE magnets.

The table below contains coordinates for and values of maximum B0, maximum grad(B0), and maximum B0(grad(B0)).
MR compatibility investigators have reported the maximum static magnetic fringe field gradient in the past as a
criterion for MR compatibility though the force product actually determines translational force on ferromagnetic
objects. The maximum field values (shown with red borders), the spatial locations (in cylindrical coordinates (z,R)),
and the values of the other (typically non-maximum) parameters are given below for GE magnets

Useful unit conversions

1 T/m = 100 G/cm

1 G/cm = 0.01 T/m
1 T2/m = 106 G2/cm
1 G2/cm = 10-6 T2/m

Peak static spatial gradients on patient accessible areas table

See figure above for explanation of R and Z. If you are not sure of your system configuration, consult your service
engineer.

Enclosure
Figure 2-14: SIGNA Premier magnet cover

Figure 2-15: 3.0T enclosure peak static spatial gradients on patient accessible areas (3TLC magnet)

Patient bore Radial Location Grad(B) max(B)*grad(B)

Magnet type Parameter B(T)
type Location R(m) along Z(m) (T/m) (T^2/m)
Peak B 0.36 0.64 3.5 7.6 27.1
70 HRMw
3TLC Peak Gradient 0.47 0.91 1.8 11.3 19.9
(Super G)
Peak Product 0.36 0.74 3.3 9.7 32.1

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-46
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

Figure 2-16: 3.0T enclosure peak static spatial gradients on patient accessible areas (G3 magnet)

Patient bore Radial Location Grad(B) max(B)*grad(B)

Magnet type Parameter B(T)
type Location R(m) along Z(m) (T/m) (T^2/m)
Peak B 0.36 0.64 3.5 7.3 25.6
70 HRMw
G3 Peak Gradient 0.47 0.91 1.9 11.4 21.2
(Super G)
Peak Product 0.36 0.74 3.2 9.5 30.9

Magnetic Field Plots

Static magnetic field plots for siting (rule of thumb - assumes no ferromagnetic materials) may be found at:
https://www.gehealthcare.com/support/site-planning
Coordinate system for field and gradient where Z is in the B0 direction, R is the radius, and the origin is isocenter.
The following figures represent the contour map for the static magnetic field (B0) from the MR system at positions
accessible to the MR worker.
Figure 2-17: Contour map of the static magnetic field (B0) for an 3.0T 3TLC magnet. View from above magnet with a 25 cm grid overlaid

Figure 2-18: Countour map of the static magnetic field (B0) for a 3.0T G3 magnet. View from above magnet with a 25 cm grid overlaid.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-47

MAGN ETIC F IEL DS

Understanding spatial gradients

This information is provided to assist in understanding spatial gradients. This information should be used together
with the information in the safety manuals for your system.

What does a magnet's B0 field look like?

What is the spatial gradient?
How do I know where a given spatial gradient value occurs?
What are the spatial gradients differences between 1.5T and 3.0T systems?
What are the spatial gradients differences between 60 cm and 70 cm bores?
3.0T wide bore MR systems

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-48
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

MAGN ETIC F IEL DS

The B0 field
When we speak of an MRI magnet “field” we usually mean the main magnetic field, or B0 field. The center of a 1.5T
magnet has a B0 field of 1.5 Tesla, or 15,000 Gauss. The B0 field decreases rapidly as you move away from the bore;
at 2 meters from isocenter, this field is down to several percent of the field at isocenter.
The shape of the B0 field approximately matches that of the magnet and (typically) the enclosures encapsulating it.
The cylindrical magnets used in MRI create a roughly barrel shaped field outside the magnet. Figure 2-19 shows two
isocontours (surfaces of constant magnetic field strength) for a typical 1.5T magnet’s B0 field. The green surface
shows where the field strength is 300 G, which is 2% of the field at center. The blue surface is 1200 G, or 8%. (One
quadrant is removed for clarity.)
A contour map, or contour plot, is a two dimensional diagram of a slice through this 3D field. Figure 2-20 shows the
same field as Figure 2-19 – translated into a contour map. The map shows the field contours on a horizontal plane
through the center of the magnet. The 300 and 1200 G contours are shown along with several others (100, 600, 3000,
and 10000 G). You can see how the contour shapes match between the two figures.
It is important to understand and remember that the magnet’s field is in three dimensions, shaped roughly like the
magnet, and that the contour maps commonly used are two dimensional representations of the actual field.
Figure 2-19: Two isocontours for the B0 field for a 1.5T magnet.

Table 2-23: Image legend

# Description
1 300 G surface
2 1200 G surface
3 Magnet
4 B0 field

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-49

Figure 2-20: A contour map, showing the field contours on a plane through the center of the magnet (1)

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-50
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

MAGN ETIC F IEL DS

Spatial gradient
The spatial gradient, or SG, of the B0 field gets a lot of attention because it is part of what affects objects susceptible
to magnetic fields. Spatial gradients are typically given as G/cm or T/m. (100G/cm = 1 T/m.)
The spatial gradient is defined as how the B0 field changes with location: if the strength of the B0 field changes by
500 G between two locations 1 cm apart, the spatial gradient is 500 G/cm between those two points.
The shape of the SG field is quite different from the shape of B0. Like the B0 field, the spatial gradient’s shape is a
symmetrical, three dimensional field that follows the cylindrical shape of the magnet. Figure 2-21 shows two spatial
gradient isocontours for a 1.5T magnet. The green surface is at 400 G/cm. The blue is a higher spatial gradient at 700
G/cm. (The spatial gradient is the same at the front and back of the magnet – the back isocontours are removed for
clarity in this figure.)
Figure 2-22 is a spatial gradient contour map (again, a two dimensional slice through the three dimensional field)
shows the 700 and 400 G/cm contours. The contours are symmetrical around the centerline of the magnet, both
side-to-side and end-to-end. Contours at 20, 100, and 250 are added, and they show three important behaviors of
the spatial gradient field:

1. The SG is greatest near the ends of the magnet, and decreases both further from the magnet and near the
center of the magnet.
2. The isocontour shape leaves a circular opening at the mouth of the magnet. The opening size increases with
the value of the SG. The opening in the blue 700 G/cm isocontour is larger than the green 400 G/cm
isocontour.
3. Although the center of the magnet has very low spatial gradients, there is no way to get there without passing
through higher spatial gradient regions. In this example, the spatial gradient reaches at least 250 G/cm on the
way into the magnet.
Figure 2-21: Two isocontours of the spatial gradient for a 1.5T magnet

Table 2-24: Image legend

# Description
1 400 G/cm surface
2 700 G/cm surface

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-51

# Description
3 Magnet
4 B0 field

Figure 2-22: A contour map of the spatial gradient for an 1.5T magnet (1)

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-52
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

MAGN ETIC F IEL DS

Locations of spatial gradient occurrences

A clear understanding of the spatial gradient inside the bore is useful. In general, spatial gradients “reach into the
bore” near the mouth of the magnet. A higher SG reaches less into the bore than a lower one. Figure 2-23 (again a
typical 1.5T magnet) gives some insight. In this example, two spatial gradient contours are compared: 320 and 400
G/cm. The 320 contours reach into the bore far enough to leave a 28 cm gap. The 400 G/cm contours leave a 48 cm
gap.
Given the three dimensional shape of the field, these gaps translates into a circular opening, centered on the
magnet’s z axis; when extended along the z-axis, this circle becomes a cylinder, centered in the bore. Staying within
this cylinder assures that you stay away from a high spatial gradient. In this example, staying within a 28 cm
diameter cylinder keeps the spatial gradient below 320 G/cm.
Rather than trying to visualize a cylinder, it may be easier to think of staying a certain distance away from the bore
wall. Example: for a 70 cm system and a 48 cm gap, this distance is 11 cm, as shown below.
Figure 2-23: The spatial gradient near the mouth of a 1.5T magnet

Table 2-25: Image legend

# Description
1 Spatial gradient (G/cm) (blue lines)
2 Bore wall (green lines)
3 11 cm from 70 cm bore wall

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-53

# Description
4 70 cm bore diameter
5 48 cm gap at 400 G/cm
6 Area inside enclosures
7 28 cm gap at 320 G/cm

Thresholds
There is a lower SG threshold, below which there is no path into the center of the magnet. In this example, there is
no path into the magnet that does not pass thru the 250 G/cm contours. We can call this threshold the “entry SG.”
There is also an upper threshold where the allowable cylinder is the same size as the bore. In this example, the 800
G/cm contour has at least a 70 cm gap. The tapers near the ends of the bore still require care.

Summary
l There is a lower SG threshold, below which there is no path to get to the center of the magnet.
l There is an upper SG threshold, above which the bore diameter limits the SG exposure.
l Between these thresholds, SG values can be limited by staying within a cylinder, whose diameter increases as
the SG values increases.

Outside the bore

Outside of the bore, the spatial gradient exposure can be limited by staying at least a certain distance away from the
magnet this is distance A in Figure 2-24. This can be visualized as a box around the magnet and it’s enclosures, with
the box sides offset from the enclosure’s front, back, and sides.
Since the SG drops off quickly with increasing distance from the magnet and enclosures, the distance A is generally
small compared to the space around the enclosures.
Distance A is set based on two factors:

1. All areas outside the box should have lower SG exposure than the lower SG threshold or “entry SG” described
on the previous slide.
2. The distance should be something easy to visualize and remember.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-54
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

Figure 2-24: A box enclosing all spatial gradients above the entry threshold on an example magnet. View from above magnet with a 20 cm grid
overlaid

Table 2-26: Image legend

# Description
1 Spatial gradient (G/cm) (blue lines)
2 Patient table and magnet (green lines)
In this example, the box is sized so that it encloses all the spatial gradient regions above 200 G/cm. This uses a
distance of 25 cm (almost exactly 10 inches) from the enclosures.
Everywhere outside of the box, the SG is less than 200 G/cm, which in turn is less than the entry SG threshold at the
mouth of the magnet. Therefore, the limiting case for SG exposure will always be at the mouth of the magnet, as
opposed to the box around the magnet and enclosures.

Controlling spatial gradient exposure

The ideas covered in the previous examples can be combined to give a more complete picture of how to control
spatial gradient exposure.
Figure 2-25 shows the concept of the box around the magnet, combined with the cylinder inside the bore. The right
sketch is a two dimensional diagram, looking down from above, on the plane at the center of the magnet.
The size of the box, given by distance A in Figure 2-26, does not change with the SG level. All areas outside the box
have low spatial gradient compared to the entry SG. The size of the cylinder does change with SG level. The cylinder
diameter increases as SG level increases – or put another way, the distance between the cylinder and the bore wall,
which is distance D in Figure 2-26, decreases with increasing SG level.
For a specific magnet or system, setting distances A and D define the areas that need to be avoided to keep spatial
gradient exposure below any specific level.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-55

Figure 2-25: A box around the magnet concept

Figure 2-26: Combining the box surrounding the enclosures with the cylinder through the bore

Table 2-27: Image legend

# Description
1 Spatial gradient, G/cm (blue lines

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-56
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

# Description
2 Bore wall
3 Patient table and magnet (green lines)

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-57

MAGN ETIC F IEL DS

Field strength and bore comparisons

1.5 vs 3.0T
For an example of 1.5T spatial gradient see Figure 2-27.
For an example of 3.0T spatial gradient see Figure 2-28.
Since the main magnetic field doubles between 1.5T and 3.0T, the spatial gradient of the field will approximately
double, given similar magnet designs.
Therefore, the SG exposure approximately doubles for 3.0T compared to 1.5T, for similar locations within the bore.

60 vs 70 cm
Since the magnet designs are similar for 60 cm and 70 cm scanners, the spatial gradient is similar at most locations,
relative to the center of the magnet. However, a 70 cm system has a larger bore, and can reach higher SG contours.
Therefore, the SG near the bore walls of a 70 cm system are higher than those for a 60 cm system.
This difference is approximately 20%.
Figure 2-27: Spatial gradients for a 1.5T magnet

Table 2-28: Image legend

# Description
1 Spatial gradient (G/cm) (blue lines)
2 Bore wall (bold green lines)
3 Area inside enclosures

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-58
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

Figure 2-28: Spatial gradients for a 3.0T magnet

Table 2-29: Image legend

# Description
1 Spatial gradient (G/cm) (blue lines)
2 Bore wall (bold green lines)
3 Area inside enclosures

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-59

MAGN ETIC F IEL DS

3.0T wide bore MR systems

For a view of the cylinder through the bore, see Figure 2-29 (below).
Distance A is the front, sides, and back of magnet = 30 cm.
Distance D is within the bore as defined in the tables below.
Figure 2-29: Combining the box surrounding the enclosures with the cylinder through the bore

Table 2-30: Image legend

# Description
1 Spatial gradient, G/cm (blue lines
2 Bore wall
3 Patient table and magnet (green lines)

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-60
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

3TLC magnet
Minimum spatial gradient at entry = 556 G/cm for 3TLC magnet.
Figure 2-30: Distance D for 3.0T 3TLC MR system:
x = Spatial gradient, G/cm
y = Distance, cm

Table 2-31: Image legend: Spatial gradient data for 3.0T 3TLC MR system

Spatial gradient (G/cm) Distance D (cm)

<556 35*
600 21.7
650 16.2
700 12.6
750 9.9
800 7.8
850 6.1
900 4.5
950 3.2
1000 2.1
1050 1.1
1100 0.3
≥1130 0
*Since this is the radius of the bore, there is no path into the bore that
does not pass through at least this spatial gradient.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-61

G3 magnet
Minimum spatial gradient at entry=498 G/cm for G3 magnet.
Figure 2-31: Distance D for G3 magnet:
x = Spatial gradient, G/cm
y = Distance, cm

Table 2-32: Image legend: Spatial gradient data for 3.0T G3 MR system

Spatial Gradient (G/cm) Distance D (cm)

498 35*
500 32.5
550 20.1
600 14.9
650 11.3
700 8.7
750 6.6
800 4.9
850 3.4
900 2.2
950 1.1
1000 0.2
≥1037 0
*Since this is the radius of the bore, there is no path into the bore that
does not pass through at least this spatial gradient.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-62
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

MAGN ETIC F IEL DS

Static spatial gradients on concentric cylinders

The static magnetic field might cause forces or torques on some devices near the magnet. The following table shows
the maximum magnetic field (B0), the spatial rate of change of the magnetic field (grad(B0)), and the product of the
magnetic fields and its rate of change (B0*grad(B0)) for infinitely long cylinders concentric with the patient bore. This
information may be of use in evaluating risk assuming patients are confined to the cylinder bounds. Note that higher
values of these parameters exist on the magnet bore covers (see above).
For example, find the peak static gradient field in the 70 cm bore for the 3.0T MR system.

First find that the maximum peak gradient on the magnet covers (from the above table) is 11.8 Tesla/m (1180
gauss/cm). This peak occurs at a radius of 0.50 m of axis and a z location 0.92 m from isocenter (typically on
the magnet covers. Some risk managers consider this information adequate for determining risk from static
spatial gradients.
Some risk managers may limit the patient to regions contained by cylinders concentric with the patient bore.
They may use the table below to find that the maximum spatial gradient in the bore is 10.7 Tesla/m (which
may be written as 1070 Gauss/cm). The peak spatial gradient in the patient bore is located on the 70 cm
cylinder surface at z = 0.77 m from isocenter. The user then evaluates the risk from the device manufacturer’s
MR Conditional Labeling, from the characteristics of the scanner, and from other information such as patient
history. In this case the static gradient is about 10% less than the maximum value on the magnet cover.
Figure 2-32: Static spatial gradients at various radii

Table 2-33: Image legend

# Description
1 Concentric cylinders
2 Magnet

Table 2-34: Concentric cylinder data table 1

Field On patient Z On 20 cm Diameter On 30cm Diameter On 40cm Diameter

magnet Item axis Cylinder surface Cylinder surface Cylinder surface
Peak R,Z (m,) Peak R,Z (m,m) Peak R,Z (m,m) Peak R,Z (m,m)
3.0T Bo (T) 3.0 (0.000,0.250) 3.0 (0.100, 3.0 (0.150,0.460) 3.0 (0.200,0.530)

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-63

Field On patient Z On 20 cm Diameter On 30cm Diameter On 40cm Diameter

magnet Item axis Cylinder surface Cylinder surface Cylinder surface
Peak R,Z (m,) Peak R,Z (m,m) Peak R,Z (m,m) Peak R,Z (m,m)
0.358)
Gradient
5.1 (0.000,0.880) 5.3 (0.100,0.880) 5.6 (0.150,0.880) 6.2 (0.200,0.845)
3TLC (T/m)
BxG (0.100,
10.6 (0.000,0.790) 11.3 12.3 (0.150,0.765) 14.0 (0.200,0.785)
(T2/m) 0.785)
(0.100,
Bo (T) 3.0 (0.000,0.225) 3.0 3.0 (0.150,0.450) 3.0 (0.200,0.535)
0.325)
Gradient (0.100,
3.0T 5.0 (0.000,0.900) 5.2 5.5 (0.150,0.880) 6.0 (0.200,0.880)
(T/m) 0.885)
G3
BxG
12.2 (0.000,0.810) 11.4 (0.100,0.789) 12.2 (0.150,0.800) 14.0 (0.200,0.805)
(T2/m)

Table 2-35: Concentric cylinder data table 2

Field Item On patient On 50cm On 55 cm On 60cm On 70cm

Magnet Z axis Diameter Diameter Diameter Diameter
Cylinder Cylinder Cylinder Cylinder surface
surface surface surface
Peak R,Z Peak R,Z Peak R,Z Peak R,Z Peak R,Z
(m,m) (m,m) (m,m) (m,m) (m,m)
Bo (T) 3.0 (0.000,0.250) 3.1 (0.250,0.580) 3.2 (0.275,0.595) 3.3 (0.300,0.610) 3.5 (0.350,0.635)
Gradient
3.0T 5.1 (0.000,0.880) 7.0 (0.250,0.845) 7.5 (0.275,0.800) 8.3 (0.300,0.825) 10.7 (0.350,0.770)
(T/m)
3TLC
BxG
10.6 (0.000,0.790) 16.9 (0.250,0.755) 18.9 (0.275,0.790) 22.4 (0.300,0.740) 31.5 (0.350,0.740)
(T2/m)
Bo (T) 3.0 (0.000,0.225) 3.1 (0.250,0.585) 3.2 (0.275,0.600) 3.2 (0.300,0.620) 3.5 (0.350,0.640)
Gradient
3.0T 5.0 (0.000,0.900) 6.7 (0.250,0.830) 7.7 (0.275,0.825) 7.9 (0.300,0.805) 10.4 (0.350,0.755)
(T/m)
G3
BxG
12.2 (0.000,0.810) 16.4 (0.250,0.800) 19.3 (0.275,0.790) 21.9 (0.300,0.765) 32.7 (0.350,0.750)
(T2/m)

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-64
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

Q U EN CH/CRY O GEN S

Quench and cryogen introduction

The following topics are related to magnet rundown, quench or cryogens.

Cryogen and quench concerns

Check cryogen levels procedure
Handle contact with liquid cryogens procedure
Magnet rundown concept
Magnet Rundown Unit test procedure
Primary magnet rundown procedure
Secondary magnet rundown procedure
Quench with vent failure procedure

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-65

Q U EN CH/CRY O GEN S

Cryogen and quench concerns

With superconductive MR systems, another concern related to the static magnetic field is a quench of the cryogens.
A superconductive magnet uses cryogens to super-cool the electrical conductor that creates the magnetic field.
Temperatures as low as -269°C (-452°F) are achieved to create the proper environment within the magnet. A
quench, which is a sudden boil-off of the entire volume of cryogenic liquid, causes a rapid loss of the static magnetic
field.

Liquid Cryogen Hazards

Cryogens come in large vacuum containers called dewars. Liquid helium is generally used for cooling purposes,
although some service procedures also require liquid nitrogen. Nitrogen dewars weigh from 400 to 500 pounds when
full. Helium dewars weigh from 700 to 800 pounds. In addition to large dewars, there may be smaller helium gas
cylinders present. This helium gas is used to fill the magnet to proper cryogen levels. Special considerations should be
observed when dealing with cryogens.

CAUTION
Leaking helium or nitrogen gas will displace oxygen. The ambient air oxygen concentration may then be
insufficient for human respiration. The limit of the air oxygen concentration should meet national laws or
regulations.

CAUTION
The following information defines the proper handling of cryogens.

l Dewars and cylinders should not be tipped or heated, nor should the valves be tampered with.
l The cryogens boil off as they cool the magnet wires and must be replenished periodically by qualified
personnel. The rate of boil-off should be monitored by checking the cryogen level meter found on the
system cabinet.
l Contact with the cryogenic liquids or gas could result in severe frostbite; care should be taken when in
proximity to these substances. The wearing of protective clothing is essential during all work in
conjunction with liquefied cryogens. Such clothing consists of

o Safety gloves
o Work gloves
o Face shield
o Laboratory coat or overalls (cotton or linen)
o Non-magnetic safety shoes

l Dewars should be stored in a well-ventilated area. Cryogens could be accidentally released in gaseous
form, resulting in an asphyxiation hazard.
l All dewars and gas cylinders must be non-magnetic.
l Gas cylinders should be stored upright and secured to the wall with a chain with the metal protective
top in place. (If a cylinder falls over or the valve is knocked off, the container may act like a rocket; a full
cylinder has enough power to penetrate walls.)
l Because the cylinder’s metal cap may be magnetic, the cap should always be removed before bringing
the cylinder into the magnet room.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-66
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

l If possible, all personnel should stay out of the magnet room when a qualified service engineer is filling
cryogens in the magnet. If personnel must be present, they must wear proper gloves, a face shield, and
ear protectors.
l A qualified service engineer should be present any time cryogens are transported within the hospital or
added to the magnet.
l It is crucial that ventilation and cryogenic systems be kept in good repair and checked regularly to ensure
proper functionality.
l Flammable materials must not be brought near the cryogen containers.
l You are responsible for establishing and following a procedure, in accordance with your local and federal
requirements (in the US: OSHA 29 CFR 1910.36), that includes possible evacuation of the MRI area, if
flammable materials are identified near cryogenic gases. If grease, oil, or other combustible material is
present in the vicinity of the containers, the escape of cryogenic gases can lead to the formation of a
potentially combustible liquid due to liquefaction of air and concentration of oxygen.

Quench vent failure hazards

LHe will transform into a gaseous phase if a vacuum breach occurs. When this happens, the normal room
temperature in the vacuum space will cause the liquid helium to quickly boil away and must be vented out of the
building. Never install a magnet to an uncompleted vent and if a vent line has a failure, do not perform any service
operations on the magnet and system.
LHe will also transform into a gaseous phase when the electrical energy stored in the magnet cryostat is released. A
rapid release of wire current is defined as a magnet quench. A quench can occur when part of the superconducting
coil enters the normal (resistive) state. When this happens, the electric current dissipates as heat and the liquid
Helium quickly boils away and must be vented out of the building.
The very cold temperatures, dynamic forces, and internal pressures produced by this expanding gas must be
accommodated by the customer supplied cryogen vent system.
Room safety is ensured when a quality and compliant cryogen vent system is connected to the GE magnet to the
customer supplied cryogen vent. The cryogen vent will allow the Helium gas to flow out of the MR scan room to
unoccupied spaces.
Cryogen management is a safety issue. All GE and Medical Device suppliers must follow IEC regulations.
Quenches are indicated by a loud noise, warning message, or the tilting of an image on the display screen. A quench is
a hazard only if the vent fails, which would result in the release of white clouds of cryogen vapor into the magnet
room. This would present a potential asphyxiation hazard to both the patient and personnel. It is critical to have a
well-planned method to quickly evacuate the patient and personnel from the magnet room should a quench occur.

WARNING
In the unlikely event of a quench and vent failure, a procedure needs to be in place to evacuate the patient
and all personnel from the magnet room. Failure to follow these precautions can result in serious injury (e.g.,
asphyxiation, frostbite, or injuries due to panic).
The table below lists the decay times in the case of a quench or the Emergency Magnet Rundown switch is activated.
Table 2-36: Example of system decay time to reach 20 mT for 3.0T systems

System Decay time (seconds)

3.0T systems 70

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-67

Q U EN CH/CRY O GEN S

Check cryogen levels procedure

Systems with a Helium Level Meter
It is very important to check and record the helium level. Sufficient helium is necessary to avoid accidental quench. If
the helium levels fall below 60%, or the level your service engineer says is acceptable, contact a service engineer
immediately.
Use this procedure to check cryogen levels.

1. Turn on the Helium Meter power switch.

This switch is located at the system cabinet.

2. Press Update on the system cabinet.

An updated reading of the helium level posts.

3. Record the percent of helium reading.

Keep a logbook to record readings daily.

It is crucial that cryogenic systems be checked regularly to be sure they are properly functioning.

4. Turn off the Helium Meter power switch when complete.

Systems with a Magnet Monitor Unit

It is very important to check and record the helium level. Sufficient helium is necessary to avoid accidental quench. If
the helium falls below 60%, or the level your service engineer says is acceptable, contact a service engineer
immediately.
Use this procedure to daily check cryogen levels of a system with a Magnet Monitor Unit.

1. Locate the magnet monitor, which is typically in the equipment room. Push the sample button on the Magnet
Monitor Unit and hold it for approximately 10 seconds.
An updated reading of the helium level posts.
2. Record the He Level value when it displays on the monitor.
The reading also toggles to the magnet pressure. Monitor any change in pressure. Normal pressure is
between 3.9psi and 4.1psi.
Keep a logbook to record readings daily.
It is crucial that cryogenic systems be checked regularly to be sure they are properly functioning.
3. If the alarm LED is illuminated, contact your service engineer.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-68
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

Q U EN CH/CRY O GEN S

Handle contact with liquid cryogens procedure

Since the cryogen gasses are odorless, tasteless, and colorless, it is particularly important to have specific
procedures in place to avoid frostbite if there is ever an accident in which the liquid or gaseous cryogen contacts
human skin. Such procedures should be established and made readily available to all personnel.
Use this procedure immediately in the unlikely event that someone comes in contact with a liquid cryogen.

1. Promptly flush the area with large volumes of tepid water.

Tepid water is 105° to 111°F or 41° to 46°C.

For cold burns, immerse affected area in tepid water for at least 15 minutes.

2. Calm the victim.

3. Avoid aggravating the injury.

Do not rub or massage the affected parts of the body.

4. Cover the area with a sterile dressing.

You may also use a clean sheet if the exposed area is large.
This protects the area from further trauma.

5. Consult a physician immediately.

Maintain the affected area at normal body temperatures until a physician arrives.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-69

Q U EN CH/CRY O GEN S

Magnet rundown concept

The Magnet Rundown operates as follows and is located inside the magnet room:

Rapid reduction of the magnetic field in about two minutes

Boil-off of cryogens, accompanied by loud hissing sound
Several days of down time to replace the cryogens
Figure 2-33: Magnet rundown unit

WARNING
The Magnet Rundown should only be used to free someone pinned to the magnet or to remove a large
ferromagnetic object captured by the magnetic field when injury to persons is imminent. A controlled magnet
rundown should be performed by a Qualified Service Engineer in non-emergency situations.

Related topics
Magnet Rundown Unit test procedure
Secondary ramp down procedure
Quench with vent failure procedure

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-70
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

Q U EN CH/CRY O GEN S

Magnet Rundown Unit test procedure

MRU type I reference number is 5196918 or 5196918-2.
Table 2-37: MRU type 1

# Description
CHARGER
1
POWER LED
BATTERY TEST
2
LED
HEATER TEST
3
LED
TEST HEATER
LED switch (for
use by
4
GE Service
Representativ
e)
TEST BATTERY
5
button
TEST HEATER
6
switch
HEATER
7 ACTUATED
LED

WARNING
If the magnet rundown unit test does not perform as described in each step, with the specified LED lighting in
each step, GE strongly recommends that you stop using the system and immediately call your Qualified
Service Representative.

Procedure
Use these steps to confirm that the MRU is connected to the magnet and operating properly by performing this test
on the MRU every week.

1. Verify that the green CHARGER POWER LED (1) is illuminated.

2. Depress and hold the TEST BATTERY button (5) for 15 seconds.
The green BATTERY TEST LED (2) illuminates and remain lit while the TEST BATTERY switch is depressed.
3. Place the TEST HEATER toggle switch (6) in the A position.
The green HEATER TEST LED (3) illuminates.

Wait at least 5 seconds before toggling the TEST HEATER switch between position A and B. Not doing so
may cause the red HEATER ACTUATED LED (7) to illuminate.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-71

4. Place the TEST HEATER toggle switch (6) in the B position.

The green HEATER TEST LED illuminates and it remains lit until the toggle is released.

WARNING
The magnet will not quench if the red HEATER ACTUATED LED illuminates due to toggling the
TEST HEATER switch. GE strongly recommends that you stop using the system and immediately call your
Qualified Service Representative if this occurs.

Related topics
Magnet rundown concept
Secondary ramp down procedure
Quench with vent failure procedure

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-72
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

Q U EN CH/CRY O GEN S

Primary magnet rundown procedure

The content in this topic applies to all magnets.
In addition to patient and equipment emergencies, magnetic field emergencies can also occur. Examples of magnetic
field emergencies include instances where the presence of the magnetic field may cause injury or harm, if someone is
pinned between the magnet and ferromagnetic object or there is a fire in the magnet scan room. All personnel
should be familiar with how to respond to magnet emergencies.

WARNING
Personal Injury or Equipment Damage
This emergency magnet rundown procedure may create dangerous situations or damage equipment.
Perform this emergency magnet rundown procedure only in emergency situations (such as when a person is
trapped between a magnetic object and the magnet).
In situations where there is no immediate threat, contact your GE Service Representative for non-
emergency rundown procedures.
Use this procedure to perform an emergency magnet rundown on your system during a magnetic field emergency.

1. Ensure all ventilation systems are on and the scan magnet room door(s) is open.
2. Follow you facility's emergency protocol and evacuate the patient and all other personnel from the scan
magnet room unless they are actively providing first aid to the entrapped person.
3. Press the Magnet Rundown button located in the scan magnet room or located remotely (if provided),
whichever is easiest to access.
Only activate the Magnet Rundown switch in an emergency situation.
This results in a rapid reduction of the magnetic field in about two minutes.
There is a boil-off of cryogens, accompanied by crackling and hissing sounds.

Notify your Qualified Service Representative that a quench occurred.

Related topics
Magnet rundown concept
Magnet Rundown Unit test procedure
Secondary ramp down procedure
Quench with vent failure procedure

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-73

Q U EN CH/CRY O GEN S

Secondary magnet rundown procedure

This secondary quench method should be attempted only after other approved methods of rundown have been
attempted and in the event of a life threatening condition. Performing this procedure will take the magnet out of
service for at least one month.

Use these steps with the Vacuum Break Tool to break the magnet vacuum for a magnet rundown.

1. If possible, call your Qualified Service Representative.

2. Locate the Vacuum Break Tool (46-260852G3).

This tool is for emergency only and should be stored in a safe and easily accessible location. Ensure that all
operators are informed of this tool's location.
Figure 2-34: Vacuum Break Tool

3. Ensure all room ventilation systems are on and the scan magnet room door is propped open.
4. Locate the vacuum port access cover on your magnet cover.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-74
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

Figure 2-35: Vacuum port access on the magnet cover

5. Remove the vacuum port access cover from the magnet cover to expose the vacuum port.

You should be able to remove the access cover with your finger or non-magnetic tool.
Figure 2-36: Example of an access cover off and the vacuum port exposed

6. Remove the protective dust cover from the vacuum port.

The magnet cover in Figure 2-37 (on the next page) is shown removed for illustration purposes only.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-75

Figure 2-37: Dust cover removed

7. Screw the handle of the Vacuum Break Tool into the plug of the vacuum port by turning it clockwise.
At least three full turns are required to ensure thread engagement.
If you are unable to turn the handle, either call a GE Service Representative for further assistance or
remove system enclosure cover.
Figure 2-38: Vacuum Break Tool screwed into vacuum port plug

8. Lift the Vacuum Break Tool handle until it is parallel to the floor. Leave the handle in this position.
Figure 2-39: Vacuum Break Tool parallel with floor

There will be an inrush of air into the magnet and the magnet will quench in about 30 seconds.

Related topics
Primary magnet rundown procedure
Magnet Rundown Unit test procedure
Magnet rundown concept
Quench with vent failure procedure

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-76
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

Q U EN CH/CRY O GEN S

Quench with vent failure procedure

A magnet quench can result in the release of cryogen vapor into the magnet room if the vent fails; white clouds of
vapor appear in the magnet room. Cryogens released during a quench can cause asphyxiation, frostbite, or injuries
due to panic. Magnet quenches are indicated by a loud noise, warning message, or the tilting of an image on the
image screen. It is critical to have a well-planned method to quickly remove the patient and all personnel from the
magnet room if a quench should occur.
These magnets contain approximately 1950 liters of liquid helium:

3.0T

If 100% of the 1950 LHe fills the minimum sized scan room, a properly functioning emergency exhaust fan with 1200
CFM and 12 scan room air exchange / per hour would evacuate that minimum sized scan room in about 2 hours.
After that time it would be assumed safe for a qualified GE Field Service Engineer to enter the scan room and
measure the O2 levels. It remains the customer responsibility to approximate the time to evacuate 1850 LHe for use
in the site specific emergency procedures.
Use your site specific magnet room evacuation procedure. The following steps are guidelines for a site procedure in
case of a sudden cryogen release into the magnet room.

1. Do not panic.
Staying calm helps you remain focused so you are able to safely remember and follow your site planned
method of action.
2. Using the intercom, tell the patient to stay calm and remain on the table.
Tell the patient that someone will be in shortly to offer assistance.
3. Turn on the magnet room exhaust fan.
The exhaust fan is designed for 1200 cubic feet per minute, which exchanges the total volume of air in the
room 12 times per hour. The time for the helium to be near a safe level is based on the amount of helium
within a magnet,
4. Prop open the door between the operator room and hallway or if in a mobile unit, open the door to the
outside.
This promotes air circulation.
5. Prop open the door to the magnet room.
If the magnet room door does not open, follow your site specific emergency procedure to open the door.
6. Enter the magnet room and assist anyone present to exit from the room.
If a gurney or wheelchair is needed to remove the patient, make sure it is a non-ferrous type.
When exiting, stay near the floor where the oxygen will be and immediately exit the magnet room.
7. Close the MR scan room door when all have been evacuated.
If the magnet room door is left open, there is a potential that helium gas will spread to other areas,
including heating and cooling vents.
8. Evacuate all personnel from the area until the air is restored to normal.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-77

GRADIEN T MAGN ETIC F IEL DS

Gradient magnetic fields introduction

Gradient magnetic fields produce rapidly changing magnetic fields during scanning. Gradients turn on and off very
rapidly to spatially encode the MR signal during a scan. High frequency gradient amplitudes switched very quickly
(high dB/dt) may cause nerve stimulation at periphery of body due to induced currents in nerves. Because a current
can be induced in any conductive material lying on or near the patient’s body, a potential biological hazard exists. The
greater the rate of change of the magnetic field (dB/dt, slew rate), the larger the induced current. The muscles,
nerves, and blood vessels of the human body are all conductive materials.

WARNING
Ensure occupational exposure to time varying magnetic field caused by the gradients complies with local
requirements.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-78
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

GRADIEN T MAGN ETIC F IEL DS

Calculate maximum gradient output

Let d be the total duration of the gradient ramp (minimum to maximum) or the period of a sinusoidal waveform
divided by π. Let f be a fraction (0.8 for Normal Mode or 1 for First Mode). Let c be the chronaxie time in
microseconds. Let d|B|/dt_0 be the rheobase (rb, infinite ramp duration) value of the time varying gradient magnetic
field. Gradient output may be expressed by the following equation;
Maximum gradient output on a cylinder of 0.2 m radius may be found from equation and table below. f is the fraction
of the mean stimulation threshold, rb is the infinite ramp duration mean PNS threshold, c is the rheobase value
(ramp duration where the mean threshold is 2*rb), and d is the gradient ramp duration.

Table 2-38: Rheobase and chronaxie constants for SIGNA™ Premiergradient coils

Type rb (T/s) C (μs)

HRMw 17.9 642.4

Related topics
Contraindications for use

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-79

GRADIEN T MAGN ETIC F IEL DS

Gradient output limits

Gradient Output levels are measured as a percentage of the mean peripheral nerve stimulation threshold (PNS).

CAUTION
Continuous patient observation and contact are required in all modes of operation. Medical Supervision is
required in the First or Second Level controlled operating modes.

The MR system gradients are capable of operating under several modes:

Normal: the normal operating mode, admissible for all individuals.

First Level: controlled operating mode, admissible for patients on whom a medical decision was made
ensuring that they can handle the increased gradient output effects or increased SAR. Limits for increased
gradient output and SAR are based on current scientific literature related to safety.
Second Level: controlled operating mode, admissible for customers with Investigation (ethical studies) Review
Board (IRB) clearance and with a proprietary license agreement with GE. IRB review must include explicit
approval of the percentage PNS threshold.

The table below lists system operating modes and associated threshold limits.

Product maximum gradient output

The table below gives d|B|/dt for the maximum magnitude values of the vector sum of the field components
generated by each of the three GRADIENT UNITS simultaneously at the published peak gradient strength and peak
slew rate. The values are in terms of d|B|/dt at various diameters (in meters) from the gradient coil axis. The
diameters include 0.2 m, 0.4 m, and the bore diameter minus 0.1 m. The values include no peripheral nerve
stimulation limits.
Table 2-39: Maximum d|B|/dt on cylinders of various diameters at the slew rate for SIGNA™ Premier

max d|B|/dt [T/s] D= 0.2 (m) D = 0.4 (m) D = 0.45 (m) D = 0.5 (m) D = 0.6 (m)
HRMw (SuperG) 70 cm bore 35.8 46.5 N/A N/A 72.2

Table 2-40: IEC gradient output limits

Operating mode PNS Limit

Normal 80% mean nerve stimulation threshold
100% of the mean nerve stimulation threshold. Requires you to click the
First Level (controlled mode) [Accept] button to proceed when the Normal mode dB/dt or SAR limits are
exceeded, but Second Level mode has not yet been reached.
Second Level (controlled Requires research key and IRB or Human Ethical Committee approval of the
mode) research to be conducted.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-80
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

GRADIEN T MAGN ETIC F IEL DS

Peripheral nerve stimulation

The concern from time-varying gradient fields is to prevent cardiac stimulation and ventricular fibrillation. Cardiac
stimulation in the most sensitive population percentile requires at least 39 times as much energy as is produced by
at peak gradient amplitude of 0.05 Tesla/meter and Slew Rate of 200 Tesla/meter/sec.
Regulatory bodies use avoidance of painful nerve stimulation to limit gradient output with an adequate safety
margin. Painful nerve stimulation typically occurs at approximately double the mean stimulation perception
threshold. Some discomfort is experienced about 1.5 times the mean PNS threshold, see figure below.
Peripheral nerve stimulation (PNS) problems are not of concern on systems compliant with IEC 60601-2-33 Normal
or First Controlled Operating Modes. The IEC limits PNS to 80% of the mean threshold in Normal Mode (where
stimulation should be rare) and 100% for the First Mode (where non-painful stimulation is expected in about half the
patients).
If the patient can not tolerate PNS, change to Normal Mode to eliminate the problem. Otherwise change to a lower
slew rate pulse sequence to continue scanning the patient. MR workers may experience similar sensations if they are
in or very near gradient coils during active scanning.
The Anterior/Posterior (A/P) (=Y) gradient axis typically has the lowest stimulation threshold. So it is prudent to keep
the gradient waveform most likely to stimulate (the gradient waveform with the highest slew rate for the longest
total ramp time) on a physical axis other than Y.
You should remain in constant contact with the patient, especially in the FIRST CONTROLLED MODE, to ensure that
the patient does not feel painful stimulation (or high localized heating).
The figure below displays a graph of the relative mean threshold (vertical axis) and discomfort stimulation levels
(horizontal axis) where relative means are for perception (100), discomfort (1000), and pain (10,000).

1 = threshold
2 = uncomfortable
3 = intolerable
4 = 1% cardiac
Figure 2-40: Relative mean threshold and discomfort stimulation levels

The distribution of those experiencing PNS is illustrated in the figure below; three curves where the horizontal axis is
the normalized level and the vertical axis is the% probability of PNS. The curves represent the following:

1 = threshold
2 = uncomfortable
3 = intolerable

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-81

Figure 2-41: PNS probability. X axis = Fraction of the Mean Threshold (100% PNS). Y axis = Population percentile.

CAUTION
To reduce the possibility of PNS, make sure the patient’s hands are not clasped or touching and that their
feet are not crossed. Either or both of which could form a conductive loop.

CAUTION
Due to the rapid rate of change of the magnetic fields (dB/dt) used during some scans, a percentage of
patients may experience a non-hazardous tingling or touch sensation. The PNS probability graph indicates
the type of sensations caused at different percentages of the mean nerve stimulation threshold. Note that
stimulation is relatively rare in NORMAL MODE (x-axis=0.8), but occurs about 50% of the time in the FIRST
MODE (x axis=1). If this sensation is bothersome or uncomfortable to the patient, stop the scan. Change to
NORMAL MODE to continue scanning the patient. The MR worker may experience similar sensations if
remaining within the gradient field during active scanning.

CAUTION
There is a possibility that mild peripheral nerve stimulation (PNS) may be induced in the MR worker when
that person is exposed to the gradients when the system is operating in the First Level Controlled Operation
Mode. The MR worker should remain outside the magnet room during scanning in this Mode except when
circumstances dictate otherwise.

CAUTION
Peripheral nerve stimulation is not harmful. The potential for inducing peripheral nerve stimulation is kept
within limitations. The MR system is limited from operating above 80% of the PNS threshold in the NORMAL
Mode (100% of the mean PNS threshold in the First Mode) by the software (unless the system is in Second
Controlled Mode). The point at which 50% of a population experiences PNS is the PNS threshold. PNS has

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-82
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

been described as a light “touching” sensation felt on various areas of the skin surface. These areas vary
depending upon which gradient axis is in use. Some common areas for the sensations are the bridge of the
nose, arms, chest, and upper buttock/abdomen. Hands clasped together increase the potential for
stimulation by approximately 65%. The potential for PNS is low, but it exists for all sequences in all gradient
configurations.

Please report all complaints of patient discomfort that may be associated with PNS during MR examinations
(e.g., muscle twitches, tingling sensations, or headaches) to GE. See Safety information for contact information.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-83

GRADIEN T MAGN ETIC F IEL DS

Acoustic noise
Another potential safety issue associated with gradient switching is the loud noise. The rapid alternations of currents
within the gradient coils cause the coil assemblies to vibrate against their mountings, thus generating a loud
resonant noise. The acoustic noise produced during scanning can exceed 99 dBA in the bore.

WARNING
The sound level at the operator’s console should be limited to comply with local rules.

WARNING
Hearing protection is required for all people, including the MR worker, in the magnet room during a scan to
prevent hearing impairment. Acoustic levels may exceed 99 dBA. Patient hearing protection with a noise
reduction rating (NRR) of 29 dB or better is required to reduce acoustic level below 99dBA. The A-weighted
RMS sound pressure level is measured according to NEMA MS 4: 2010.

CAUTION
All personnel should be trained on the proper use of hearing protection.

l Special attention should be utilized to protect the hearing of neonates, premature infants, and any other
condition that does not allow for hearing protection to be applied.
l Patients with increased anxiety may have a lower acceptance to sound pressure (e.g., newborns, infants,
young children, elderly, and pregnant women and the fetus).
l Anesthetized patients have less then normal protection against high sound pressure. Hearing protection
should not be omitted.
l Typical operator console noise levels are below 60 dBA, so hearing protection is generally not required at
the operator console. However, it is important to ensure the sound level complies with all local
regulations.
l In some countries, legislation exists that limits employee exposure to noise levels. Ensure compliance
with your local regulations by providing additional hearing protection to MR workers for use in the
magnet room where required.
l If a music sound system is in use by the patient during scanning, the music sound system must provide >
29dB NRR of attenuation. All hearing protection devices must provide > 29dB NRR of attenuation.

Encourage the routine use of earplugs to prevent problems associated with acoustic noise during MR procedures. GE
offers disposable ear protection of various noise reduction ratings. These can be ordered through the GE accessories
catalog. The table below, describes the available types of disposable ear protection.
Table 2-41: Disposable ear protection

Description dB
E8801BA EAR Disposable Foam Earplugs 29
E8801BB EAR Taperfit2 Foam Earplugs 32
E8801BC Max-Lite Foam Earplugs 30

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-84
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

EL ECTRO MAGN ETIC F IEL DS

Electromagnetic fields introduction

The Radio Frequency (RF) field is an oscillating electromagnetic field. Pulses of RF energy are used to generate the
signal, which cause tissues to absorb RF power. Under certain conditions, this may cause tissue heating. The amount
of heating depends on several factors, such as patient size and pulse sequence timing. RF heating of tissues is
greatest at the periphery of the skin. The Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) is the estimated amount of heat dose
received by the patient. This value is expressed as watts of power per kilogram of the patient’s body weight.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-85

EL ECTRO MAGN ETIC F IEL DS

Tissue heating
Before the patient is scanned, the computer estimates the level of heating and compares it to the predetermined
exposure limits. If the scan is expected to exceed these limits, the system then adjusts the scan parameters before
starting the scan. The complete estimate is based in part on patient weight. Therefore, take care to enter the
patient’s weight correctly to prevent excessive RF exposure or scan abortion.
When patient temperature is not changing, typical skin temperatures are about 33 °C while core temperatures are
about 37 °C. Patients dissipate metabolic heat at the same rate it is generated so there are no skin or core
temperature changes. Humans subjected to significant radio frequency power deposition (i.e., significant SAR) will
normally attempt to dissipate the additional heat load through vasodilatation of skin blood vessels permitting skin to
approach core temperature. This action typically causes the skin to flush (turn red) and enables the body to dissipate
heat more rapidly. This skin flushing is a normal response to significant radio frequency power deposition. Skin
reddening or to a lesser degree the report of a warming sensation without reddening regardless of the method it was
created (SAR, Contact, Metal, etc) is not hazardous if it clears in a few hours.

Patient comfort module

The temperature inside the magnet room should be set at less than 70°F and the bore fan should be turned on at all
times to keep air flowing inside the bore of the magnet.

Thermal hazards
The increase in tissue temperature caused by RF exposure depends on a variety of factors associated with the
thermoregulatory system of the individual and the surrounding environment. Thermoregulatory is the ability of the
body to maintain regulated heat capacity levels. Observe the following warnings concerning tissue heating:

WARNING
RF power deposition can heat the patient’s tissue if delivered faster than the patient’s tissues can dissipate
the generated heat. The amount of tissue heating depends on the patient’s weight, type of pulse sequence,
timing factors, number of slices, SAR, and the use of imaging options such as saturation. Power deposition
will typically be lower when the NORMAL MODE is selected for SAR. FIRST MODE for SAR offers higher
performance but also higher power deposition.

WARNING
A rise in body temperature can be a hazard to a patient with reduced thermoregulatory capacity and
increased sensitivity to raised body temperature. These can be caused by pre-existing conditions, such as
cardiac impairment that has reduced circulatory function, hypertension, diabetes, old age, obesity, fever,
pregnancy, or an impaired ability to perspire. A patient with these complications must be carefully monitored
at all times. Consider scanning with NORMAL MODE for SAR for patients that may not tolerate the higher
levels.

CAUTION
The MR worker who remains in the scan room during a study could be subject to tissue heating caused by RF
energy exposure. Care should be taken to limit the time the MR worker remains in the scan room during a
study.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-86
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

CAUTION
All patients should be monitored for increased temperature during the scan acquisition. If the patient reports
discomfort due to warming, stop the scan. Patients should be provided with the hand-held Patient Alert bulb
prior to scanning. The patient should be instructed to communicate any concerns through the intercom or by
activating the Patient Alert bulb.

CAUTION
RF heating can be caused by:

l Damp clothing.
l Contact of body or extremities against the RF transmit coil surface, contact with metal, tattoos or
metallic eyeliner, contact with other body parts.
l Scanning with an unconnected receive coil or other cables in the RF transmit coil during the examination.

l Formation of loops with RF receive coil cables and ECG leads.

l The use of MR Unsafe or MR Conditional (used outside of its conditions for use) ECG electrodes. Never
use ECG electrodes past their expiration date.
l The use of MR Unsafe or MR Conditional (used outside of its conditions for use) ECG leads. MR ECG leads
have a very high impedance that limits current to below the level of concern.

CAUTION
Extra attention should be utilized when scanning patients who are unconscious, sedated, or may have loss of
feeling in any body part (temporary or permanent paralysis). They may not be able to alert you to RF heating.

CAUTION
The coil selected should match the coil that is connected. When scanning with a transmit/receive only coil,
DO NOT scan using the body coil (or use the Body coil configuration) at any time. Using the body coil can
cause RF heating and could result in patient burns. In addition, scanning with the body coil can damage the
transmit/receive only coil, making the coil unusable and requiring that the coil be returned to the factory for
service.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-87

EL ECTRO MAGN ETIC F IEL DS

Contact point heating

Patient positioning can affect the safety of the scan procedure. To help prevent a patient burn from closed loops
formed by the following examples: clasped hands, by hands touching the body, from thighs contacting, the patient's
breasts contacting the chest wall over a small area, etc., insert non-conducting pads at least 0.25 inches thick
between touching parts and between the patient and the bore wall and the patient and any coils or conductors.
Figure 2-42: Patient positioned with non-conducting pads (1)

Observe the following warnings concerning contact point heating to protect patients from excessive heating or burns
related to induced currents during MR procedures:

WARNING
RF can cause localized heating at contact points between the patient/bore and patient/RF coil resulting in
discomfort or burns.

WARNING
RF can cause localized heating at contact points between adjacent body parts when a loop is formed. Such
localized heating can result in discomfort, or burns. This could occur when a patient’s hands are touching or
when a female patient’s breasts are compressed to her chest. Use pads between body parts to avoid
creating a loop with adjacent body parts.

WARNING
Place appropriate non-conductive padding between the patient and the bore wherever a portion of the body
may come into contact with the magnet opening.

WARNING
Always place appropriate non-conductive padding between the surface coil and the patient’s skin to prevent
burn injuries.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-88
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

WARNING
For shoulder imaging, always place appropriate non-conductive padding between the patient’s opposite
shoulder or a portion of the patient’s body and the bore wherever a portion of the body or opposite shoulder
comes into contact with the bore.

CAUTION
RF can cause localized heating at patient contact points. Wet diapers or incontinence products have the
same electrical properties as human tissue. All patients with diapers, including adults, should have dry
diapers on prior to the start of the scan. If the patient reports discomfort due to warming, stop the scan.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-89

EL ECTRO MAGN ETIC F IEL DS

Conductive material heating

Another potential hazard related to the RF field is the heating of implants, devices, and objects of conductive (e.g.
metallic) compositions that may cause temperature changes during an MR examination. The induced currents in the
conductive (e.g. metallic) objects may cause them to get so hot that they can actually cause burns in adjacent
tissues. Therefore, it is very important to determine each patient’s work history and thoroughly screen for any
accessories containing conductive material.
Observe the following warnings concerning conductive material heating to protect patients from excessive heating or
burns related to induced currents during MR procedures:

WARNING
Eye makeup that contains metal flakes can cause eye and skin irritation during MR scanning. Instruct patients
to wash off removable makeup before the exam to avoid the risk of eye injury. Before scanning, warn
patients with permanent eyeliner or other metallic ink tattoos about the risk of skin irritation and instruct
them to get prompt medical attention if they experience severe discomfort following an MR exam.

WARNING
Metal fragments/slivers can deflect and/or heat in a magnetic field, damaging surrounding tissues. Patients
thought to have metallic fragments in the eye should receive an eye exam to detect and remove any metal
fragments that could deflect and damage the eye.

WARNING
Jewelry, even 14-karat gold, can heat and cause burns. RF can heat (even non-ferrous) metal and cause
burns.

WARNING
Medicinal products in transdermal patches may cause burns to underlying skin.

WARNING
The use of MR Unsafe or MR Conditional (used outside of its conditions for use) stereotactic frames and RF
blankets is not recommended.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-90
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

EL ECTRO MAGN ETIC F IEL DS

Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) limits

It is necessary to measure the RF absorption in tissues since RF exposure cannot be measured by the system. Energy
dissipation through absorption by the body can be described in terms of Specific Absorption Rate (SAR). SAR is a rate,
meaning it is a measure of the amount of RF power absorbed per unit of mass of an object in watts per kilogram
(W/kg). There are several types of SAR, listed in the table below, that must be understood.
Table 2-42: SAR definitions

SAR type Definition

SAR averaged over total patient body mass over any six-minute period for Body and
Whole body
Receive Only surface coils, which use body transmit.
Partial body SAR averaged over the exposed mass in the coil averaged over any six-minute period.
Head SAR averaged over the mass of the patient’s head over any six-minute period.
SAR averaged over the estimated mass of the patient’s extremity over any six-minute
Extremity
period for small volume and Transmit/Receive coils.
Short term The SAR averaged over any 10-second period.
The MR system SAR operating modes:

Normal: the normal operating mode admissible for all individuals assuming MR Conditional requirements are
met.

First Level: controlled operating mode, admissible for patients on whom a medical decision was made
ensuring they can handle the increased SAR effects. Increased SAR levels are based on current scientific
literature related to safety. There is a potential risk for increased tissue heating and nerve stimulation when
operating above Normal mode.
Second Level: controlled operating mode, admissible for customers with a propriety license agreement with
GE and with Investigational Review Board clearance for the investigational protocol. IRB review must include
explicit approval of the SAR limits. There is a potential risk for increased tissue heating and nerve stimulation
when operating above Normal mode.

CAUTION
Continuous patient observation and contact is required in all modes of operation. Medical Supervision is
required in the First or Second Level controlled operating modes.

CAUTION
SAR may be controlled by Local Approval.

WARNING
The magnet room temperature shall not be more than 21°C per the manufacturer’s requirements and the
relative humidity shall not be more than 60%. Temperatures above 21°C and humidity above 60% could
result in lowering the system SAR limit.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-91

The derating temperature is 25°C for relative humidity less than 60%. For each 10% increase of the relative
humidity in excess of 60%, the temperature is reduced by 0.25°C, e.g., 24°C at 100% relative humidity.
For each degree of environmental temperature that exceeds the SAR-derating temperature, the whole-body
SAR limit is reduced by 0.25 W/kg until the SAR is 2 W/kg or 0 W/kg for the First Level controlled operating
mode or for the Normal mode, respectively.

WARNING
The RF power monitor and SAR limitations help prevent excessive RF exposure to the patient; SAR values
are calculated based on the patient’s weight. To help avoid injury, enter the patient’s correct weight to set
operating limits and prevent excessive RF exposure.

WARNING
The SAR algorithms for the MR systems calculate SAR values and set a limit on the number of slices/echoes
per second in order to limit RF power deposition. The power monitor and SAR algorithm limit SAR, regardless
of the patient weight or pulse sequence used. SAR limits are conservatively estimated from worse-case
patient positioning as a function of weight.
The legacy power monitor module limits the RF amplifier output power thus limiting the patient SAR in case
of a catastrophic failure. This module monitors peak power based on the patient’s weight, duty cycle, and
pulse sequence parameters. The peak power limits prevent you from using incorrect patient weights.

WARNING
The average power monitor and SAR algorithm limit SAR based on patient weight and RF transmit coil used.
SAR limits are conservatively estimated from worse case patient positioning as a function of weight. The
power monitor limits the RF power, which in turn limits the patient SAR to within controlled limits over time.
Pulse sequence SAR predictions (estimated SAR) are based on patient weight at the worst-case landmark. To
minimize nuisance power monitor trips caused by patient-to-patient variability, pulse sequence predicted SAR is the
mean plus 1.96 standard deviations (typically the normalized standard deviation is about 18% at the worst-case
landmark). The expected worst-case nuisance trip rate is approximately 2.5%. If you experience a significant number
of power trips above the 2.5% frequency, please consult your local field service representative. The power monitor
measures actual power and limits SAR appropriately. The power measuring accuracy of the power monitor is about
+/-12%.
Errors in patient weight do not result in excessive SAR. Low patient weight entries result in power monitor trips
below the SAR limit. High patient weight entries result in fewer slices/images per unit time than would have been
permissible.

SAR limits
The MR system’s RF power monitor helps prevent excessive RF exposure due to equipment failure. Since the monitor
protects the patient, it must be operational at all times, even when a scan is not in progress. If it detects an
equipment failure, it immediately disables the RF system. This system must be repaired or adjusted by qualified
service personnel.
Table 2-43: SAR operating limits

System Normal mode (W/kg) First level (W/kg) Second level (W/kg)
3.0T Head = 3.2 Head = 3.2 Head > 3.2

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-92
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

System Normal mode (W/kg) First level (W/kg) Second level (W/kg)
Body = 2.0 Body = 4.0 Body > 4.0
The IEC also allows Short Term limits that allow a higher Short Term SAR for 10 second periods of time. These limits
are 2 times higher than the 6 minute limitations per IEC guidelines. This allows short term bursts of RF energy for
very short scans.

Patient acceptance of High SAR scanning can be increased by giving the patient breaks to cool down, providing
light clothing, and limiting room temperature to 18 ± 3 °C, and by maximizing air flow.

Maximum B1+ RMS for Transmit Coils

The following table provides maximum B1+ RMS (in micro-tesla) for the RF transmit coils.
Table 2-44: B1+ RMS limit (µT)

RF transmit coils max B1+ RMS (µT)

Body Coil 3.6
QED 18-channel transmit knee coil 5

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-93

EL ECTRO MAGN ETIC F IEL DS

MNS frequencies
Table 2-45: MR frequencies in MHz for Multi-Nuclear Spectroscopy (MNS) nuclei at 3.0T

3.0 Tesla
Nucleus Min Freq MHz Max Freq MHz
15N
12.899 12.993
17O
17.242 17.380
2D
19.544 19.669
29Si
25.314 25.486
13C
32.016 32.227
23Na
33.697 33.912
129Xe
35.345 35.833
11B
40.855 41.124
7Li
49.488 49.803
31P
51.574 51.941
3He
97.037 97.654
19F
119.790 120.791
1H
127.316 128.126

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-94
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

CL IN ICAL HAZ ARDS

Clinical hazards introduction

Maintaining good patient contact and education can help reduce patient anxiety reactions and clinical scanning
hazards in the MR environment and during procedures.

CAUTION
Continuous patient observation and contact are required in all modes of operation.
You need to be aware of the conditions and risks associated with the following:

High-Risk Patients
Scanning Hazards

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-95

CL IN ICAL HAZ ARDS

High risk patients

Several conditions are associated with high-risk patients, who may be at a greater risk of developing complications
during an MR examination. Observe these warnings and be prepared to manage the needs of such patients during
the examination.

WARNING
Patients with the following conditions are at the greatest risk of complications during MR scanning:

l Patients likely to develop seizure or have claustrophobic reactions.

l Greater than normal potential for cardiac arrest.
l Patients who are unconscious, heavily sedated, or confused and patients with whom no reliable
communication can be maintained.

WARNING
Patient screening is required for patients who are going to be imaged on an MR scanner.
Some patients may experience feelings of fear or claustrophobia when undergoing an MR procedure. This could be
related to the confining conditions of the magnet, the length of the examination, the acoustic noise, or the
temperatures within the bore of the magnet. Discuss the procedure with the patient and be prepared to manage the
needs of the patient during the examination.

CAUTION
The confining conditions of the MR system can precipitate claustrophobia in some patients. To prevent
injuries due to panic, provide instructions and comfort the patient as needed to alleviate anxiety.

WARNING
Since direct observation from the operator’s console can be partially obscured by the magnet enclosure, be
sure to more closely monitor these types patients at all times to quickly identify and respond to medical
emergencies. In some cases, emergency personnel should remain with the patient or be on standby alert to
help prevent serious complications or death.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-96
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

CL IN ICAL HAZ ARDS

Scanning hazards
During scan set-up, acquisition, and conclusion, be aware of the following scanning hazards:

WARNING
Do not use Projection Images for localization.

WARNING
Do not use 3D views only to perform voxel value, distance, angle, or area measurements. Always refer to 2D
baseline views.

CAUTION
Measurements are more reliable when done on 2D views. Always check on the 2D reformatted views where
exactly the points have been deposited.

CAUTION
Most multiple-channel receive only coils are designed to function best with adult patients. For smaller
patients using the multiple-channel receive only coil the patient positioning is critical for optimal image
quality. For small patients use appropriate non-conductive padding to place patient anatomy of interest in
the center of the coil.
For example, the Head Neck Array coil is a multiple-channel receive only coil. Use appropriate non-
conductive padding to place the patient’s head in the center of the coil.

CAUTION
Make sure the patient connected IV lines, oxygen tubing, urinary catheters, and any other tubing and cables
are long enough to allow full travel of the system and will not become entangled, pinched, or pulled.

CAUTION
Following the exam, your patient may need assistance when getting off the table. After lying in a prone
position for a length of time, your patient may experience light-headedness upon sitting up.

CAUTION
If the magnet room door is open, the scan cannot be started. If the scan is already in process and the door is
opened, the scan will pause. Close the door and press resume.
If the magnet room door is opened when attempting to start a scan, close the door and try again.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-97

International regulations require the system to function in this manner.

CAUTION
Always base evaluations on all images in the data set and on the clinical history. Information from only a
single image should not be used to evaluate a patient.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-98
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

EQ U IP MEN T HAZ ARDS

Equipment hazards introduction

There are general equipment concerns in the MR environment. Make sure you are familiar with your MR equipment
and the accessory equipment manufacturer’s guidelines and precautions. Specifically, you need to be aware of the
hazards associated with the following MR equipment:

Laser Alignment Lights

Cables and Equipment Connections

Also observe the following general equipment hazards:

WARNING
The MR staff must consult the GE Pre-installation Manual before installing any furniture or making any
changes in the scan room. Failing to do so may hinder the servicing of the scanner and present a dangerous
safety hazard to the service engineer.

CAUTION
Using equipment that is damaged or has been compromised, can put the patient and/or operator at risk of
injury.

CAUTION
The MR system applications run on equipment that includes one or more hard disk drives, which may hold
medical data related to patients. In some countries, such equipment may be subject to regulations
concerning the processing of personal data and the free circulation of such data. It is strongly recommended
that access to patient files be protected from all persons not in medical attendance.

CAUTION
Any application of physiological monitoring and sensing devices to the patient shall be made under the clinical
staffs direction and is the clinical staff’s responsibility. Use only MR Safe and MR Conditional (used within its
conditions for use) devices. Devices with conductors or ferromagnetic parts may introduce safety concerns.
For medical devices that are labeled as MR Safe or MR Conditional consult the device manufacturer's
documentation.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-99

EQ U IP MEN T HAZ ARDS

Laser alignment lights

The MR systems use semiconductor laser alignment lights for patient land marking. This type of alignment light casts
a thin red light on the patient for the purpose of positioning and land marking. The laser lights can cause eye injury.
The figures below display the safety labels for laser products and are located near the laser alignment light. Labels
such as these provide safety information about laser radiation.
Figure 2-43: Laser safety label

Figure 2-44: Chinese laser safety label for other MR systems

Your system may have a slight variation of these labels.

The eyes must be protected from laser radiation. The patient needs to be instructed to close their eyes when
landmarking and the laser light is turned on. Exposing eyes to the laser alignment lights may result in eye injury.

CAUTION
Exposing eyes to laser alignment lights may result in eye injury.

l Do not stare directly into the laser beam.

l Instruct patients to close their eyes to avoid eye exposure to the alignment light.
l Closely monitor all patients and prevent them from accidentally staring into the beam. Do not leave the
laser beam on after you position the patient.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-100
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

EQ U IP MEN T HAZ ARDS

Cables and equipment connections

Various equipment and accessories are used in the MR environment for specific types of examinations that include
cables and require connections to the MR system or the patient.
Application of MR conditional physiological monitoring and sensing devices to the patient should be made under your
organization's direction and is the sole responsibility of your organization.
To avoid trip hazards, you should install yellow and black trip hazard indicator covers over any cables routed on the
ground of the equipment room.

WARNING
The following general warnings should be followed when using cables and accessory connection equipment:

l For medical devices that are labeled as MR Safe or MR Conditional consult the device manufacturer's
documentation.
l Use only GE or GE-authorized accessory coils, cables, monitoring and gating equipment that is labeled as
MR Safe or MR Conditional (used within its conditions for use). Failure to restrict the use of such
equipment not labeled for MR applications may result in patient burns or other injuries.
l Use only accessories, coils, and cables that are in good condition. If you suspect that an accessory is not
in good condition, discontinue its use and contact your GE Service Engineer.
l Auxiliary devices indicated as MR Conditional may still cause patient injuries if the conditions for use are
not explicitly followed. Never use equipment unless it is accompanied by the use instructions.
l Remove unplugged surface coils or unused accessory devices from the magnet bore; a patient burn can
result.
l RF can heat non-compatible surface coils and MR Unsafe or MR Conditional (used outside of its
conditions for use) gating cables, damaged surface coils/gating cables, surface coils that are not properly
plugged in, and improperly routed cables can cause burns.
l The use of cable-connected surface coils, photopulse sensor for peripheral gating (PG), or
electrocardiogram (ECG) gating accessories for patient scanning can result in localized heating, leading
to a burn or fire if proper scan preparation is not followed. The cables often extend into the high intensity
region of the RF field and it is possible that induced electrical currents in the cables may cause arcing.
l Always bring the cable directly out of the magnet bore with no slack. Place cables under the cushion
whenever possible to separate the cable from the patient.
l Keep the length of cable in the bore to a minimum. Avoid bending the cable 180° and route the cables
out of the bore in the most direct way.
l Route cables through the center of the magnet bore. Place cables under the cushion whenever possible
to separate the cable from the patient. Routing near the sides of the bore increases the likelihood of
cable heating (from induced currents).
l Do not cross or loop cables. Arcing and patient burns could result.

In addition to the warnings above, there are specific warnings related to Cardiac Gating Equipment and Accessory
Coils you need to understand to maintain a safe MR environment.

Cardiac gating equipment

Electrocardiogram (ECG) gating (triggering) may be performed in an MR environment to synchronize the MR scan
acquisition with the patient’s heart beat. Only MR Safe and MR Conditional (used within its conditions for use)
electrodes and high-impedance leads should be used in the MR environment to ensure patient safety. For medical
devices that are labeled as MR Safe or MR Conditional consult the device manufacturer's documentation.The ECG

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-101

triggering feature on the system should only to be used for cardiac gating and must not be used for patient
monitoring. It is important to use only GE recommended disposable electrodes and GE High Impedance ECG Cables.

WARNING
Do not allow the ECG cable connector end to touch the patient; patient burns can result. Use a thermal
resistant material or patient comfort pad to keep the connector end from touching the patient. See the
figures below for proper positioning.
Figure 2-45: Patient comfort pad positioned underneath ECG cable connected to the ECG port

Figure 2-46: Patient comfort pad wrapped around the ECG cable connected to the ECG port

WARNING
Observe the following warnings when using ECG or peripheral gating:

l The MR cardiac gating feature is intended for use solely in acquiring MR images using cardiac
gating/triggering, not for physiological monitoring. The patient’s condition may not be reflected, resulting
in improper emergency treatment.
l Do not use monitoring equipment when conductors are in the bore and touching the patient; burns can
result.
l Do not use leads with broken shields or exposed conductors. Only use accessories in good condition. If
you suspect that an accessory is not in good condition, discontinue its use and contact your GE Service
Engineer.
l Check to see that the cardiac or peripheral gating cable does not pass under or near the surface coil or
surface coil cable.
l Check to see that only the peripheral gating sensor touches the patient. Keep cables from coming in
contact with the patient.
l Do not use equipment that has not been specifically tested and approved for use in the environment of a
MR system.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-102
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

l Physiological monitoring and sensing devices should be used solely under the operators direction and it is
their responsibility to ensure patient safety.

WARNING
Do not use waveforms for physiological monitoring. Patient condition may not be reflected, resulting in
improper treatment.

WARNING
Do not use expired or dried electrodes. They do not properly conduct the signal, which can lead to image
degradation, create intermittent triggering, and can cause burns to the patient.

WARNING
GE High Impedance ECG Cables shall only be used under the conditions described below.
Non-clinical testing has demonstrated this device is MR Conditional and can be scanned safely only under the
following conditions:

l Maximum Static Magnetic Field: 3.0 Tesla

l Maximum Spatial Gradient: 5000 Gauss/cm
l Maximum Whole Body Average SAR: 4 W/kg for 60 minutes of scanning
l The ECG lead signal may be visible in the images

Accessory coils
It is important you familiarize yourself with the operating instructions for each accessory coil used in your MR
environment. Follow the recommended guidelines and precautions by the manufacturer.

WARNING
Observe the following warnings when using surface coils:

l Do not use surface coils with exposed coils or damaged insulation. Skin contact with metal conductors
can cause burns.
l Do not allow the surface coil cable to touch the patient; patient burns can result. Use a thermal resistant
material or pad to keep the cable from touching the patient.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-103

CL IN ICAL SCREEN IN G

Clinical screening introduction

To avoid potential health hazards in the MR environment, personnel and patient screening procedures should be
established in your imaging facility. Every person working or entering the magnet room or adjacent rooms with a
magnetic field needs to be instructed about the dangers. This should include all MR workers, maintenance, service,
and cleaning personnel, as well as the local fire station team.
All MR workers need careful assessment prior to engaging in operation of the MR system. Additionally, all patients
undergoing the MR examination need careful assessment prior to the procedure. Screening helps identify anything
that might create a health risk or interfere with MR imaging. It also assists you in determining if the patient has any
specific needs or limitations. Additionally, if another person accompanies the patient undergoing the MR
examination, they should be screened and managed in the same manner as the patient. The aim of screening is to
safely obtain high-quality images so an accurate diagnosis can be made. Maintaining a controlled and safe
environment can be achieved by careful questioning patients, visitors/family members and all personnel.

Screen each patient thoroughly for pertinent medical history and conditions that contraindicate scanning before
initializing an examination. If proper scanning can not be performed, postpone MR examinations until the screening
can be completed.
A documented screening procedure should be followed by a review of the completed form and a verbal conversation
to verify the form information and provide the patient time to express his or her questions or concerns. The review
and discussion should be conducted by MR safety-trained personnel to ensure there is no miscommunication about
the MR safety issues.
A written screening form must be completed each time a patient is to have an MR examination. Even if the patient
undergoing previous MR examinations and/or has completed the screening form previously, does not assure the
patient another safe examination.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-104
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

CL IN ICAL SCREEN IN G

MR compatibility
Review the following information related to spatial magnetic field data:

Contraindications for use

Spatial magnetic field data

A device is labeled as MR Conditional if it has been demonstrated to pose no known hazards in a specified MR
environment with specified conditions of use. Field conditions that define the MR environment include static
magnetic field strength, static spatial gradient, time rate of change of the magnetic field (dB/dt), RF fields, specific
absorption rate (SAR), and coil to be used. Additional conditions, including specific configurations of the item (e.g., the
routing of leads used for a neurostimulation system), may be required.

WARNING
The attractive force of the magnetic field of the MR system can cause ferrous objects to become projectiles,
which can cause serious injury. Post the Security Zone warning sign on the entrance to the magnet room and
keep all hazardous objects out of the magnet room.

WARNING
GE shall not be responsible for assessing the proper function of any device. The user of the device must
consult the device manufacturer to ensure the device is MR Safe or MR Conditional. Then the user must
ensure the MR Conditions are met. Finally, the user must determine what is appropriate.

DANGER
Devices compatible at one field strength, such as 1.5T, may not be compatible at another field strength, such
as 3.0T. Prior to patient scanning, confirm with the device manufacturer that the device is compatible at your
field strength.

MR compatibility test guidelines

Introduction
This section document describes a set of specifications and standards that can be used to evaluate the Magnetic
Resonance (MR) compatibility of hand-held, non-electronic equipment used in conjunction with the MR system.

MR compatibility standards
The American Society for Testing and Materials, International (ASTM) has developed the following MR compatibility
standards (and are developing more):

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-105

F1542 Specification for the Requirements and Disclosure of Self-Closing Aneurysm Clips
F2052 Test Method for Measurement of Magnetically Induced Displacement Force on Medical Devices in the
Magnetic Resonance Environment
F2119 Test Method for Evaluation of MR Image Artifacts from Passive Implants
F2182 Measurement of Radio Frequency Induced Heating Near Passive Implants During Magnetic Resonance
Imaging
F2213 Measurement of Magnetically Induced Torque on Medical Devices in the Magnetic Resonance
Environment
F2503 Practice for Marking Medical Devices and Other Items for Safety in the Magnetic Resonance
Environment

These may be ordered online at http://www.astm.org.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-106
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

CL IN ICAL SCREEN IN G

Screening form
A comprehensive, printed screening form should be used to assess the patient and document the information. The
form can be customized for your MR suite and might consists of three sections:

Section 1: General Information

Section 2: Hazardous Items Checklist
Section 3: Magnet Room Pre-Entry Checklist

WARNING
Patient screening is required for patients who are going to be imaged on an MR scanner.

General information
Section 1 of a patient screening form contains general information concerning patient demographics and the
patient’s medical and work history. Relevant patient-related information is valuable for obtaining current medical
conditions and information on prior diagnostic studies that may be helpful in evaluating the patient’s state.
Determining the patient’s work history is important for those who work in machine shops or similar environments.
These individuals may have small metal slivers or fragments of steel embedded in their eyes. If metal fragments are
suspected, the patient should receive an eye examination to detect and remove hazardous materials before
scanning.
Section 1 of a screening form also contains questions needed to help identify high-risk patients, i.e., those with
conditions posing higher risk of complications during the MR exam. Questions explore risks due only to the condition
of the patient (e.g. elevated risk of seizure or cardiac arrest) and also those due to the elevated SAR possible when
operating in First Level Controlled Mode (e.g. for patients with compromised thermoregulatory capacity.)

MR workers may be at risk if previous occupational, recreational or other life experiences have resulted in the
accidental implantation of metallic substances, such as slivers or fragments. Page 2 of the patient screening form
should be completed by each MR worker to ensure the magnetic field does not pose a hazard to their well-being.
This section also contains questions for female patients concerning matters that may affect the MR examination.
Pregnant patients must be identified before they are permitted to undergo an MR procedure. A physician should
carefully compare and discuss the risks and benefits of the MR examination versus alternative procedures before
scanning to control risk to the patient.

Hazardous items checklist

The Hazardous Items Checklist, in section 2 of a patient screening form, is valuable in identifying various implants and
devices that may be hazardous to the patient undergoing the MR examination. Items that may produce image
artifacts, can also be detected through this section of the screening process.
Some patients, including those suffering from forms of dementia, may not be aware of having a pacemaker. On such
patients, palpate the upper torso and abdomen to make sure no pacemaker is present. Pacemakers may be
implanted in any of several locations in the chest and abdomen. Pacemaker lead wires are sometimes left in place
after removal of the pacing mechanism. The wires can induce current, producing heat during the MR procedure.
Therefore, checking for lead wires is also important.
The best way to ensure a metal-free environment is to have patients change into patient examination attire. The
checklist also includes items the patient may externally possess. Do not limit your inspection to only ferrous objects
alone. Even non-ferrous items, such as gold jewelry, can heat during a scan and burn a patient. Make sure the patient

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-107

removes all of these objects. In addition, be sure to check small children for safety pins and snaps on diapers or
undershirts.
Section 2 of a form also contains an anatomical figure of the human body for patients to mark the location of objects
they have inside or on their body. This information can be useful in determining the approximate area of objects that
may be hazardous or produce artifacts.

Magnet room pre-entry checklist

The last section of a screening form lists metal or magnetic-sensitive items with which the patient can not enter the
magnet room. Ensure the patient removes the checked items prior to magnet room entry. Also obtain signatures to
document the person who completed and reviewed the screening form.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-108
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

P ATIEN T EMERGEN CIES

Patient emergencies introduction

You must become very familiar with the location and proper use of certain emergency buttons and releases should
an emergency occur in the MR environment. Advanced planning and being accustomed to your site’s procedures and
surroundings are necessary to ensure a safe environment.
Before you begin any scanning procedure, explain the use of the Patient Alert System to your patient. Make sure he
or she understands its purpose and use. Remember that implants, pacemakers, and ferromagnetic life-support
systems cannot be brought into the magnet room.*
Be sure to closely monitor patients with a increased potential for cardiac arrest or claustrophobia, or patients who
are unconscious or extremely ill. Always maintain visual contact with the patient. Be familiar with your site’s
predetermined location outside the magnet room where you can transfer patients if it becomes necessary for
emergency personnel to intervene.
The figure below displays a general layout of an MR magnet room. You should always be able to maintain visual
contact with your patient from the operator’s console.
*In general, patients with conductive (e.g. metallic) implants are contraindicated for MR scans. Some implantable
devices have been labeled as MR Conditional under certain operating conditions. Only use quadrature transmit for
MR Conditional devices. MR Safe implants will have the MR Safe symbol in their implant documentation.
When evaluating whether to proceed with MR scanning on patients with such implants, consult the implantable
device’s labeling.
Figure 2-47: Magnet room layout

Table 2-46: Magnet room layout image legend

# Description
1 Magnet and magnet enclosure
2 Oxygen monitor remote sensor (optional)
3 Emergency magnet rundown
4 Operator's console

Emergency medical procedures

Your site should define and implement specific procedures to follow in case of a medical emergency. These
procedures should take account of the existence of the magnetic field. For example, they should instruct how to use
the Table Emergency Release to remove a patient rapidly from the magnet's influence. For details, see:

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-109

Mobile table emergency release procedure

Cradle emergency release procedure: SIGNA™ Premier

Other product features useful in an emergency include:

Patient alert system

Emergency stop
Emergency off
PDU main breaker
Quench and cryogen introduction

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-110
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

P ATIEN T EMERGEN CIES

Patient alert system

Your MR system has a Patient Alert system that enables the patient to alert you at the console by squeezing a bulb.
Figure 2-48: Patient alert system

Table 2-47: Patient alert system image legend

# Description
1 Patient alert bulb
2 Control box
Squeezing the Patient Alert bulb causes the control box to light up and emit an audible signal. A switch on the control
box allows you to set the signal for intermittent or constant light and sound.
Your MR system also has an intercom system that enables you to maintain verbal contact with the patient
throughout the examination.

CAUTION
Provide all patients with the Patient Alert bulb. This can be especially important for procedures that require
the concerted attention of the technologist/operator at the MR or Advantage Workstation (AW) operator
console, e.g., fMRI sequences.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-111

P ATIEN T EMERGEN CIES

Emergency stop
The Emergency Stop button is located on the keyboard and on both the right and left sides of the magnet enclosure.
This function cuts off electrical power from equipment located in the magnet room that may present a hazard to the
patient in an emergency situation.
You can press the Emergency Stop button to stop a scan in a patient emergency situation. You should not be afraid
to press the Emergency Stop button because it may shut the system down for an extended length of time. This is
not required to shut down the magnet coldhead.
To recover from an Emergency Stop situation, see the following procedures:
SIGNA™ Premier: emergency stop recovery procedure
Emergency Stop buttons.

The Emergency Stop button disables the following systems:

RF
Gradient power supply
Magnet room unit
Table and patient support subsystem

WARNING
The Emergency Stop button does not remove the magnetic field, turn off the computer cabinets, operator’s
console, or camera.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-112
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

P ATIEN T EMERGEN CIES

Emergency off
The Emergency Off button is located on the wall next to all computer equipment and next to the MR magnet room
doors and on the MR system Main Disconnect Panel (if provided). It removes ALL electrical power from ALL
components of the system, including any power sources from uninterrupted power supply (UPS) devices.
The Emergency Off button not only stops a scan in a patient emergency, but also in the event of a serious
equipment fault or hazards such as fire/water in the vicinity of the MR equipment. The entire MR system is to be
turned OFF except for the static magnetic field and the magnet rundown unit used to shut down the magnetic field.
Figure 2-49: Emergency Off button

Use this button only in a major emergency in the computer or MR magnet room. For example, use this button when
you notice fire, sparks, or loud noises not associated with normal operation of the system.

To restore power after emergency off, the main circuit breaker must be reset before rebooting the system.
Always contact a service engineer before restoring power.

WARNING
The Emergency Off button does not turn off the magnetic field. To avoid personal injury or equipment
damage, do not bring any ferromagnetic equipment into the magnet room. Assume that equipment is
magnetic unless it is clearly labeled otherwise.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-113

P ATIEN T EMERGEN CIES

PDU main breaker

The PDU Main Breaker turns off power to system components other than the Magnet Rundown Unit, cryogen
compressor, scan room lights, chillers and magnet cryogen monitor. Typically, service uses this power off switch and
the MR customer does not use it.
Figure 2-50: ISC cabinet

Table 2-48: Image legend

# Description
1 Power off button
2 EMO Reset button
3 Breaker

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-114
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

P ATIEN T EMERGEN CIES

Cradle emergency release: SIGNA™ Premier

Use these steps to bring the cradle out of the magnet bore in the event of an emergency. It is recommended that all
MR1 workers manually practice these procedures so you become familiar with the noise and the force needed to pull
the cradle out of the magnet. Therefore, in the event of an emergency, you will know what to expect.

1. To manually remove the cradle from the magnet bore when there is power to the table, follow these steps.
a. Grasp the emergency release handle and squeeze the lever while you walk alongside the length of the
table as the cradle moves out of the bore. This action does not require incremental force.
Figure 2-51: Grasp release handle and walk cradle to end of table

Re-engage cradle after table emergency release

Once the table is mechanically and electrically docked, the cradle will automatically engage and is ready for motion
via the in-room operator control buttons.

IMPORTANT! To manually remove the cradle from the magnet bore in the event of a power loss, emergency
stop, or system malfunction, grasp the emergency release handle and pull the cradle to the end of the table.

1Magnetic Resonance. The absorption or emission of electromagnetic energy by nuclei in a static

magnetic field after excitation by a suitable RF pulse.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-115

Figure 2-52: Release handle

Related topics
Mobile table release procedure

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-116
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

P ATIEN T EMERGEN CIES

Mobile table emergency release procedure

Use these steps to disconnect the mobile table from the magnet.
Note that the table can be lowered and raised with foot pedals in normal conditions. However, when a manual
cradle removal occurs, the foot pedals to raise and lower the table temporarily do not work until the cradle reaches
the home location.

1. Pull the table transport emergency release lever.

Figure 2-53: Table transport emergency release

Table 2-49: Image legend

# Description
1 Up/down pedals
2 Transport/emergency release lever

IMPORTANT! Do not use the Magnet control buttons after the table emergency release procedure is
completed. Wait until the table is re-engaged to the system before you use the Magnet control buttons.

Related topics
Patient emergencies introduction

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-117

ADDITIO N AL W ARN IN GS AN D CAUTIO N S

Scan and Display introduction

This section includes additional warnings and cautions for the following areas:

Scan and equipment

Auto Protocol Optimization
AutoPaste
BrainWave paradigm
CD/DVD handling
Filters
Flex Imaging Option
IDEAL Imaging Option
MAGiC
MR Conditional
MR-Touch
Multi-echo FGRE/FSPGR
Navigator
Patient orientation
Patient transfer
Patient weight
Post-contrast scans
Prescan
Coils

Display or post processing

AutoPaste
Add/Subtract images
Applications
VIBRANT Flex and LAVA Flex
Imaging Option
IDEAL
READY View
Volume Viewer
Annotation
Filter Floaters
Measurements
Reformat
Threshold

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-118
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

ADDITIO N AL W ARN IN GS AN D CAUTIO N S

Scan
This section contains additional scan warnings and cautions.

Auto Protocol Optimization

WARNING
When Enable is selected in ARC/ASSET Automatic Acceleration Allowed, a higher acceleration factor is used
by applying the lowest resolution if the scan time or breath hold time is not short enough. This condition may
cause aliasing artifact.

AutoPaste

WARNING
Do not use Pasting post process application with images that demonstrate metal implants.

BrainWave paradigm

WARNING
When creating paradigms, if you do not create a unique paradigm number, paradigm string, and paradigm
name/filename, the Brainwave Hardware may fail to communicate with BrainWaveRT. After editing
paradigms, always be sure BrainWave communication with the clinical software is intact.

CD/DVD handling

CAUTION
To avoid image loss, never touch the recording surface of a recordable CD (CD-R). Handle the disk only by the
outer edge or central hole. Do not place it face down on a hard surface. Fingerprints or scratches will make
the disk unusable.

Filters

CAUTION
Images filtered for uniformity with PURE may contain residual signal variation arising from sources other than
tissue contrast. Such variation can be more apparent in PURE filtered images than in unfiltered images,
because default window width values display more contrast after PURE. Please refer to Filter
considerations for more detail.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-119

CAUTION
Images filtered for uniformity with SCENIC may contain hyper- or hypo-intense signal areas that are not
apparent on unfiltered images. SCENIC filtering is derived from the image itself, and the results can
therefore be affected by tissue shape and contrast.

Flex Imaging Option

CAUTION
Verify that the FOV includes all anatomy. If not, phase wrap will cause water/fat signal to swap.

CAUTION
Images labeled as water may include signal from fatty tissue, and images labeled as fat may include signal
from water. This error may occur in regions of high magnetic field variation, in spatially isolated tissue, due to
patient or tissue motion, due to phase wrap artifacts, due to similar water and fat intensity in T2-weighted
Flex scans, due to TE values beyond recommended limits, and/or in images with low signal-to-noise ratios.
The presence of fat tissue in images labeled as water, or vice versa, may occur within single images or
throughout an in entire stack of slices. By default, both sets of images (labeled fat and labeled water) will be
reconstructed and inserted into the database for review. Proper calibration and center frequency selection
will reduce the occurrence of this error. Complete elimination of this error may not be possible and thus
interpretation of MR images must be completed by trained personnel.

IDEAL Imaging Option

WARNING
Computed R2* values are affected by the presence of contrast agents in tissue, and results may be incorrect.
Do not utilize post-contrast images for generating R2* maps. Affected applications include multi-echo
FGRE/FSPGR acquisitions such as IDEAL IQ, and any post process applications that create R2 star maps such
as StarMap and READY View R2 Star.

CAUTION
Make sure that the FOV includes all anatomy. Phase wrap will cause water/fat signal swap.

MAGiC

WARNING
MAGiC artifacts may simulate pathology, which has the potential to lead to misinterpretation. Exercise
caution when reviewing CSF spaces, its adjacent tissues and the posterior fossa, particularly for cases
involving subtle pathology.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-120
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

MAGiC creates novel artifacts that are unique to synthetic images. Specifically, hyper-intensity or
CSF suppression artifacts may be present on MAGiC T2 FLAIR. Hyper-intense signal may display as an
artefactual edge enhancement between CSF and adjacent tissue. CSF suppression artifacts may appear as
an unexpected bright signal. If in doubt, it is advisable to acquire a conventional 2D or 3D T2 FLAIR series or a
MAGiC series in a different orientation for cross-sequence comparison.
Presentation of traditional artifacts (such as motion) may not appear the same in conventional imaging due
to signal sampling differences. For example, the appearance, frequency, and location of artifacts may be
unconventional. Artifacts from patient movement, (e.g., due to sneezing, tremor, etc.) will propagate through
all contrasts. Artifacts from physiological motion, such as arterial and CSF pulsations, ghosting, and any other
interference during MAGiC acquisition, will impact all synthetic contrasts. Heightened attention to proper
patient stabilization or immobilization is advised. Conventional troubleshooting via comparison to other
sequences may not be appropriate.
Figure 2-54 illustrates an example of differences between a MAGiC T2 FLAIR image compared with a conventional T2
FLAIR.
Figure 2-54: Conventional T2FLAIR image head versus a MAGiC T2W FLAIR image

Table 2-50: Image legend

# Description
1 Conventional T2 FLAIR
MAGiC T2W FLAIR
A = Hyperintense Vessel Sign (HVS)
2
B = High signal intensity at the edge of Cerebral Spinal Fluid (CSF)
C = CSF

MR Conditional

WARNING
Susceptibility artifacts, such as those related to MR Conditional metal implants, will result in incorrect 3D
Geometry Correction. Please carefully verify images.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-121

WARNING
If the calibration scan covers a region containing MR Conditional metal implants, the calibration images are
expected to have distortion and signal void artifacts. Therefore, PURE and ASSET images that have MR
Conditional metal present should not be used for post processing.

WARNING
READY View fusion does not function reliably if MR Conditional metal implants are present and a reference
image other than the original image is used. READY View Fusion should not be applied on series if the image
area includes MR Conditional metal implants. Strong B0 and B1 distortion caused by MR Conditional metal
implants will cause image distortion and signal void in images. Reference images may have different level of
distortion (e.g., MAVRIC SL versus non-MAVRIC SL) with functional series, and mis-registration will occur.

WARNING
Due to the strong magnetic field disturbance in a region containing metal, do not use the RF Drive Mode
parameter: Optimized.

WARNING
Do not use the PURE1 image filter when acquiring scans in the vicinity of metallic implants or devices. Signal
distortion effects are not predictable and will result in incorrect images.

1Phased array UnifoRmity Enhancement

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-122
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

MR-Touch

CAUTION
When setting up an MR-Touch exam, to avoid entanglement of the Patient Driver tube with the patient's
neck, always orient the driver so that the tube is routed towards the patient's feet.

CAUTION
MR Touch has only been evaluated for use on adults. There is insufficient information to establish the safety
and effectiveness of MR Touch for use on pediatric patients.

WARNING
Never place the active acoustic driver in the magnet scan room.

WARNING
To avoid tripping over the tubing, route the tubing on the side of the table that is opposite the scan room
door.

Coil CAUTION
There is a potential hazard of crossing or looping coil cables that may exist, which will or can cause minor
personal injury or property damage if the instructions are ignored.

Multi-echo FGRE/FSPGR

CAUTION
Measurement of relaxation time by Multi-Echo FGRE/FSPGR is very sensitive to the result of gradient shim
(Auto-Shim) in the slice direction. Auto-Shim with shim-volume setting is recommended.

CAUTION
It is possible that READY View results of the calculated T2* and R2* values have an error with acquisitions
that have a large slice number value.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-123

Navigator

CAUTION
Motion compensation accuracy may be affected by the presence of contrast agents, resulting in decreased
image quality.

Patient orientation

WARNING
Ensure that the Patient Position selection matches the actual patient orientation. Making a selection that
does not match the patient’s actual position results in incorrectly annotated and/or rotated images, possibly
resulting in improper medical treatment.

Patient transfer

CAUTION
The arm boards are not to be used as a seat or shelf. The arm board is not designed as a weight bearing
device and there is a possibility for failure and the patient or load falling.

CAUTION
Following the exam, your patient may need assistance when getting off the table. After lying in a prone
position for a length of time, your patient may experience lightheadedness upon sitting up.

Patient weight
Patient weight is not pulled with the other patient information from the ConnectPro worklist. You must manually
enter the weight.

Post-contrast scans

WARNING
With post-contrast imaging using inversion-prepared pulse sequences, there is a potential that lesion
conspicuity may be reduced and some lesions may not be apparent in comparison to T1-weighted spin-echo
imaging.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-124
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

Prescan

CAUTION
Auto prescan is used to calibrate the flip angle and to accurately estimate SAR levels. Do not manually adjust
the transmit gain for GRE, SPGR, FGRE, FSPGR and FIESTA scans since excessive SAR may result if the TG is
set too high. Using Auto prescan rather than manual prescan insures that accurate SAR limits are used.

Synthetic DWI
Synthetic DWI is commercially known as MAGiC DWI.

WARNING
Before you acquire a MAGiC DWI scan review the following:

MAGiC DWI images may show different contrast from images acquired directly with DWI due to
different TE, Intra-Voxel Incoherent Motion effect (in liver), and in the brain, restricted diffusion effect.
MAGiC DWI may show artifacts or incorrect image calculations in moving organs.
MAGiC DWI may show artifacts due to diffusion distortion. Thus, to minimize the artifact, it is
recommended to select Real Time Field Adjustment scan parameter from the Details tab .
MAGiC DWI should not be used in ADC calculation in READY View, FuncTool, or any other 3rd party
tools.
Diagnosis should not be made by only reviewing the synthesized images.

User CVs

Fat SAT Efficiency

CAUTION
When a wide scan volume is acquired by using more slabs, Fat enhancement option may cause a heavy
background signal saturation at superior slab position.

Coils

CAUTION
Never use an incompatible legacy coil with the table. The curved bottom of the coil placed on the flat surface
of the table can lead to patient injury.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-125

CAUTION
When using the AA with the PVA in a feet-first orientation, be sure to run the AA cable over the center
housing of the PVA.

CAUTION
The AA coil may not fit in the bore when used on patients with large torsos. To avoid injuring the patient or
damaging the coil, watch carefully as the table moves into the bore. Stop advancing the table if the AA coil
comes into contact with the top of the bore.

CAUTION
Do not carry any of the coil components by the cable. Damage to the coil component may occur. The coil may
not work if damaged.

CAUTION
The coil contains sensitive electronic components that may become damaged. Do not spray or pour cleaning
solution directly onto the coil. Do not submerge the coil in any solution. Under no circumstances should the
coil be placed into any type of sterilizer.

CAUTION
Do not place a coil directly on the table surface over the PA area. Be certain that the pads are on the table
before using a coil. For example, only place the wrist coil on the table surface with the pads in place. Placing a
coil directly on the PA area of the patient table results in coil-to-coil contact, which can result in poor image
quality.

CAUTION
RF can cause localized anterior coil warming when it is positioned close to the top of the bore. Place non-
conductive padding between the coil and the bore in order to keep the coil positioned away from the bore
wall.

CAUTION
Ensure that no hair or fabric is caught between the components. Failure to comply may cause artifacts and
decreased image quality.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-126
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

CAUTION
Do not pick up or carry the Head Component by the mirror attachment. To avoid damaging the coil, pick up
and carry the Head Component using two hands on the bottom of the coil.

CAUTION
Users should place a service call any time the coil is dropped or mishandled. A GE Service Representative
should inspect the coil after it has been dropped or mishandled to ensure it is safe to use.

Coil CAUTION
Looped cables may cause RF coupling and degrade the scan performance of the coil. Do not cross or loop
cables.

Pinch Point CAUTION

To avoid injuring the patient or damaging the coil, watch carefully for pinch points as the table moves into the
bore. Stop advancing the table if the patient or any part of the coil comes into contact with the bore.

WARNING
Do not use accessories (e.g. pads or straps) that have not been specifically tested and approved for use in
the MR environment (i.e., MR Safe or MR Conditional). Use of MR Unsafe or MR Conditional (used outside of
its conditions for use) accessories may result in patient burns or injuries or image degradation. Even auxiliary
devices labeled as MR Conditional are capable of causing injury if the manufacturer's conditions are not
followed.

WARNING
Electric shock may occur if the coil is attached to the system during cleaning or when it is still wet. Detach
coil connector from the scanner before attempting to clean the coil. Do not touch connectors with bare
fingers. Never press sharp objects against connector surface. Do not reattach connector after cleaning until
the coil has dried completely.

WARNING
Electric shock hazard. No user serviceable parts. Refer service to qualified service personnel.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-127

WARNING
Do not allow the coil cables to touch the patient. Use a thermal resistant material or pad to keep the cable
from touching the patient. Failure to comply may cause patient burns.

WARNING
Prior to patient placement in the coil, assure that any breached or compromised patient skin surfaces that
come in contact with the coil have been adequately bandaged or covered.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-128
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

ADDITIO N AL W ARN IN GS AN D CAUTIO N S

Display
This section contains additional warnings and cautions related to image display and post processing.

AutoPaste

WARNING
Do not use Pasting post process application with images that demonstrate metal implants.

Add/Subtract images

CAUTION
Since “COMB” series contain images resulting from a combination of images from different locations in the
patient’s body, the absolute anatomical coordinates accompanying these series (shown both in the Browser
and on the displayed images) are not accurate. Only relative geometric measurements (i.e. distance, angle,
or area) are accurate.

Applications

VIBRANT, VIBRANT-Flex and LAVA-Flex

WARNING
It is possible that a spatial distortion can be seen on 3D data sets, especially in the lateral-most VIBRANT
images. The distortion can be demonstrated in sagittal versus axial data sets. There is a potential risk for
lesion localization misregistration during biopsy procedures, which could result in a re-biopsy of the patient.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-129

Imaging Option

IDEAL

CAUTION
Images labeled as water may include signal from fatty tissue, and images labeled as fat may include signal
from water. This error may occur in regions of high magnetic field variation, in spatially isolated tissue, due to
patient or tissue motion, due to phase wrap artifacts, and/or in images with low signal-to-noise ratios. The
presence of fat tissue in images labeled as water, or vice versa, may occur within single images or throughout
an in entire stack of slices. By default, both sets of images (labeled fat and labeled water) will be
reconstructed and inserted into the database for review. Proper calibration and center frequency selection
will reduce the occurrence of this error. Complete elimination of this error may not be possible and thus
interpretation of MR images must be completed by trained personnel.

READY View

Care should be taken when using quantitative measures of cerebral blood flow from 3DASL in clinical
populations. Differences in CBF values may be seen when the same subject is scanned on different systems and
coils. Diagnostic and treatment decisions should not be based solely on these absolute values.

WARNING
Do not use 3D views only to perform voxel value, distance, angle, or area measurements. Always refer to 2D
baseline views.

Diffusion Tensor images attempt to characterize behavior of water molecules in imaged tissue. Therefore, fiber
tracking representation actually displays algorithmically predicted water molecule direction. These displays may be
only representative of the actual white matter anatomy. A trained neuro radiologist is required to make the
association between the rendered tract display and the actual patient’s anatomy.

CAUTION
Failure to place the ROI as described will negatively impact the output measurement.

CAUTION
Always click Compute again to re–compute the functional maps after making changes to the input
parameters. The changes are not taken into account automatically.

CAUTION
It is possible that READY View results of the calculated T2* and R2* values have an error with acquisitions
that have a large slice number value.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-130
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

WARNING
Under no circumstances should the pixel value from saved functional maps be used by any software
applications that rely on Hounsfield values. This applies, in particular, to dose computation software
applications.

Volume Viewer

Annotation

CAUTION
When saving images for diagnostic purposes, always make sure the patient name is displayed on all views.

Filter floaters

WARNING
Floater filtering removes all 3D objects from the displayed 3D volume that have a size equal to or smaller
than the selected filter size. Before applying a filter, make sure that the selected filter size will not result in
removing pathologies or other essential anatomical structures.

Measurements

CAUTION
Measurements are more reliable when done on 2D views. Always check on the 2D reformatted views where
exactly the points have been deposited.

CAUTION
Post processing results may be affected by the presence of MR Conditional implants. Consider the following
related to post-processing MAVRIC SL images on your MR1, PACS2 or AW3 systems:
If an image includes susceptibility artifact, such as from MR Conditional metal implants, measurements made
on the image may be incorrect due to distortion of actual physical locations.

1Magnetic Resonance. The absorption or emission of electromagnetic energy by nuclei in a static

magnetic field after excitation by a suitable RF pulse.
2Picture Archiving Communications System
3Advantage Workstation

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-131

CAUTION
Distance, angle, and area measurements are valid only if all trace segments are longer than the inter-slice
distance.

Reformat

WARNING
A curved VOI can introduce distortion in the shape of objects. To prevent misinterpretation of the shape of
an object, always verify the cursor position by correlation with the baseline and reformatted views.

Threshold

WARNING
The use of thresholding for the building of the 3D model excludes all voxel values outside the selected range
from the 3D model. Before applying the threshold(s), make sure that the selected threshold settings will not
result in removing pathologies or other essential anatomical structures from the 3D model.

Summary table

WARNING
While ROI statistics are calculated on displayed volumes in volume viewer (segmented or not), the summary
table only displays statistics calculated from original volumes (non-segmented).

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-132
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

SY STEM MAIN TEN AN CE

System maintenance introduction

Maintaining a controlled environment also involves routine preventative maintenance checks by the service engineer
and site personnel. Careful planning and diligent upkeep of an MR facility can provide a safe environment for both
patients and employees. Your system requires maintenance at specific service intervals in which many of the
maintenance checks should be performed by a qualified service engineer. There are several checks you can perform.
Be aware of required maintenance and the personnel responsible for meeting each requirement.
After-sale service of MR systems under GE warranty or service-contract shall be done by GE engineers or GE-
assigned qualified people.
GE makes available, on request, such information as circuit diagrams and component lists to assist your technical
personnel in the repair of equipment classified by GE as repairable. Where there are no user serviceable parts,
adhere to this warning and refer service to qualified service personnel.

WARNING
Electric shock hazard. No user serviceable parts. Refer service to qualified service personnel.

WARNING
When installing and maintaining the products, follow lockout and tagout procedures, and adhere to MR safety
requirements, high voltage and radio frequency prevention requirements. If these instructions are ignored,
damage to the equipment and patient/personnel injury can result.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-133

SY STEM, CO IL AN D ACCESSO RY MAIN TEN AN CE

General cleaning and disinfection

Cleaning and disinfection of patient contact surfaces is recommended following each use.
Non-patient contact surface cleaning and disinfection should be conducted following internal housekeeping
procedures unless otherwise indicated in the following instructions.

Inspect pads for peeling or cracking. To prevent a biohazard, replace cracked or peeling pads before using.

Cleaning and disinfection recommendations for the MR system, Coils and most Accessor-
ies
Clean with commercially available wipes that contain 0.525% minimum sodium hypochlorite as the only
active ingredient. If commercially available wipes are not available, then follow one of these instructions.
Clean with a lint free cloth saturated with a 1:10 dilution of commonly available bleach containing a
recommended minimum sodium hypochlorite of 5.25%. Dilute the bleach with tap water.
Use a lint free cloth that has been saturated with a 70% isopropyl alcohol solution made from 100%
isopropyl alcohol and 30% tap water.
Use a lint free cloth with a commercially prepared solution of 70% concentration isopropyl alcohol.
Regardless of the method used, inspect to ensure visual cleanliness prior to disinfection. Repeat the
cleaning process until all visible soil has been removed.
Disinfect with commercially available wipes that contain 0.525% minimum sodium hypochlorite as the only
active ingredient following the manufacturer’s instructions. If commercially available wipes are not available,
then follow these instructions.
Disinfect with a lint free cloth, a 1:10 dilution of commonly available bleach containing a recommended
minimum sodium hypochlorite of 5.25%. Dilute the bleach with tap water.
For general disinfection or disinfection following cleaning of blood and/or body fluids, 5 minutes contact
time is recommended.
Refer to internal procedures or refer to publications such as “CDC Guideline for Disinfection and
Sterilization in Healthcare Facilities,” 2008 or latest revision, for guidance. Disinfectant may need to be
reapplied to ensure surfaces remain wet for the duration of the selected contact time.
After you have cleaned and disinfected with bleach (sodium hypochlorite), wipe surfaces with a disposable lint
free wipe that has been dampened with purified water to remove any remaining bleach residue.

CAUTION
To avoid possible damage to equipment, do not use solutions containing amines, strong alkalis, quaternary
ammonium chloride compounds, esters, iodine, aromatic or chlorinated hydrocarbons, or ketones. Do not
use autoclaves or the industrial washers and dryers found in most hospitals or professional laundry services.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-134
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-135

SY STEM MAIN TEN AN CE

Exhaust fan
The magnet (RF-shielded) room exhaust fan, vent, and duct system are intended to evacuate the magnet room of
cryogenic gas at the MR product specified rate. Over time, the exhaust fan system may become blocked with lint,
hair, and other air-borne particles. It is important for personnel safety reasons that the exhaust fan system (vent,
exhaust fan, ducts, etc.) be kept clean to make sure the exhaust fan system operates properly and exhausts
cryogenic gas to an outside area.
In the unlikely event of a magnet quench or a cryogen gas leak, it is important that this exhaust fan system performs
at or above the specified airflow to remove the cryogen gas from the magnet room. The magnet room exhaust fan
and air inlet must be sized for a minimum of 1200 CFM (34 m3/minute) and minimum of room 12 air exchanges per
hour. The minimum air flow and air exchange rate for mobile, transportable, and relocatable systems are different
from those for fixed sites and varies depending on the type of site. Any blockage or obstruction could prevent the
exhaust fan system from providing the required airflow. If the exhaust fan system fails to operate at or above
specification, accumulation of dangerous levels of helium or nitrogen within the RF screen room could occur.
It is important that this exhaust system vent be cleaned regularly as part of the normal room cleaning. Regular
customer inspection, cleaning, and testing of the exhaust fan system (vent, exhaust fan, ducts, etc.) are needed to
make sure all equipment and parts of the system are always in good working order and able to perform to
specification. It is recommended the exhaust fan system be cleaned and inspected annually to make sure the
specified air flow rate can be met and thus ensures proper performance.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-136
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

SY STEM MAIN TEN AN CE

Maintenance services
The planned maintenance (PM1) services prescribed in the PM schedules represent the current manufacturer's
recommendations. Specific customer requirements and/or your site environment may necessitate more or less
frequent intervals for PM service. An agreement to perform PMs less frequently than these recommendations can be
made with the understanding that a reduction of system performance may result.
The PM service schedules in the Maintenance Service Schedules, list all the PM procedures and the frequency they
should be completed by qualified service personnel. There are different schedules for each system type.
You should perform the maintenance services shown in the table below.
Table 2-51: Operator services

Service
Item Required maintenance
interval
General Clean 4 months
Check the table emergency release. 4 months
Patient cradle
Check for cleanliness of pads and clean the inside of the cradle. Daily
and pads
Patient table Check the table alignment and proper operation. 6 months
Coils, pads, and Clean with non-abrasive cleanser. Clean coil anti-skid pads with water
Daily
straps and mild detergent only.
Coils and coil
Check for defects or damage, worn cable or exposed wires. Daily
cables
As
Image quality Perform quality assurance and functional checks.
recommended

1Planned Maintenance

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-137

PROCEDURES

Procedures introduction
This section provides the step-by-step instructions for working safely in a magnetic field environment. Specifically, it
describes how to:

Eliminate Magnet Hazards

Protect the security and exclusion zones
Screen patients and personnel
Prepare the patient
Protect the patient from RF burns
Protect the patient’s eyes and ears
Respond to Emergencies
Patient emergencies
Equipment or environmental emergencies
For magnet quench and cryogen procedures, see Quench and cryogen introduction

IMPORTANT!: You should understand the following definitions before continuing:

A substance that is ferromagnetic has a large positive magnetic susceptibility, meaning it is very easily
magnetized (example: Iron).
An item that is ferrous can posses intrinsic magnetic fields and become a projectile in an applied magnetic
field (examples: Iron, nickel, and cobalt).

Safety checklist
It is recommended that your site develop a safety check list based on your local, regional and country regulations.
This can be used before system acceptance ( site readiness) after installation and should be considered for periodic
review. A check list includes reviewing the following suggested topics:

Safety Areas
Exclusion zone
Security zone
Patient screening
Patient emergencies
Clothing screening of anyone who enters the magnet room
Equipment screening that enters the magnet room
Cleaning supplies for the MR room, equipment, and accessories
Cryogens
Magnets
Gradients
RF

A suggested list of reviewers of the safety check list includes the following:

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-138
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

MR staff
Physicians
Nursing staff
Administrative staff
Service staff
Support staff
Cleaning staff
Fire department
Police department

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-139

PROCEDURES

Protect the security and exclusion zones procedure

It is vital to have supervised and controlled access within the MR environment to keep it safe from ferromagnetic
items and to guard against accidents, injuries, or damage to MR systems. Keep in mind that even a paperclip inside
the bore of the magnet can cause image artifacts or a patient burn. All personnel should be aware of the following
important steps.

1. Keep the door to the MR environment and the magnet door closed.
The doors should not be held open for other people or propped open.
Only essential personnel should be allowed to enter the magnet room.
2. Limit and monitor access to the MR environment and magnet room.
Personnel trained in MR safety should be present at all times during the operation of your MR facility to
ensure that no unaccompanied or unauthorized individuals are allowed to enter the MR environment or
magnet room.
Personnel trained in MR safety are also responsible for performing thorough screening of patients and
other individuals before allowing them to enter the magnet room.
3. Supervise non-MR personnel when working in the magnet room.
Everyone who needs to enter the MR environment on a regular or periodic basis should be educated
regarding the potential hazards related to the magnetic field.
4. Prominently display the Security and Exclusion Zone warning signs to make all individuals and patients aware
of the risks associated with the MR system.
The Security Zone sign must be posted on the entrance to the magnet room.*
These signs warn patients about the strong magnetic field and stresses the presence that no
pacemakers, metallic implants, neurostimulators, or loose objects are allowed.
The Exclusion Zone sign must be posted at the 5 gauss boundary.*
This sign warns against the strong magnetic field and stresses the presence of no pacemakers, metallic
implants, or neurostimulators.

5. Test all items for ferromagnetic properties before taking them into the magnet room.
Use a hand magnet to test items.
6. Remove ferrous items from the immediate vicinity of the magnet room.
This can reduce the chance that someone might carry a ferrous item into the magnet room.
Replace ferrous items that must remain in the vicinity of the magnet room with non-ferrous versions
whenever possible.
7. Tag ferrous items that remain at the facility so that all personnel know the item cannot be taken into the
magnet room.
Tag all ferrous items with the same label to be consistent in identifying items that are not to be in the
magnet room.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-140
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

8. Do a pocket check before entering the magnet room.

Check for loose metal objects, such as keys, and remove.
9. Keep the magnet door in sight at all times.
When working in the magnet room, do not stand between the door and the magnet or turn your back to
the door.
10. Do not turn your back on the patient or anyone else in the magnet room.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-141

PROCEDURES

Screen patients and personnel procedure

For your safety and the safety of the patient, an MR safety-trained health care worker at your facility should carefully
screen for hazards before patients and personnel enter the Exclusion Zone. All personnel must be aware of and
comply with your facility’s screening procedure.

It is recommended to use a ferromagnetic detector as an adjunct to conscientious screening of patients and MR

workers for the reduction of ferrous objects being brought into the magnet room.

WARNING
Patient screening is required for patients who are going to be imaged on an MR scanner.

1. Use a Patient Screening form routinely before bringing patients or other personnel into the Exclusion Zone.
Thoroughly review all safety information and considerations before starting a scan with patients that have
an MR Conditional implant. In general, patients with conductive (e.g. metallic) implants are contraindicated
for MR scans. For patients with implants that are labeled as MR Safe or MR Conditional consult the implant
device manufacturer's documentation.
Every patient, individual, and employee must be carefully screened prior to admission to the magnetic
field. Refer to the Screening form topic.

2. Review the completed screening form and evaluate the individual prior to entry.
Identify circumstances that contraindicate admission to the Exclusion Zone or items that need to be
removed before entering the Security Zone.
In addition to safety issues, metal objects or materials containing metal may distort the magnetic field and
detract from the image quality.

3. Discuss the items on the screening form with the patient or other individual.
Verbally interview the patient to verify the information on the form and ensure the patient understands
each question he/she is answering.
Allow discussion of any question or concern that the patient may have.

4. Examine all patients with diapers or incontinence products, including adults, should have dry diapers on prior
to the start of the scan.
5. Examine or X-Ray patients who are at risk for metal eye slivers.

Serious injury may occur as a result of movement or heating of the metallic foreign body as it is attracted
by the magnetic field of the MR system.
Follow your departmental clinical screening policy.

6. Require that patients change clothes.

Provide clothes without metallic fasteners and pockets.
Patients should not wear shoes into the magnet room as they may have collected metal on the soles.

7. Instruct the patient to wash off non-permanent make-up.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-142
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

Follow the precautions for patients with permanent make-up such as permanent eyeliner, which can
cause tissue heating.

8. Keep metal out of the bore.*

A metal-free bore prevents burns and image artifacts.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-143

PROCEDURES

Prepare the patient procedure

Some patients undergoing an MR procedure may experience feelings of fear, anxiety, or claustrophobia. The following
techniques may help reduce or eliminate these sentiments. Use the following techniques for all patients, even if your
patient does not exhibit signs of fear or claustrophobia. Larger patients can feel anxious due to a confined feeling in
the magnet. Degradation of image quality can also occur. Verify that the patient’s weight does not exceed the table
weight limit as defined in your MR system's documentation. Consult your system operator manual for details.

1. For safety reasons, patients must be thoroughly screened prior to scan preparation.
Screen for pertinent medical history and conditions that contraindicate scanning.
If proper screening cannot be performed, postpone the MR examination until screening can be done.
Review Contraindications for use before scanning the patient.
2. Determine scan protocol and enter the patient’s information in advance.
This saves time during the preparation for the procedure so the patient is not left waiting for the
examination to begin.
3. Provide the patient an information booklet to read.
Educating the patient concerning specific aspects of the MR examination is an effective way to prepare for
the situation and explain what is about to happen.
4. Have the patient use the restroom prior to the examination.
Fewer interruptions during the scanning procedure can help you stay on schedule and keep the patient
focused on holding still during the examination.
5. Examine all patients with diapers or incontinence products, including adults, to make sure the patient has dry
diapers and dry clothing on prior to the start of the scan.
6. Discuss the procedure with the patient.
The length of the examination
What can be seen during the examination
What can be heard during the examination
What can be felt during the examination
7. Transfer the patient to the MR table.
Refer to your specific MR system operator manual for patient transfer details.

CAUTION
Position the patient's limbs, hair, and clothes completely on the table to avoid risk of injury when the table is
moving.

8. Let the patient see the MR system while you explain the features of the bore.

Soft lighting
Good ventilation
A microphone and speaker to enable the patient to hear and be heard at all times

9. Demonstrate the use and function of the Patient Alert System.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-144
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

This system is patient-activated and allow the patient to signal for assistance during a scan.

10. Explain the use of straps. See your system operator manual for details.

11. Ensure the patient is comfortable.

Use sponges and wedges to relieve pressure points and support the body in the correct position.
Ask if a blanket is needed while being aware that once the scan begins, a blanket may increase patient
warming.

12. Explain the need for hearing protection.

Use recommended earplugs (>/= 29dB NRR) to minimize the noise from the gradient magnetic field.
Alternatively, use recommended MR-compatible headphones (>/= 29dB NRR) to provide relaxing music to
the patient and minimize the noise.

13. Stress the need for cooperation to attain a diagnostic study.

It is extremely important the patient not move during the examination.

14. Stay in constant verbal and visual communication with the patient throughout the examination.
Some patients may require the physical presence of an family member or nurse in the magnet room.

15. See the following procedures for details regarding:

Protect the patient from RF burns
Protect patient's eyes and ears
Patient emergencies

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-145

PROCEDURES

Protect the patient from RF burns procedure

All personnel should be aware of several factors to protect a patient from burns and peripheral nerve stimulation.
The following steps should be observed by all personnel that position patients for scanning.

1. Remove any accessory devices from the bore of the magnet that are not required for the procedure.

This includes any unplugged electrically conductive materials such as surface coils, cables, etc.

2. Examine all patients with diapers or incontinence products, including adults, to make sure the patient has dry
diapers on prior to the start of the scan.
3. Position the patient to prevent direct contact between the patient's skin and the bore of the magnet or an RF
surface coil.

Before connecting halves of a split coil, take care that the patient's body (for example, ear, jowl, neck,
finger, hand, etc.) is not trapped or pinched by coil parts.
l Padding is required. To help prevent patient burns, make sure that closed loops are not created by the body of
the patient (e.g., clasped hands, hands touching the body, thighs in contact, and breast tissue contacting the
chest wall).
Figure 2-55: Patient positioned with non-conducting pads

Use additional pads to immobilize the patient and make them comfortable.
Preventing patient warming is one of the most important safety measures you must take into
consideration as you prepare a patient for an MR exam. Appropriate RF padding and proper patient
positioning are the most effective means of preventing injury related to RF heating. The following are a few
golden rules to remember as you position and pad your patients:
Only use GE-approved RF padding.
Use non-conductive padding that is at least 0.25 inches (0.635 cm) thick between the patient's skin and
the magnet bore.
Appropriate padding must be used EVERY time without exception
Sheets and gowns are not a substitute for approved RF padding.
Never allow your patient’s skin to come in direct contact with the scanner bore or any surface coil or
cable.
Never allow skin-to-skin contact.
If a patient does not fit in the MR scanner bore with the required padding, another modality should be
used to scan the patient.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-146
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

While some of these rules may seem a little tough to follow at times, remember that RF injury, which can
in extreme cases include burns such as the one you see below, can happen very quickly and your patient
may not have time to warn you in time to prevent an injury.

Patient padding
Figure 2-56: Elbow RF burn

The following are a tips that will assist you in properly positioning and applying RF padding to your patients.
Should you need more information on prevention of patient warming than what is provided here, refer to
your surface coil and refer to Tissue Heating in this manual. If you need help beyond the documentation
please do not hesitate to reach out to your local Applications Specialists.

Whole body padding

Although the photos are from a Discovery system, the safety padding guidelines apply to all MR systems.

An important consideration when padding your patients is that you will need to double check the
position of the pads once the patient is in the bore. Table movement may dislodge padding and expose
skin to the scanner bore.
Figure 2-57: Padding between patient and bore. 1 = bore pads

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-147

Figure 2-58: Patient padding

Surface coil padding

Although the photos are from a Discovery system, the safety padding guidelines apply to all MR systems.

Padding with a surface coil presents different challenges from a patient RF padding perspective.
First rule of thumb is to remember to use all manufacturer provided padding to prevent motion and the
patient’s skin from coming in contact with the coil, and to also use additional padding if appropriate to
secure an opposing extremity to prevent contact with the coil which could also lead to burns or motion
artifacts.
Just as with the whole body RF padding demonstration, you’ll need to make certain that the patient’s
skin does not come into contact with the scanner bore and that padding is placed between the hands
and thighs to prevent conductive loops.
Figure 2-59: Extremity padding

A final safety consideration for surface coils is to ensure that the patient does not come into contact with
the coil cable, therefore you may need to use additional RF padding to protect the patient.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-148
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

Care should also be taken to ensure the cable is not looped in the bore and that it is routed down the
center of the scanner bore.
Figure 2-60: Coil cable with no loop

Cardiac coil padding

Although the photos are from a Discovery system, the safety padding guidelines apply to all MR systems.

Follow your basic padding recommendations to prevent contact with the scanner bore and prevent
conductive anatomical loops, but there are a couple of additional steps you’ll need to take to ensure
patient safety
The cardiac coil does not require additional RF padding to be placed between the patient and the
anterior coil component, but you should use the manufacturers pad on the posterior component of the
coil for patient RF protection. You should also cover the patient with their gown before placing the
anterior component of the coil and make certain both the anterior and posterior elements are in
alignment.
Figure 2-61: 1 = coil pad aligned with coil, 2 = sheet to cover pad, 3 = anterior and posterior coil elements aligned

Secure the coil snugly, but comfortably with the straps.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-149

Figure 2-62: Coil secured with straps

As is the case of all surface coils ensure that the cables do not come in contact with the patient and
that they are not looped and routed down the center of the bore. As you can see there is significantly
more cable that we need to isolate from the patient, so be sure to use as much padding as needed.
Figure 2-63: 1 = Pad placed between cable and patient skin

If you are using the cardiac coil, it’s likely you are also using the ECG leads and cable. The rules for the
ECG cable are the same as the coil cable. Route the ECG cable down the center of the bore, do not loop
the ECG cable and do not allow it to come in contact with the coil cable.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-150
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

Figure 2-64: 1 = ECG cable with no loops

4. Only use approved RF coils that are not damaged.

Labels such as the one in the figure below, provide warnings about working with RF coils.
Figure 2-65: Warning label

Before using the coil, check the integrity of the electrical insulation of the components or accessories of
the device.

5. Keep electrically conductive material that must remain in the magnet bore from directly contacting the
patient by placing insulation between the conductive material and the patient.

Place a clean cotton sheet over the coil and comfort pad so the patient's skin does not come in contact
with the coil or the comfort pad.

6. Position RF cables down the center and directly out of the bore, without looping or crossing the cables.

Use the cable holders provided to route the cables so there are no loops in any cables in the magnet. Cable
holders are located on both side of the cradle near the edges. Use the appropriate gating cable for surface
coil imaging.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-151

Use only MR system recommended monitoring equipment, ECG leads, wires, electrodes, and other
components and accessories.
For medical devices that are labeled as MR Safe or MR Conditional consult the device manufacturer's
documentation.
Follow all instructions for the proper operation of physiologic monitoring or other equipment provided by
the manufacturer of the device.

7. Test the patient intercom.

Make sure that the patient can hear you and you can hear the patient.

8. Enter the correct patient weight.

Correct weight entries maximize performance and help prevent excessive RF exposure.

9. Turn on the bore light and fan.

Lights turned on inside the bore can help alleviate feelings of claustrophobia.
A fan inside the magnet bore provides adequate air movement for the patient. Keep the fan on at all
times.

10. Show the patient how to use the Patient Alert System.

Patients experiencing uneasiness or concern can squeeze the Patient Alert bulb.
When the Patient Alert bulb is squeezed, an alarm emits a signal to you.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-152
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

PROCEDURES

Protect the patient's eyes and ears procedure

Hearing protection is required. During a scan, all persons in the scan room are required to wear proper hearing
protection to avoid possible hearing impairment. Acoustic levels may exceed 99dBA. Properly worn hearing
protection is required for all people in the magnet room during a scan, including any MR workers.
Patients must close his or her eyes when the alignment light is on during positioning. Follow these guidelines to
ensure proper eye and ear protection for your patient.

1. Provide the patient with hearing protection.

Earplugs or a headphone system with stereo music. For details, see Acoustic Noise.
Earplugs reduce the intensity of the sound, while allowing your patient to hear normal conversations.
Headphone systems soften acoustic noise, but may impede verbal communication with patients while
the system is operating.
Table 2-52: Disposable ear protection

Description dB
E8801BA EAR Disposable Foam
29
Earplugs
E8801BB EAR Taperfit2 Foam
32
Earplugs
E8801BC Max-Lite Foam Earplugs 30

WARNING
Hearing protection is required for all people in the magnet room during a scan to prevent hearing
impairment. Acoustic levels may exceed 99 dB(A)

2. Make sure that the hearing protection device is worn properly.

Earplugs should be comfortable for the patient and inserted fully. Pliable earplugs compress when they are
rolled between the fingers and conform to the ear after they are inserted.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-153

Figure 2-66: Hearing protection

The headphone system should be audible and comfortable for the patient.
3. Instruct the patient to close his or her eyes when the alignment light is on.
The Laser Alignment Lights for patient positioning can cause eye injury.

CAUTION
Turn off the laser light after positioning the patient.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-154
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

PROCEDURES

Patient emergencies procedure

Dealing with patient emergencies requires special planning in the MR environment because of the magnetic field.
Certain equipment used for resuscitation does not function in a magnetic field, and ferrous items can become
projectiles. If a patient needs emergency medical attention during the scanning session, follow these guidelines:

1. Press Emergency Stop on the operator’s console or magnet enclosure.

The scan aborts.
The power disables the patient-handling and scan-related equipment.
2. Notify emergency personnel, if necessary.
Since ferromagnetic life support and related equipment cannot be brought into the magnet room, it must
await the patient outside the magnet room.
3. Quickly bring the patient out of the magnet bore. Refer to your specific product operator manual for details on
cradle emergency release.
4. Transfer the patient onto a non-ferrous gurney or transport and remove the patient from the magnet room
as quickly as possible.
It is important to have an assigned emergency area outside of the magnet room where you can take a
patient so that the emergency team can use the necessary equipment.
5. Follow your facility’s emergency protocol.

WARNING
The Emergency Stop button does not remove the magnetic field, turn off the computer cabinets, operator’s
console, or camera.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-155

PROCEDURES

Equipment or environmental emergencies procedure

If you experience a serious equipment fault (system overheating, smoke, or odor associated with the system) or
hazards such as fire/water in the vicinity of the MR equipment, you may need to perform a system shutdown with
the Emergency Off button. The entire MR system is turns OFF with this button, except for the static magnetic field
and the Magnet Rundown Unit used to shutdown the magnetic field.
Use this procedure to perform an emergency shutdown on your system during an equipment or environmental
emergency.

1. Press the Emergency Off button located on the wall next to the computer equipment or next to the magnet
room door.

This stops power to the magnet room, removing all electrical power from all components of the system.
This button also removes any power sources from UPS devices.

2. Evacuate the patient.

Follow the guidelines in the Patient Emergencies procedure.

3. Evacuate the MR suite.

Follow your facility’s emergency protocol.

4. Call the fire department, if appropriate.

When the fire department arrives, evaluate the need for an emergency MRI magnet quench.
If the firefighters need to take ferromagnetic equipment into the MRI magnet room, quench the magnet.

5. Contact a service engineer before restoring power.

To restore power after an Emergency Off, the main circuit breaker must be reset before rebooting the
system.

6. After service has examined the system, document the correct cause of the emergency.

Keeping the events documented allows you to reference this information in the future and may help
prevent similar incidents.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-156
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

PROCEDURES

Safety review
Table 2-53: Safety review table

Situation Procedure
Fire, sparks, a loud noise or other
Press an Emergency Off button, either in the computer equipment
emergency condition in the magnet
room or at the magnet room door. Remove the patient from the
room not associated with normal
magnet room.
operation of the system.
Magnet quench, indicated by a loud
noise, warning message, dense white
vapor with vent failure, helium meter Evacuate the patient and personnel from the magnet room and
dropping considerably or the tilting of close the magnet room door. Follow your site's overnight
an image on the image screen. procedure. All helium vapor should automatically be vented
outside of the magnet room.
Oxygen monitor is activated indicated
by a loud sound.
Magnetic-field emergency, e.g., a Press the Magnet Rundown button in the magnet room. Remove
person pinned between the magnet the patient from the scan room.
and a ferromagnetic object.
Press an Emergency Off button, either in the computer equipment
Fire, sparks or a loud noise, indicating room or at the magnet room door. Remove the patient from the
a severe system malfunction in the magnet room.
computer equipment room.

Fire or severe condition relating to the Press an Emergency Off button, either in the computer equipment
power distribution unit (PDU) or room or at the magnet room door. Remove the patient from the
service outlets. magnet room.
Overtemp indicator lights up at the Remove the patient from the magnet room. Check the PDU vent
remote power panel (RPP) or at the for obstructions. If the vent is obstructed, or if the overtemp light or
PDU, and an error message appears message remains on, perform a system shutdown and then press
on the scan console’s System Status an Emergency Off button, either in the computer equipment room
Display area. or at the magnet room door.
Press the Emergency Stop button on the console or magnet and
Patient needs medical attention.
remove the patient from the magnet room.
Keep all personnel (including patients) away from any spill. If the
patient is on the table, keep the patient there until safe transfer is
Hydraulic failure of the table. possible. Check for oil leaks and if any exist, clear then up to
prevent anyone from slipping on the oil. Do not use the table for
clinical use until it is repaired.
Imaging functions are lost without Follow your facility’s emergency procedures during this type of
warning. occurrence.

In all cases, notify a GE Service Engineer as soon as possible.

The ACR Guidance Document for Safe MR Practices may be found at ACR.org. GE does not necessarily endorse the
document, but provides the reference for information.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-157

SERVICE SCHEDU L E

PM service schedules introduction

Specific customer requirements and/or your site environment may necessitate more or less frequent intervals for
PM1 service. An agreement to perform PMs less frequently than these recommendations can be made with the
understanding that a reduction of system performance may result.
To further enhance productivity, the PM procedures have been divided into four types:

Type 1 – Safety and Regulatory

Type 2 – Image Quality
Type 3 – Other (System not available for patient scans)
Type 4 – Other (System available for patient scans)

The PM matrices list all the PM procedures and the frequency they should be completed, according to schedules
listed below. The schedules indicate the procedures that are performed during each visit. They also show the type (1
- 4) for each procedure. The services should be completed at the indicated intervals and should be performed only by
qualified service personnel.

Four/year PM schedule

A = 0 to 3 months
B = 4 to 6 months
C = 7 to 9 months
D = 10 -12 months

Click the link below to view the service schedule.

MR system Service PM schedule

SIGNA Premier Planned Maintenance Plan

1Planned Maintenance

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-158
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

SERVICE SCHEDU L E

MR system PM service schedule

The PM1 service schedule lists all the PM procedures and the frequency they should be completed according to
schedules A -D. The checks are on a sequential yearly schedule, for example A is the first three months, B is the
second three months, etc.

A = 0 to 3 months
B = 4 to 6 months
C = 7 to 9 months
D = 10 to 12 months

CAUTION
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in
hazardous radiation exposure.
Table 2-54: 3.0T SIGNA Premier service schedule

Test
Subsystem PM check performed A B C D
purpose
Magnet Room
Magnet Room Oxygen Monitor Operation (Option) Safety X
Magnet Room Cardiac Gating Cable Safety X X
Magnet Room Pneumatic Patient Alert System Safety X X
Magnet Room Checking the emergency exhaust vent Safety X X
Magnet Room PAC Leakage Current Test Safety X
Main Disconnect Panel (MDP) test
Equipment MDP Power & Ground Connection Check Safety X
Cryocooler Compressor test
Equipment Inspect Cryocooler System Check X X
Integrated System Cabinet (ISC)
RF Power UPM Functional Check Safety X
Patient Handling
Patient
Cradle egress functionality Safety X X
Handling
Integrated Cooling Cabinet (ICC)
Gradient
Check fluid levels and top off Check X X X X
Cooling Unit
Gradient
GCU coolant deionization Replace X
Cooling Unit

1Planned Maintenance

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-159

Test
Subsystem PM check performed A B C D
purpose
Cabinet Cooling
Check fluid levels and top off Check X X X X
Unit
Cabinet Cooling
CCU coolant deionization Replace X
Unit
Facility Plumb-
FPU filter check Check X X
ing Unit
ICC Penetration
Body coil blower and air filter Check X X
Panel
ICC Penetration
Patient blower and air filter Check X X X X
Panel
PDU
PDU Emergency Off & Stop Circuits/Indicator Safety X
PDU Power and Ground Connection Checks- Check and tighten all
PDU Safety X
PDU Power and ground connections
Computer
GOC Set time Check X X
GOC Clean dust Clean X X
GOC GOC Battery replacement check Check X
Magnet
Magnet &
Inspect Cryogen Vent Check X
Cryogens
Magnet & Cryo- Test GE Magnet Rundown Unit (MRU). Perform Quarterly Service
Safety X X X X
gens Test found in the MRU manual 5265188 or 46-318393
Magnet & Cryo- Test GE Magnet Rundown Unit (MRU). Perform Yearly Service Test
Safety X
gens found in the MRU manual 5265188 or 46-318393
Magnet &
Inspect SH1 System (Replace Adsorber every 20K hours) Replace X X
Cryogens
Inspect for discoloration the inside of the bore and the front and
Magnet covers Check X
back of the magnet
ICC/ ISC test
Equipment Clean GPDU & SPDU Filter Clean X
Equipment Leak Sensor Functionality Check Safety X
Coil test
Magnet Room P-Port Cleaning and Lubrication Clean X X
Image Quality
Image
Magnet Room Check Magnet shim X X X X
Quality
Image
Magnet Room SNR check X X X X
Quality

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-160
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

Test
Subsystem PM check performed A B C D
purpose
Image
Magnet Room Laser Light Alignment X X
Quality
Image
Magnet Room DQA Calibration X X
Quality
Image
Magnet Room Quadrature Calibration X X
Quality
Confirm that the application software revision installed on the
system is the same or at a later version of the Software revision
required in the "ePM form data" tab that is located in Software
matrix DOC1667089. This document is available from the Common
Documentation Library.
Image Quality Safety X X X X
Confirm that the service pack revision installed on the system is the
same or at a later version than the service pack revision required in
“ePM form data” tab that is located in Software matrix
DOC1667089. This document is available from the Common
Documentation Library.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-161

SERVICE SCHEDU L E

SIGNA™ Premier: Planned Maintenance Plan

GE Healthcare MR Systems Lifecycle Maintenance
GE Healthcare equipment is designed and manufactured to be of the highest quality. Likewise, the maintenance
requirements in the Customer Operations Manual/User Guides, and the Customer Service Manuals, are designed to
help maintain safe, high quality performance of your equipment for its expected life.
GE Healthcare Customer Operations Manual/User Guides and Service Manuals are designed with the intent that
customers or service providers can utilize them to perform standard maintenance on the equipment (such as
planned maintenance, which is typically time-based) without proprietary service tools or methods. Please note,
alternative original equipment manufacturer planned maintenance schedules may be utilized, and other routine
maintenance efficiencies may be attained, based on GE Healthcare’s (or its approved partners’) use of proprietary
service tools and methods, including data analytics and back office capacity. These GE Healthcare proprietary service
tools and methods accomplish the prescribed and necessary routine maintenance activities identified in the
Customer Operations Manual/User Guides or Customer Service Manuals.
Maintenance and repair work shall be carried out by qualified personnel, trained in maintenance and repair of this
medical device in accordance with the manufacturer’s standards within the manufacturing enterprise. Customers
should contact their local GE Healthcare Service Sales if they desire to have GE Healthcare perform the PMs with the
Advanced (Proprietary) Service Methods and OEM1 trained service team.
In addition, GEHC systems have required customer, equipment operational checks that the customer should be
performing on a periodic basis to ensure correct system operation or image quality before scanning. The details can
be found in the Customer Operator Manuals.

1Original Equipment Manufacturer

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

2-162
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 2: Safety

China RoHS label directive

The following product pollution control information is provided according to SJ/T11364: Marking for the Restriction of
the use of Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic Products.

This symbol indicates the product contains hazardous materials in excess of the limits established by the
Chinese standard GB/T 26572: Requirements of concentration limits for certain restricted substances in electrical
and electronic products. The number in the symbol is the Environment-friendly Use Period (EFUP), which indicates
the period during which the toxic or hazardous substances or elements contained in electronic information products
will not leak or mutate under normal operating conditions so that the use of such electronic information products will
not result in any severe environmental pollution, any bodily injury or damage to any assets. The unit of the period is
“Year”.
In order to maintain the declared EFUP, the product shall be operated normally according to the instructions and
environmental conditions as defined in the product manual, and periodic maintenance schedules specified in Product
Maintenance Procedures shall be followed strictly.
Consumables or certain parts may have their own label with an EFUP value less than the product. Periodic
replacement of those consumables or parts to maintain the declared EFUP shall be done in accordance with the
Product Maintenance Procedures.
This product must not be disposed of as unsorted municipal waste, and must be collected separately and handled
properly after decommissioning.
Table 2-55: Table of hazardous substances’ name and concentration (SJ/T 11364).

Hazardous substances' name

Component name
(Pb) (Hg) (Cd) (Cr(VI)) (PVBB) (PBDE)
Magnet X O O X O O
Patient Table X O O X O O
Systems Cabinet X O X X O O
Coils X O O X O O
Global Operating Console (GOC) X O X X O O
Chiller O O O O O O
Accessories (Uninterruptable Power Supply) X O X X X X
LCD Monitor O X O O O O
O: Indicates that hazardous substance contained in all of the homogeneous materials for this part is below the limit
requirement in GB/T 26572.
X: Indicates that this hazardous substance contained in at least one of the homogeneous materials used for this part
is above the limit requirement in GB/T 26572.
Data listed in the table represents best information available at the time of publication.
Applications of hazardous substances in this medical device are required to achieve its intended clinical uses, and/or
to provide better protection to human beings and/or to environment, due to lack of reasonably (economically or
technically) available substitutes.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 2-163

2-164 5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

Chapter 3: Equipment
This chapter includes information related to the MR system hardware.
MR system startup and shutdown and TPS reset
Daily Automated Quality Assurance
Equipment components
System management
Guided Install
iLinq procedure
Connect to Guided Focus Ultrasound system procedure

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-1

STARTU P /SHU TDO W N

System startup and shutdown introduction

This section contains information on how to turn on and off and log into and out of your MRI system. It also includes
quality control information to make sure your system is operating before scanning a patient and how to reset a
subsystem of your scanner to safely recover from errors and various conditions.

Procedures
System startup procedure
System Shutdown procedure
System logon procedure
System emergency logon procedure
System logout procedure
System restart procedure
SIGNA™ Premier: startup from an extended shutdown procedure
SIGNA™ Premier: extended shutdown procedure
Emergency shutdown procedure
SIGNA Premier: emergency stop recovery procedure
TPS reset procedure

DAQA
Scan phantom procedure
SNR test procedure
System test procedure
DAQA trend setting procedure
DAQA messages

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

3-2
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 3: Equipment

STARTU P /SHU TDO W N

System startup procedure

Considerations

For optimum system performance, restart your MR system, at a minimum every three days. It is advisable to
restart your system daily.
There are times during a system startup or reboot, that the MR system executes a thorough file integrity check
(correcting corrupted files, bad blocks, capturing file system information for better analysis of issues, etc.). The
startup or reboot can take as long as 40 minutes. The following criteria determines the check:

If the system is not shut down in an orderly fashion, for example a power outage shuts down the computer.

Procedure
Use these steps to turn on your MR system.

1. Press the on/off button to turn the power on to the computer.

When power is on, the power indicator light is illuminated.
2. Click Start on the GE screen.
If Auto Start is enabled from the Service Browser, the scanner applications automatically begin before a
user logs on. A message displays with a 30 s count-down to logon.
If Auto Start is not enabled, the system is in manual logon mode. The GE screen displays without the timer.
The system waits to start the applications until you click Start. Then, the "Do Not Interact with the
System" message displays followed by the Logon screen.
Figure 3-1: GE screen

3. Wait until all messages are removed from the screen to enter your logon name and password.
a. In the Logon Name field, type your user name.
Check with your system administrator for your specific logon credentials, if you don't know your logon
name.
b. In the Password field, type your password.
Check with your system administrator for your specific logon credentials, if you don't know your
password.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-3

To change the password, click Change Password. Type the old and new passwords as prompted. The
password complexity needed is set by the system administrator.
The Emergency Logon button is only visible if the administrator has enabled the Emergency Logon Allowed
feature from the Application tab.
The Emergency Logon button disabled is the default and the recommended option.
Figure 3-2: Emergency Logon from Application tab

If configured, you are automatically logged off after a period of inactivity. When you or another user logs
back in, the system returns to its last known state.
c. Click Logon.
Note the upper area of the logon screen (GE logo area) changes based on your MR system.
Figure 3-3: Button and text box area of logon screen

If the Penetration Cabinet has been powered off, once power has been restored, wait 20 minutes before you
begin scanning. Allowing 20 minutes for the electronics to warm up results in optimum system performance and
image quality.

Related topics
System startup from an extended shutdown procedure
System restart procedure

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

3-4
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 3: Equipment

STARTU P /SHU TDO W N

System Power Off procedure

Use these power off or overnight mode steps to save energy when the system is not expected to be in use for
extended periods of time, such as evenings, weekends and holidays.

For optimum system performance, restart your MR system, at a minimum every three days. It is advisable to
restart your system daily.

1. Make sure all images have reconstructed and are available for display from the Patient List.
2. End an exam, if necessary.
3. Wait for all post processing, archive, network, filming, CD/DVD, etc. functions to complete.
4. Remove any archive media, if necessary.

5. From the header area of the screen, click the Tools icon arrow and select System Power Off .

6. When prompted, click on the reason for the system shutdown: Daily, Service, Other or Cancel to exit the
shutdown of your system.
The application begins to shut down, which can take less than 15 minutes.
When the shut down is completed, the screen goes blank and the computer turns off.

7. To power on the system, see System startup procedure.

Related topics
System startup and shutdown introduction

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-5

STARTU P /SHU TDO W N

System logon procedures

The logon feature requires you to log on to access your system. Logon and logout is done using a lock-screen. Entering
a username and password opens the lock-screen. If you are not performing a system shutdown when you finish using
the system, you should lock the screen so others can log on. A logout also occurs after a period of inactivity set by
your administrator.
Use these steps to log back in.

1. Type and enter your Logon Name.

Check with your system administrator for your specific logon credentials, if you don't know your logon
name.
2. Type and enter your Password.
Check with your system administrator for your specific logon credentials, if you don't know your password.
3. Click Logon.
Logging off does not prohibit other users from logging in. Logout is designed to protect patient privacy, not
stop approved users from logging in.
When you or another user logs back in, the system returns to its last known state.
Note the upper area of the logon screen (GE logo area) changes based on your MR system.
Figure 3-4: Button and text box area of Startup screen

Related topics
System logout procedure
System emergency logon procedure
System startup and shutdown introduction

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

3-6
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 3: Equipment

STARTU P /SHU TDO W N

System emergency logon procedure

The splash screen may or may not display the Emergency Logon screen. Turning this option on or off is set by your
site administrator. The administrator enables the emergency logon from the EA3 Administration Application tab.
The Emergency Logon button disabled is the default and the recommended option.
Figure 3-5: Emergency Logon Allowed

When using Emergency Logon, you are prompted to enter your name, but there is no password.
Use Emergency Logon only if you do not have a valid account set up.

1. From the Emergency Logon screen, type any name in the Your Name text field.
2. Click Logon. One of two actions occurs:
The screen unlocks and displays the desktop that was last visible right before the screen was locked.
The system starts-up or re-boots.
Figure 3-6: Emergency logon

Related topics
System logout procedure
System startup and shutdown introduction

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-7

STARTU P /SHU TDO W N

System logout procedure

Use these steps to lock the screen and switch the user of the system. When you or another user logs back in, the
system returns to its last known state.

1. From the header area of the screen, click the Tools icon .
2. From the System Management work area, click the Service Desktop Manager tab.

3. From the Service Desktop Manager, click Lock Screen Switch User.
Figure 3-7: Top area of Service Desktop Manager

The Logon screen displays for you to log on to the system.

Only users with valid accounts set up by the system administrator can log on to the system, unless the
Emergency Logon Allowed feature is enabled.

Related topics
System logon procedures
System startup and shutdown introduction

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

3-8
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 3: Equipment

STARTU P /SHU TDO W N

System restart procedure

Considerations
There are times during a system startup or reboot, that the MR system executes a thorough file integrity check
(correcting corrupted files, bad blocks, capturing file system information for better analysis of issues, etc.). The
startup or reboot can take as long as 40 minutes. The following criteria determines the check:

If the system is not shut down in an orderly fashion, for example a power outage shuts down the computer.

Use these steps to restart your MR system.

1. Make sure all of the images have reconstructed and are available for display from the Patient List.
2. Click End Exam, if necessary.
3. Wait for all Archive and Network functions to complete.
4. Remove any archive media, if necessary.

5. From the header area of the screen, click the Tools icon arrow and select System Restart.
It may take up to 30 seconds for the system to respond.
Figure 3-8: Top portion of Tools menu

6. When prompted, click the reason for the system restart: Daily, Service, Other, or Cancel to exit the restart
of your system.
The system displays a blue screen with the icon/status area at the beginning of shutting down.
Wait for the Welcome to... logon window to appear. This indicates restart completion.

Related topics
System startup and shutdown introduction

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-9

STARTU P /SHU TDO W N

SIGNA™ Premier: startup from an extended shut-

down procedure
Use these steps if you have performed an System extended shutdown procedure.

The equipment room is typically used by service engineers to service the equipment. Use caution when inside
the equipment room.

Do NOT open any GE MRI System Cabinets or protective covers. There are dangerous high voltages within the
cabinets.
There are several Cabinets and components within the equipment room used by the GE MRI System.

The Main Disconnect Panel (MDP) is the in-coming Power for the MRI System. Do NOT turn off power to this
component.
The ISC1 contains the Cryogen Cooler, system and gradient PDU2 .
Figure 3-9: ISC cabinet

Table 3-1: Image legend

# Description
1 ISC cabinet
2 ISC cabinet power controls: breaker, EMO Reset (green button) and Power OFF (red button)

1. From the ISC cabinet power controls, complete the following:

a. Reset the breaker. Move the breaker from the intermediate to reset position (fully horizontal).

1Integrated System Cabinet

2Power Distribution Unit

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

3-10
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 3: Equipment

b. Move the breaker to the On position (fully vertical).

c. Press the EMO Reset button.
The EMO Reset button turns on power to the high voltage components and results in a blower and relay
noise.
2. If the computer does not automatically turn on, then complete the steps in the Standard startup procedure.

Related topics
System startup procedure
System restart procedure
System Power Off/On procedure
System startup and shutdown introduction

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-11

STARTU P /SHU TDO W N

SIGNA™ Premier: extended shutdown procedure

Use these steps to execute an extended power shut down once the computer has successfully shutdown and the
computer power is off.

The equipment room is typically used by service engineers to service the equipment. Use caution when inside
the equipment room.

Do NOT open any GE MRI System Cabinets or protective covers. There are dangerous high voltages within the
cabinets.
The Main Disconnect Panel (MDP) is the in-coming Power for the MRI System and Cryogen Cooler. Do NOT turn off
power to this component. The Cryogen Cooler cabinet must remain on to keep the helium at the proper temperature
to maintain correct magnet pressure.

1. Confirm that the computer is turned off.

2. From the ISC1 cabinet lower left corner, press the red POWER OFF button.
The ISC contains the system PDU2 and Gradient PDU.
The ICC3 contains the Cryogen Cooler.

3. From the ISC cabinet power controls, move the breaker to the Off position (fully horizontal).

The cabinet still has incoming power even after the breaker is turned off.
Figure 3-10: ISC cabinet

1Integrated System Cabinet

2Power Distribution Unit
3Integrated Cooling Cabinet

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

3-12
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 3: Equipment

Table 3-2: Image legend

# Description
1 ISC cabinet
2 ISC cabinet power controls: breaker, EMO Reset (green button) and Power OFF (red button)

Related topics
Emergency shutdown procedure
System startup and shutdown introduction

STARTU P /SHU TDO W N

Emergency shutdown procedure

System overheating, smoke, or odor associated with the system are good reasons for an emergency power down.

1. Press any Emergency Stop button (magnet cover, or keyboard) to remove power from the magnet room.
2. Evacuate the patient and all other personnel from the MRI suite.
3. Call service.
4. After service has examined the system, the cause of the emergency should be written down for future
reference.
5. After service has approved a system restart, follow these steps:
SIGNA Premier: emergency stop recovery procedure

The MR Safety chapter contains more instructions on responding to patient emergencies.

Related topics
System logon/logout procedures
System startup and shutdown introduction

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-13

STARTU P /SHU TDO W N

SIGNA™ Premier: emergency stop recovery procedure

Use these steps to recover normal system operation after an emergency-stop has occurred. For emergency stop
details, see Emergency shutdown procedure.

1. Go into the equipment room and locate the ISC cabinet.

The equipment room is typically only used by service engineers to service the equipment. Use caution
when inside the equipment room.

Do NOT open any GE MRI System Cabinets or protective covers. There are dangerous high voltages
within the cabinets.

2. From the ISC cabinet, press the green EMO Reset button.
Figure 3-11: ISC cabinet

Table 3-3: Image legend

# Description
1 ISC cabinet
2 ISC cabinet power controls: breaker, EMO Reset (green button) and Power OFF (red button)

3. Return to the operator console and complete a TPS Reset. for details, see TPS reset procedure.
4. After the TPS Reset is finished, the emergency-stop condition should be recovered. If the emergency-stop
condition remains after the TPS Reset is finished, call your service engineer.

Related topics
System startup and shutdown introduction

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

3-14
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 3: Equipment

STARTU P /SHU TDO W N

TPS reset procedure

Use these steps to reset the TPS when instructed by either a system message or an InSite technician.

1. In the header area of the screen, click the Tools icon to display the System Management work
area.
2. Click the Service Desktop Manager tab.
3. From the Service Desktop Manager, click TPS Reset.
TPS reset aborts realtime or normal scanning.
During TPS Reset, the Scan desktop and Graphic Viewport are locked. This means that you cannot
view/edit, save, cut, copy, paste, or download any series in the Workflow Manager.
The Rx state may change after a TPS reset.
The following warning message is displayed after TPS Reset has been selected if all images have not been
reconstructed, "Image reconstruction is in progress. Pending images may be lost. Are you sure you want to
start TPS Reset?".
For a multi-station group, if some (not all) series in that group have been scanned and then TPS Reset is
started, all the series in that group will be locked and they cannot be downloaded or scanned again.
4. Click OK.
The TPS reset aborts reconstruction of pending images, Manual Prescan, Auto Prescan, Spectroscopy
Prescan, Reference Scan, Prep Scan, and Normal Scan.
The bore fans and lights turn off during the TPS reset. When the reset completes, bore fans and lights
return to their previous state.
5. Wait for the "TPS successfully reset" message in the system status display message box.
If the TPS reset fails, the following messages display:
"TPS Reset Failed. Please see the message log for more details".
"TPS/APG communication failed (s) A re-download of TPS may be necessary."
Click OK to acknowledge your response to the message.
If the TPS reset fails two consecutive times, the exam is automatically ended.
6. Continue scanning where the system left off.

Related topics
System restart procedure
System startup and shutdown introduction

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-15

P HAN TO M SCAN

About phantom scan

When prescribing a phantom scan, in the New Patient area of the Worklist Manager, type 111 lbs (or 50 kg) as the
patient weight.

A higher weight than 50 kg for the phantom scan could cause system damage.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

3-16
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 3: Equipment

DAQA

Scan phantom procedure

The DAQA1 procedure provides a means for you to track overall system or RF2 coil functionality. The application
supports all GE coils that have the coil ID feature.

Considerations

To obtain meaningful, reproducible data for a given RF coil, consistency and repeatability is key. Always use the
same phantom, the same positioning of the phantom in the coil and the same landmark at the same location on the
phantom/coil.
Table 3-4: Phantoms used in DAQA tests

Phantom name
Head TLT
Body TLT phantom sphere
Body TLT Loader

1. Set up the desired coils and the phantom on the table. The coil and phantom you choose will depend on
whether you are going to perform the SNR or System test.

a. Place the coil on top of the cradle and place the phantom holder and phantom inside the coil.
Figure 3-12: Example of the TDI Head Neck Array coil

b. If you are using the body coil, use the Body TLT phantom and Loader. Follow the pictorial guidelines below
to transport the phantom.

1Daily Automated Quality Assurance

2Radio Frequency

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-17

Figure 3-13: Correct phantom transportation

Figure 3-14: Incorrect phantom transportation

2. Landmark the coil and phantom.

3. Press Advance to Scan.

4. From the Worklist Manager, click the New Patient icon to begin a scan.
5. In the New Patient area of the Worklist Manager, type geservice as the patient ID and 111 lbs (or 50 kg) as
the patient weight.

A higher weight than 50 kg for the phantom scan could cause system damage.
6. Click Show Protocols to open the Protocol screen.
7. Move a 3-plane localizer protocol from the Protocol list to the Multi-Protocol Basket and click Accept. For
example, click Template > 3-Plane 2D Localizer > FGRE.
8. Click Start Exam.
9. Scan the 3-plane localizer.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

3-18
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 3: Equipment

10. When complete, click End Exam from the scan session tab.
11. Perform either the SNR or System test.

Related topics
DAQA trend setting procedure
System startup and shutdown introduction

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-19

DAQA

SNR test procedure

The phantom remains in the magnet for this test. This test can be run with a variety of coil/phantoms/holders, but it
will fail if you do not have the right combination.

1. Open the Service Desktop Manager.

2. From the Service Desktop Manager, click Service Browser.
3. From the Image Quality tab, select Daily Automated Quality Assurance.
4. Click Click here to start this tool to open the tool and click OK to the prompt(s).
5. Verify that the Ghosting Level and Geometric Accuracy option is not selected.
6. Verify the currently connected RF1 coil is displayed in the Selected Coil field.
If there is more than one coil configuration for the connected coil, select the desired coil configuration from
menu.
If a coil is not plugged in, the tool will list the Body coil.
7. From Select Scan Plane menu, choose the desired SNR testing plane.
8. Click Start to initiate the test.
The Abort button stops data acquisition/post-processing before completion. When selected, the system
may take up to 30 seconds to complete the abort process.
If the connected RF coil is changed after the DAQA tool has started, selecting the Start button displays a
"Coil not Valid" message. Click OK and the tool refreshes the main user interface with the information of
the new connected coil. Confirm the UI settings and click Start again to begin data acquisition.
9. Click Yes in the "Confirm!" window to acknowledge phantom placement and landmark.
A progress bar indicates the status.
The system collects one signal image and one noise image and displays the values for signal, noise, SNR,
Transmit Gain (TG) in 0.1dB units and the center frequency (CF) in units of Hz in the Test Complete
window.
10. Record the results and click OK to the prompt.
11. Click Exit.

Related topics
System test procedure
DAQA trend setting procedure
DAQA messages
System startup and shutdown introduction

1Radio Frequency

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

3-20
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 3: Equipment

DAQA

System test procedure

The DAQA1 System test is run using the head TLT2 sphere and one of the following coils:

GE T/R split-top head

48-channel brain
TDI HNA

If you do not use the head TLT sphere placed in the appropriate positioner (pad or holder) and centered
properly, then the test will fail.

1. Open the Service Desktop Manager.

2. From the Service Desktop Manager, click Service Browser.
3. From the Image Quality tab, select Daily Automated Quality Assurance.
4. Click Click here to start this tool to open the tool and OK to the prompt(s).
5. Select the Ghosting Level and Geometric Accuracy option.
The Selected Coil and Selected Scan Plane fields are unavailable.
6. Click Start to initiate the test.
The Abort button stops data acquisition/post-processing before completion. When selected, the system
may take up to 30 seconds to complete the abort process.
If the connected RF coil is changed after the DQA tool has started, selecting the Start button displays a
"Coil not Valid" message. Click OK and the tool refreshes the main user interface with the information of
the new connected coil. Confirm the UI settings and click Start again to begin data acquisition.
7. Click Yes to the "Confirm!" message to acknowledge the correct coil and phantom use.
8. Click Yes in the next "Confirm!" message to acknowledge the phantom placement and landmark.
A progress bar indicates the status.
The system acquires three signal images from all three planes and one axial noise image. The axial signal
image is used to calculate center frequency, transmit gain, SNR, ghosting, and geometric accuracy. The
noise image is used to calculate SNR. The sagittal and coronal images are used to calculated geometric
accuracy. The results display in the Test Complete window.
9. Record the results and click OK to the prompt.
10. Click Exit.

Related topics
SNR test procedure
System test procedure
DAQA trend setting procedure
DAQA messages

1Daily Automated Quality Assurance

2Top Level Test

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-21

System startup and shutdown introduction

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

3-22
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 3: Equipment

DAQA

DAQA trend setting procedure

Use these steps to view the trends of your DAQA tests.

1. Open the Service Desktop Manager.

6. Click one of the coils and one of the items in the Result File list to view the trend graph.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-23

Figure 3-16: Trend graph

7. Click any of the available option buttons to view a unique graph, which is representative of the option label.
8. Click Close to close the Trend Viewer screen.

Related topics
SNR test procedure
System test procedure
System startup and shutdown introduction

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

3-24
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 3: Equipment

DAQA

DAQA messages
The following table displays the content of DAQA messages.
# Message
A different coil is connected! Please re-select the coil and plane before hitting [Start].Coil not
1.
valid.
A different coil is connected! This coil is also not supported by Daily QA Tool. Please plug in a
2.
valid supported coil before hitting [Start].Coil not valid.
3. Aberration Geometric Distortion
4. Abort
5. ATP execution has hung, please check atp process or the scanner hardware
6. but was called with incorrect input arguments., ...
Center not within the object. This algorithm works best for convex objects. Very likely that your
7.
results are in error
8. Center Frequency
9. Close
10. Coil configuration notice
11. Daily Automated Quality Assurance
12. Daily QA Tool aborted on date_time
13. Do you really want to abort the current scan?','Abort?
14. ERROR
15. Error building SVAT file for manual prescan.
16. Error building SVAT file to load the protocol.
17. Error editing the protocol for COIL
18. Error editing the protocol for FOV
19. Error editing the protocol for GRADMODE
20. Error editing the protocol for PLANE
21. Error editing the protocol for SWAPPF
22. Error executing the SVAT script to load the protocol.
23. Error executing the SVAT script to run Auto-Prescan.
24. Error executing the SVAT script to run first image scan.
25. Error executing the SVAT script to run Manual-Prescan.
26. Error executing the SVAT script to run second image scan.
27. Error from get_coilid function.
28. Error from read_coil_id_list function.
29. Error with abort_svat function
30. ERROR with APS_EVENT svat command

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-25

# Message
31. ERROR with DOWNLOAD svat command
32. ERROR with DOWNLOAD svat command, scanner busy
33. ERROR with IPG_ADVANCE_TOSC svat command
34. ERROR with LOADPROTOCOL svat command
35. ERROR with MODIFY_CV svat command
36. ERROR with MPS_SCAN_TR svat command
37. ERROR with NEW_EXAM svat command
38. ERROR with PROTOCOL_DIR svat command
39. ERROR with PROTOCOL_MODE svat command
40. ERROR with PSC_UPDATE_VAL svat command
41. ERROR with RECON_STOPPED svat command
42. ERROR with RESET_SCAN svat command
43. Error with reset_svat function
44. ERROR with SCAN_EVENT svat command
45. ERROR with START_LOOP_EVENT svat command
46. ERROR with STOP_LOOP_EVENT svat command
47. Error with table_wait_time function
48. ERROR with VIEW_EDIT svat command
49. Error! Cannot find the phantom!
50. Error! Two test images do not have the same size!
51. Exit
52. Ghosting Level
53. Ghosting Level & Geometric Accuracy
54. Images: too Few Inputs
55. Images: too Many Inputs
56. Incomplete Rx, please check coil and landmark
57. Max
58. Maximum Geometric Distortion
59. Mean
60. Min
61. No
62. No P files found!!!
63. No valid landmark
64. Noise
Note: Phantom placement and coil landmarking are critical for repeatable results. Verify coil
65. and phantom are properly placed and landmarked at correct location. Also verify there are no
large air bubbles in the phantom. Do you wish to continue?

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

3-26
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 3: Equipment

# Message
66. OK
Only system configuration is allowed for ghosting level option. Make sure you landmark on this
67.
configuration or unselect ghosting level option. SNR is measured on Axial plane
68. Please Select a DAQA history file
69. Please select the coil ! Select Coil
70. Please select the coil and scan plane!.Select Coil & Plane
Please wait at least 15 minutes before scanning to prevent swirling artifacts. Do you wish to
71.
continue?
72. Please wait while the DAQA initializes..
73. Protocol download failed
74. Result Files
75. Scale Geometric Distortion
76. Select coil
77. Select Scan Plane
78. Signal
79. SNR
80. Standard Deviation
81. Start
82. Success: Center within the object!!!
83. Sufficient Data is not available for trending. Atleast two runs of the DAQA tool is required.
84. Table check has hung, please check table_feedback process or the scanner hardware
85. Test Completed
86. Test Completed
87. Test Completed! Results are recorded in output file
Test proceeds without at least 15-minute waiting time. Test result might not be stale','Test
88.
proceeds without enough waiting time
The current coil is not supported by Daily QA Tool. Please plug in a valid supported coil before
89.
hitting [Satrt].Coil not valid.
90. There is not that many files listed !!!
91. There might be artifacts on the test images or you are not using homogeneous phantoms!
92. Transmit Gain
93. Trend Data
94. Trend Viewer
95. Wait for a minute after moving the table
96. Yes
You chose to include ghosting level and geometry accuracy in addition to SNR in the test. The
97. test will use connected coil configuration and 17 cm sphere phantom with loader if Head Coil is
used, otherwise 17 cm sphere phantom without loader. Do you want to continue?

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-27

# Message
You chose to include ghosting level and geometry accuracy in addition to SNR in the test. The
98. test will use connected coil configuration and 27 cm sphere phantom with a loader. Do you
want to continue?
You chose to use connected coil configuration and Axial plane. Please make sure that you use a
99. 17 cm sphere phantom with loader if Head Coil is used, otherwise 17 cm sphere phantom
without loader. Do you want to continue?

Related topics
SNR test procedure
System test procedure
System startup and shutdown introduction

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

3-28
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 3: Equipment

EQ UIP MEN T CO MP O N EN TS

Equipment components introduction

This section helps you to become familiar with your MR system, including the system components and hardware.

Concepts
Computer concept
Emergency Stop and Abort scan buttons concept
Equipment cabinet room concept
Gradient coils concept
In-room Display concept
Keyboard concept
Magnet controls concept
Mouse controls concept
PAC concept
SIGNA Premier: PAC for eXpress mobile table concept
Patient alert system concept
RF coils concept
SIGNA™ Premier: stationary table concept
SIGNA Premier eXpress mobile table concept
Base plate for SIGNA Premier eXpress mobile table
Workstation introduction
SIGNA™ Premier: system specifications concept

TDI coils
TDI coil suite introduction
Safety concept
Coil configurations concept
TDI coil workflow
PA, AA, and PVA component patient position procedure
PA, Head Neck Array, and AA component patient position procedure
PA component patient position procedure
Two AA components patient position procedure
Whole body patient position procedure

Procedures

Coil
RF coils introduction
Connect coils procedure
Coil malfunction considerations
Coil signal non-uniformity considerations

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-29

In-room monitor
In-Room Display concept
In-Room display coil screen
In-Room display gating screen
In-Room display patient setup screen
In-Room display scan time and table location screen
Setup In-Room display procedure
Reset In-Room monitor touch screen procedure
Set-up patient information from In-Room Display procedure

Patient comfort
Patient alert procedure
Patient comfort procedure

Others
Magnet Rundown Unit test procedure
Phantom breakage causing spillage considerations
Dock and undock the table procedure

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

3-30
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 3: Equipment

EQ UIP MEN T CO MP O N EN TS

Workstation introduction
The workstation monitor displays images and scan, display, archive, network, service, and iLink programs. It also
displays protocol notes and physiological waveforms when they are activated. AutoView is always displayed in the
upper right area of the monitor. All routine operations are carried out from this workstation monitor.
The monitor can be raised and lowered, tilted forward or backward, or rotated left to right. Adjust the monitor's
height and tilt for a comfortable viewing position.
Figure 3-17: MR Workstation

Related topics
Computer concept
Keyboard concept
Mouse controls concept
Equipment components introduction

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-31

EQ UIP MEN T CO MP O N EN TS

Computer concept
The computer is located in the cabinet stored below the desk.
Figure 3-18: System computer

Table 3-5: Image legend

# Description
Insert a pin or ballpoint pen to press the button in the hole to reset the computer when the on/off
1
button doesn't work.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

3-32
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 3: Equipment

# Description
2 USB ports that can be used when exporting images or importing jpgs to add to a Protocol Note.
3 Power on button.
The CD/DVD drive that is used by service to install software and the operator manual.
4 The Read/Write CD/DVD drive is used to burn CDs or DVDs when using the CD/DVD for image
storage, the Data Export, or the Protocol Exchange options.

Procedure
System startup procedure
System Power Off/On procedure

Related topics
Equipment components introduction

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-33

EQ UIP MEN T CO MP O N EN TS

Keyboard concept
The keyboard contains all the keys you would find on any computer keyboard along with a few specialized buttons
along the top. Standard keyboard keys and their functions include:

Delete or Backspace erases characters

Enter confirms what is typed or selected
Tab moves across the areas on the current screen
Up or Down arrow keys move between text boxes or adjust window width or window level
Figure 3-19: Keyboard auxiliary keys

Table 3-6: Keyboard

# Selection Description
1 Emergency Disables all electrical power sources near the patient. It shuts down the RF1,
Stop gradient amplifier, table movement, shim power supply, and main MRI magnet
power supply cabinets. It will not quench the magnet or turn off the computer.
2 eIFU The eIFU symbol located by the Emergency Stop button indicates that there
are electronic instructions for use on your MR system. For details, see online

1Radio Frequency

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

3-34
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 3: Equipment

# Selection Description
help.
Figure 3-20: eIFU symbol

3 Volume Regulates the patient in bore volume for the patient communication system.
Control
4 Talk Activates the intercom system so you can speak to the patient inside the bore.
Press to talk, release to listen.
5 Volume Regulates the MR operator console volume for the patient communication
Control system.
6 Start Scan Resumes scanning after pause or breath hold techniques.
7 Pause Scan Stops the scan temporarily.
8 Stop Scan Aborts a scan or prescan. Scan data is not saved or reconstructed.
9 Move to Moves the cradle to scan position when pressed.
Scan
10 Stop Move Stops the cradle movement when pressed.
11 PC Icons Inactive.
12 Function Activates shortcuts in certain features.
Keys

Related topics
Computer concept
Equipment components introduction

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-35

EQ UIP MEN T CO MP O N EN TS

Mouse controls concept

The mouse is a hand-operated device that you maneuver across the surface of a pad. As you move it, the on-screen
cursor mimics the movement of the mouse, allowing you to move among windows and menus. For instance, moving
the mouse to the right causes the on-screen cursor to move to the right. The mouse is used to make selections by
clicking the left, right, and middle buttons.
Figure 3-21: Mouse

Table 3-7: Mouse image legend

# Description
1 Left button
2 Middle button
3 Right button
For mouse button actions see About this manual.

Related topics
Computer concept
Keyboard concept
Equipment components introduction

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

3-36
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 3: Equipment

EQ UIP MEN T CO MP O N EN TS

Equipment cabinet room concept

The equipment cabinet room houses the PDU1, RF2 power amplifiers, gradient amplifiers, and system control
cabinets. The cooling cabinet, shield cooler compressor, and other equipment is also located here. This room is often
referred to as the Computer room because it used to house the computer; however, the computer is now in the
console room.
This room is usually kept at very cool temperature in order to keep the equipment operating normal. If you have any
questions about the temperature settings, or the equipment kept in this room, please consult your service engineer.

Related topics
Equipment components introduction
Gradient coils concept

1Power Distribution Unit

2Radio Frequency

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-37

EQ UIP MEN T CO MP O N EN TS

Gradient coils concept

The gradient coils are three sets of wire coils wrapped around a fiberglass cylinder located within the magnet
housing. Electric current flows through the coils and is turned on and off very rapidly, thereby producing expansion
and contraction of the gradient coils. This expansion and contraction creates the tapping sound when scanning. It is
commonly measured in gauss per centimeter.
Each coil affects a different plane (the XY, YZ, or XZ plane), as it is turned on and off at different points in a pulse
sequence. The scan plane and pulse sequence selected determine which gradient functions as the slice selective,
phase encoding, and frequency encoding gradient. The system calculates this automatically.
The gradients are resistive magnets and are water cooled by the gradient chiller located in the Equipment cabinet
room.
Figure 3-22: Cut away of gradient coil inside the body coil

Related topics
Equipment components introduction
RF coils concept

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

3-38
© 2021 General Electric Company
Chapter 3: Equipment

EQ UIP MEN T CO MP O N EN TS

RF coils introduction
Imaging coils are tuned to match the precessional frequency of nuclei under evaluation. Generally, the length of coil is
equal to the FOV1 the coil covers. The depth of penetration is governed by the coil elements. When selecting a coil,
keep in mind the FOV, how deep you need to image, and the size of the patient. Phased array and surface coils need
to be placed close to the area of interest. The broad category of imaging coils can be classified into two categories:

transmit and receive coils

receive only coils

Each coil, other than the body coil, has an operator manual. Refer to the coil operator manual when setting up
the patient for an exam.

Head coil
The TDI Head Neck Array is a receive only coil.
It provides higher SNR2 than the Body coil due to the smaller size. It is used primarily to image the head, although
they can be used for imaging any body part that fits into the coil. It is an example of a volume (uniform depth of
signal) coil.
Figure 3-23: TDI Head Neck Array

Body coil
The Body coil is a transmit/receive volume coil used for large FOV imaging and for uniform depth penetration. The
Body coil is located within the magnet enclosure and is invisible to you and the patient. The Body coil can also act as
a transmit only coil when used with receive only coils.

Surface coil
Surface coils are receive only coils that can be either single or multiple channels. Phased array (multi-channel) coils
have a number of coil elements combined together to increase SNR, and depending on the coil design, may increase
available FOV (either length or depth) without decreasing SNR. Flat surface and phased array coils do not have
uniform depth penetration.
The transmit mode of the coil appears on a label adhered to the coil. A T/R label refers to a transmit/receive coil.

1Field Of View
2Signal-to-Noise Ratio

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-39

There are some coils commonly referred to as surface coils, such as the Knee coil, that are in fact
transmit/receive coils. Therefore, technically, they are not a surface coil.
Multi-channel surface coils can help you improve productivity, a crucial consideration in today’s competitive scanning
environments. These devices can be optimized for parallel imaging techniques, improved SNR, and can provide better
image resolution. Parallel imaging techniques, like ASSET or ARC, reduce scan times, which can decrease patient
exam times. Reduced coil diameter together with multi-channel phased array elements over a given volume increase
SNR and thereby resolution.
Figure 3-24: Example of a surface coi: 16-channel flex coil

Procedures
Connect coils procedure
Patient position procedure

Considerations
Coil malfunction consideration
Coil signal non-uniformity considerations

Related topics
Equipment components introduction

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

EQ UIP MEN T CO MP O N EN TS

Connect coils procedure

Coils can be plugged into coil ports located at either the foot or the head end of the table. All coils have a coil ID.
There are two purposes for Coil ID: matching the coil plugged in with the selected coil in the prescription, and
checking if the coil is properly seated in the port.

Multi-channel coils
1. Place the lock face in the unlock position.
2. Insert the coil plug into a port located at either the head or the foot end of the table.
Transmit/receive coils can only be plugged into Port 2 (labeled P2).
Figure 3-25: Head end of table has two coil ports (P1 and P2) coil ports and foot end of table has two coil ports (P3 and P4)

3. Lock the connector plug by rotating the spindle handle until the Lock symbol is visible.
Figure 3-26: P connector, 1 = unlock, 2 = lock

Related topics
Coil Selections screen
Equipment components introduction
RF coils

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-41

EQ UIP MEN T CO MP O N EN TS

Coil malfunction consideration

Coil decoupling mechanisms are circuits activated by diodes to prevent RF1 currents from flowing in the receive-only
coil during transmission from the Body coil. This results in local distortion of the transmit field and signal intensity
variations within the image.
If you suspect a coil malfunction, consult your service engineer and discontinue use of the coil.
Figure 3-27: Coil malfunction

Related topics
Equipment components introduction
Annefact artifact
Shading artifact
Star artifact
Coil signal non-uniformity considerations

1Radio Frequency

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

EQ UIP MEN T CO MP O N EN TS

Coil signal non-uniformity considerations

The RF1 receiver detects signals closest to it most efficiently. This characteristic may cause a non-uniformity of signal
in the image. The effect is more pronounced with surface coils than with volume coils, appearing as localized bright
areas close to the coil. Signal variability may also result in incomplete fat suppression when chemical fat suppression
techniques are used.
To minimize the chance of non-uniformity of signal in a coil:

try a different coil or use a STIR sequence rather than trying additional fat saturation techniques
apply a coil intensity correction technique, such as PURE2 or SCENIC3 .

PURE or SCENIC can be used with compatible surface coils

PURE can also be used with the 8-channel transmit/receive high resolution MRI Devices Knee coil
Figure 3-28: 1 = NONE, 2 = PURE, 3 = SCENIC

Related topics
Equipment components introduction
Coil malfunction consideration

Artifacts
Annefact artifact considerations
Shading artifact considerations
Star artifact considerations
Surface coil artifact considerations

1Radio Frequency
2Phased array UnifoRmity Enhancement
3Surface Coil ENhancement for Imaging Clarity

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-43

TDI CO IL SUITE

TDI coil suite introduction

Medical Device Directive
These products conform with the requirements of council directive 93/42/EEC concerning medical devices, when
they bear the following CE Mark of Conformity:

The year of CE Marking is 2015.

Manufacturer
GE Healthcare Coils
1515 Danner Drive
Aurora, Ohio 44202-9273
USA

The TDI Coil Suite is a multi-purpose and receive-only coil designed for use with:

SIGNA™ Premier

The TDI Coil Suite is comprised of multiple components:

TDI Head Neck Array comprised of

Posterior component
Anterior component
Adaptor block
TDI Posterior Array
3.0T AA (Anterior Array)
3.0T GEM PVA

For details, see Coil configurations.

This rigid coil system incorporates soft, flexible components that conform to a patient's anatomy, accommodating
various body contours while minimizing patient discomfort. The Head Neck Array includes the Posterior component,
Anterior component, and an adapter block.
The coil suite also contains a Head Filler section. This filler is used to keep the table surface even with the coil
surface, which is necessary for patient comfort. The Head Filler is used when the Head Neck Array Posterior is not
being used to scan a patient.
The TDI Coil Suite allow multiple scans of patient’s head, neck, brachial-plexus, spine, pelvis, hips, prostate,
abdominal, cardiac, lower extremities, blood vessels, or long bone imaging without repositioning the patient and
changing coils. The TDI coils can support both head first and feet first torso imaging without moving the PA coil.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

Indications for use

The TDI Coil Suite is a set of RF surface coils designed for use with 3.0T MRI systems manufactured by GE. The TDI
Coil Suite is indicated for use for: head, neck, brachial-plexus, spine, pelvis, hips, prostate, abdominal, cardiac, lower
extremities, blood, vessels, or long bone imaging. The nucleus excited is hydrogen.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-45

TDI CO IL SUITE

TDI coil workflow

Use this workflow when scanning with coils from the TDI coil suite.

Considerations
The number of slices per acquisition or for a given TR and the Minimum TR may improve for some PSDs if you
only use the PA and Head Neck Array coils alone rather than connecting them to other coils such as the AA or
PV coils. Therefore, if you are not acquiring images in the abdomen, heart, or lower leg use the Head Neck
Array coil and PA coil.

TDI coil classification

It is a Type BF applied part.

It is suitable for continuous operation.
The IP Rating for the coil is IPX0. Ordinary equipment. Not rated against water ingress protection.
It is a non-sterile device.
The equipment is not suitable for use in the presence of a flammable anesthetic mixture with air or with
oxygen or nitrous oxide.
The voltage rating of the coil is 10VDC maximum.

All surface areas of the coil, except the bottom surface that sits on the patient table, are considered applied parts
and may come into direct contact with the patient. Pads and/or thermal-resistant materials should be used to
prevent the coil surfaces from touching the patient.
Pads and/or thermal-resistant material must be used to ensure the patient cannot touch the coil cable and
connectors.

1. Register the patient and start an exam.

2. Set up the coil components necessary to scan the region of interest and position the patient in the
appropriate orientation and with the necessary coil components for the region(s) of interest.
PA, Head Neck Array, and AA component patient position procedure
PA component patient position procedure
PA, AA, and PVA component patient position procedure
Two AA components patient position procedure
Whole body patient position procedure

Ensure that all components on the table are plugged in before scanning.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

WARNING
Prior to patient placement in the coil, assure that any breached or compromised patient skin surfaces that
come in contact with the coil have been adequately bandaged or covered.

WARNING
Do not allow the coil cables to touch the patient. Use a thermal resistant material or pad to keep the cable
from touching the patient. Failure to comply may cause patient burns.

CAUTION
Ensure that no hair or fabric is caught between the components. Failure to comply may cause artifacts and
decreased image quality.

Coil CAUTION
Looped cables may cause RF coupling and degrade the scan performance of the coil. Do not cross or loop
cables.

3. If using the AA coil, consider the following:

For head-first patient orientation, the AA cable exits at the patient's shoulder. Therefore, place a pad
between the cable and the patient.
Use the system cable guides to prevent the Anterior Array cable from crossing or forming loops with itself
or other cable.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-47

Figure 3-29: System cable guide used to avoid loops

4. Establish a landmark at the center of the region of interest then press Advance to Scan.

5. Select the protocol.

Use the system recommended protocols for scanning with this coil for optimum results and best
performance.
6. Select the localizer series, prescribe the slice locations, adjust FOV if necessary, and acquire the localizer
scan.
For details about coil selection, see AIR Touch™ auto Coil Select procedure.

7. After performing the localizer, select the next series.

8. Prescribe the graphic scan locations and adjust the FOV and coverage.

For tips on setting the landmark see Landmark troubleshooting.

9. If any or all of these scan parameters are selected (ASSET, HyperBand, PURE), and if you select On from the
Calibration in Prescan menu, which is located on the Details tab, a calibration scan is acquired during Auto
Prescan.

10. Clean the coil components and comfort pads after each use.
Clean with disinfectant wipes that contain 1% of Sodium Hypochlorite (CAS No 7681-52-9) as the only
active ingredient. Alternatively, use a cloth that has been dampened in a solution of 10% bleach and 90%
tap water, or 30% isopropyl alcohol and 70% tap water.
Should the coil need to be returned to GE for service, wipe it down with a 10% bleach solution (as
described above) to minimize risk of exposure to potentially infectious agents.
Dispose of any materials used to clean the coil and the pads according to all federal, state, and local
regulations.
11. Follow this storage guideline when using the AA coil.
Store the AA component on top of the Anterior Array Coil Positioner storage device that was shipped with the
coil. The AA component must be stored on top of the Anterior Array Coil Positioner so that it maintains its
curved shape, reliability, and durability.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

Figure 3-30: Anterior Array Coil Positioner

Table 3-8: Image legend

# Description
1 Anterior Array Coil Positioner.
2 AA coil placed on positioner.

Considerations
Wide bore systems with a stationary table considerations
Wide bore systems with a mobile table considerations

Related topics
TDI introduction
TDI Safety concept
TDI Coil configurations concept

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-49

TDI CO IL SUITE

Safety concept
This section includes all TDI1 safety cautions and warnings.

This section contains important safety information that you and the physician must understand thoroughly
before using the TDI coil system.
Carefully review chapter 2: MR Safety. In particular, review Tissue heating and Contact point heating.

Patient safety
Patient safety and comfort are the primary concerns during the scanning procedure. Always follow proper safety,
operating and maintenance procedures to ensure that the patient is not exposed to electrical or mechanical hazards
that may cause injuries. Ensure that the patient is comfortably positioned.
Route cables through the center of the magnet bore. Routing cable near the sides of the bore increases the likelihood
of cable heating from induced currents. Place cables under the pads whenever possible.
Keep the length of the cable in the bore to a minimum. When possible, avoid bending the cable 180 degrees. Route
cables out of the bore in the most direct way possible, without looping or coiling.
Ensure the patient is comfortably positioned.
Continuously monitor the patient. If the patient reports heating, burning or tingling sensations, stop the scan
immediately.
All personnel using this coil must be instructed in its proper use. Personnel must observe all warnings and cautions
appearing in this manual.

TDI coil warning messages

WARNING
Patient burn risk. Do not cross or loop coil cables. Do not loop RF receive coil cables and ECG leads.

WARNING
Do not allow the coil cables to touch the patient. Use a thermal resistant material or pad to keep the cable
from touching the patient. Failure to comply may cause patient burns.

1Total Digital Imaging

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

WARNING
RF can cause localized heating at contact points between the patient/bore and patient/RF coil resulting in
discomfort or burns.

WARNING
Closed loops formed by clasped hands or crossed arms, legs or feet may cause burns to the patient. Do not
allow the patient to cross or loop their hands, arms, legs or feet. Use pads as necessary to separate limbs.

WARNING
Always place appropriate non-conductive padding between the surface coil and the patient’s skin to prevent
burn injuries.

WARNING
Prior to patient placement in the coil, assure that any breached or compromised patient skin surfaces that
come in contact with the coil have been adequately bandaged or covered.

Pinch Point CAUTION

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-51

Equipment safety

WARNING
This coil is not suitable for use in the presence of a flammable anesthetic mixture with air or with oxygen or
nitrous oxide.

WARNING
Patient burns may result from RF coupling of this device with other devices remaining in the magnet. Remove
any other unused coil or unused accessory device from the magnet before using this coil.

WARNING
Route cables through the center of the magnet bore. Place cables under the cushion whenever possible to
separate the cable from the patient. Routing near the sides of the bore increases the likelihood of cable
heating (from induced currents).

Coil CAUTION
Looped cables may cause RF coupling and degrade the scan performance of the coil. Do not cross or loop
cables.

Electrical and mechanical safety

WARNING
Electric shock hazard. This coil consists of electrical and mechanical components. Tampering with the coil by
untrained personnel can be hazardous to the patient and equipment. Only properly trained and qualified
personnel should service the coil.

WARNING
Use only coils, cables and accessories that are in good condition. Before using the coil, visually check each coil
component, cable and accessory to ensure that there is no external damage. If any coil component, cable or

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

accessory is suspected of not being in good condition, discontinue its use and contact your GE Service
Engineer.

WARNING
Electric shock hazard. No user serviceable parts. Refer service to qualified service personnel.

CAUTION
Always base evaluations on all images in the data set and on the clinical history. Information from only a
single image should not be used to evaluate a patient.

Label locations on the coil suite components

The serial number labels are located on the covers of the coil components. These labels specify date of
manufacturer, part number and revision. These labels also have several symbols that are defined in this manual that
will help the user better understand the specifics of the coil suite components.
Table 3-9: Coil labels

Warning/Caution Description Label

The label shown to
the right can be
found on the coil
cable. It contains
three symbols: sur-
WARNING
face may be hot, do
not loop, and consult
accompanying doc-
uments.

Do not pull or carry

the coil holding the
IMPORTANT: Notice foam part of the
label Head Neck Array
coil.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-53

Warning/Caution Description Label

These labels to the
right are the locked
and unlocked sym-
bols located on the
P-connector. Plug
the P-connector into
the system P-port
with the red
unlocked symbol
showing. Then, turn
CAUTION
the gray spindle
handle clockwise
until the green
locked symbol is
showing. The coil is
ready for scanning
when the green
locked symbol is vis-
ible.
Pull up to unlock /
Push down to the
lock the Head Neck
Array Posterior and
Not applicable Anterior
Component/Adaptor
Block (engraved
label provided on
the Latch).

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

TDI CO IL SUITE

Coil configurations concept

The TDI Coil Suite is designed to increase throughput and patient comfort by eliminating multiple coil changes per
patient. The coil suite is compatible with a variety of coil mode configurations. The configurations are based on the
coil components connected and the required FOV. The system selects the coil mode configuration that best fits the
selected region of interest.
Table 3-10: Table legend

Dimensions and
Coil Description Picture
Weight

Length: 55 cm
21 channel TDI Width: 35 cm
Head Neck Array Height: 35 cm
Weight: 6.5 Kg

Length: 55.6 cm
16 channel 3.0T Width: 67.4 mm
AA Height: 3.3 cm
Weight: 2.8 Kg

Length: 105 cm
Width:
Peripheral Vas- l 2nd station =
cular/Lower 64.2 cm
Extremity Array l 3rd station =
(3.0T GEM PVA) 51.6 cm

Height: 24.8 cm
Weight: 9.1 kg

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-55

Dimensions and
Coil Description Picture
Weight

32 channel TDI Length: 120.5 cm

Posterior Array
Width: 48.6 cm
embedded in the
patient table Weight: 10.5 Kg

1 = TDI Posterior Array.

2 = This line shows the coil area.
For details on how to select a coil, see AIR Touch™ auto coil select procedure.

Related topics
Equipment components introduction

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

TDI CO IL SUITE

PA, AA, and PVA component patient position pro-

cedure
Use these steps to position the patient feet first with the PA1, AA2, and PVA3 TDI components.

CAUTION
Do not carry any of the coil components by the cable. Damage to the coil component may occur. The coil may
not work if damaged.

1. Remove the head-end filler and replace it with the PVA leg filler.
The PVA leg filler brings the lower legs into the same horizontal plane as the upper legs or thighs for an
optimum runoff position.
2. Position the patient supine and make sure that the patient's heels are located towards the end of the comfort
pad.
3. Place the PVA over the lower legs. Ensure that the toes extend through the PVA openings.
Figure 3-31: PVA in place

CAUTION
Ensure that no hair or fabric is caught between the components. Failure to comply may cause artifacts and
decreased image quality.

4. Unfold the second station over the upper legs of the patient. Ensure patient comfort by applying pads if
necessary.
5. Tuck the right and left foam coil portions under the patient's legs.
6. Secure the top and bottom foam coil portions to the table with the provided straps. The coil should be snug
against the anatomy to minimize patient motion.

1Posterior Array
2Anterior Array
3Peripheral Vascular Array

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-57

Figure 3-32: Second station in place

7. Plug the PVA into P2 port.

8. Place the AA coil component on the patient There are two options for routing and plugging the AA coil. For
details, see Step.10.
Plug the cable into the port that is located in the direction the cable exits the coil.
9. Position the AA component on the patient with the PVA overlap as shown in Figure 3-33 to ensure acceptable
image quality.
Figure 3-33: 1 = PVA and AA overlap and proper AA cable position

10. Plug the AA coil into P1 port or P4 port. There are two options for routing the AA cable.
a. Plug the cable into P4 port (recommended).
Place a pad between the cable and the patient.
Route the cable down the side of the patient toward P4 port shown in Figure 3-34.
Plug the cable into P4 port.
Figure 3-34: Port 4 cable route

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

Table 3-11: Image legend

# Description
1 Overlap
2 Pad
3 P4 port

b. Plug the cable into P1 port.

Route the cable as close to the center of the bore as possible.
Ensure that the AA cable is routed over the center housing of the PVA as shown in Figure 3-35
Figure 3-35: Port P1 cable route

Table 3-12: Image legend

# Description
1 Overlap
2 P1 Port
3 The cable must be routed over the center housing of the PVA.

CAUTION
When using the AA with the PVA in a feet-first orientation, be sure to run the AA cable over the center
housing of the PVA.

11. Lock all connector plugs by rotating the spindle handle until the Lock symbol is visible.
Figure 3-36: P connector, 1 = unlock, 2 = lock

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-59

12. Press the IntelliTouch strip where it aligns with the center of the AA coil to complete coil identification.
13. Place a landmark over the region of interest.
The AA has one raised laser mark positioned in the center of the coil. The PVA has three laser marks; one
in the center of PVA, and one in the center of each section.

14. Proceed to scan.

Follow this storage guideline when using the AA coil.

Store the AA component on top of the Anterior Array Coil Positioner storage device that was shipped with the coil.
The AA component must be stored on top of the Anterior Array Coil Positioner so that it maintains its curved shape,
reliability, and durability.
Figure 3-37: Anterior Array Coil Positioner

Table 3-13: Image legend

# Description
1 Anterior Array Coil Positioner.
2 AA coil placed on positioner.

Related topics
TDI safety
TDI coil workflow

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

TDI CO IL SUITE

PA, Head Neck Array, and AA component patient pos-

ition procedure
Use these steps to position the patient head or feet first with the PA1 , Head Neck Array, and AA2 TDI coil
components.

CAUTION
Do not carry any of the coil components by the cable. Damage to the coil component may occur. The coil may
not work if damaged.

1. Remove the head filler and patient comfort pad based from the head end of the table.
Figure 3-38: Example of table with no head filler

2. Place the Head Neck Array posterior component on the cradle surface.

1Posterior Array
2Anterior Array

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-61

Figure 3-39: Head Neck Array posterior component in place

3. Plug the Head Neck Array posterior connector into P2.

Figure 3-40: P2 connector is on the table's right side as you face the magnet cover

4. Lock the connector plug by rotating the spindle handle until the Lock symbol is visible.
Figure 3-41: P connector, 1 = unlock, 2 = lock

5. Place the patient comfort pad in the Head Neck Array posterior component.
6. Position the patient supine in the Head Neck Array posterior component with the shoulders resting against
the coil.
7. Depending on the area of interest, position the appropriate Head Neck Array Anterior component onto the
Head Neck Array posterior using the locators as a guide.
8. Secure the Head Neck Array anterior component to the Head Neck Array posterior component using the
latches that are located on both sides of the Head Neck Array posterior component.

When scanning areas other than the brain, it is not necessary to place the Head Neck Array anterior.
Instead, the AB1 may be used. The AB also is secured to the Head Neck Array posterior using the latches on
the posterior component.

1Adapter Block

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

Figure 3-42: Adapter Block

CAUTION
Ensure that no hair or fabric is caught between the components. Failure to comply may cause artifacts and
decreased image quality.

9. Optional: if you are using the AA coil, position the AA on the patient chest with Head Neck Array overlap as
shown in Figure 3-43.
Figure 3-43: 1 = overlap of AA and Head Neck Array

10. Plug the AA component into P1 or P4 port.

Use the system cable guides to prevent the Anterior Array cable from crossing or forming loops with itself.
Figure 3-44: System cable guide used to avoid loops

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-63

11. Press the IntelliTouch strip that aligns with the center point of the AA coil to complete coil identification.
12. Place a pad between any cable and the patient.
13. Place a landmark over the region of interest.
The Head Neck Array has one raised laser mark on the center of the Head Neck Array Anterior component.
The AA has one raised laser mark positioned in the center of the coil. The sections of the PA are indicated
on each edge of the table, which identify the element groups.
14. Proceed to scan.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

TDI CO IL SUITE

PA component patient position procedure

Use these steps to position the patient on the PA TDI coil component.

1. Place the head end filler on the patient table.

Figure 3-45: Table with fillers in place

2. Place patient comfort pads on the coil/table surface.

3. Position the patient either head or feet first on the coil/table.
4. Place a landmark over the region of interest.
The sections of the PA are indicated on each edge of the table, which identify the element groups.
Figure 3-46: PA element group identifiers

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-65

# Description
1 Box indicates the borders of the TDI Posterior Array
2 PA element group identifiers

5. Proceed to scan.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

TDI CO IL SUITE

Two AA components patient position procedure

Use these steps to position the patient head or feet first with the PA1 and AA2 TDI coil components.

Considerations

CAUTION
Do not carry any of the coil components by the cable. Damage to the coil component may occur. The coil may
not work if damaged.

Rules for setting two AA coils

Incorrect Two AA coil crossover as shown in Figure 3-47.

Figure 3-47: Two AA crossover not allowed

The cables of the AA coils cannot be plugged into the same side of the coil port as shown in Figure 3-48.
Figure 3-48: Incorrect cables plugged into ports at the same end of the table

Plug the cable into the port that is located in the direction the cable exits the coil, as shown in Figure 3-49.

1Posterior Array
2Anterior Array

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-67

Figure 3-49: Cables plugged into correct ports

Two AA coils can be set with the overlap as shown Figure 3-51. If not, the two AA coils may not work properly.
The order to align the center of each AA coil must be the same order that the coils are connected into the coil
port. The IRD (In-Room-Display) shows which of the AA coils is aligned at the center of the coil.

Procedure
1. Place the fillers, pads and patient as described in PA TDI patient position.
2. Position the AA component on the patient.
a. Carefully place the AA on top of the patient centered over the area of interest.
b. Position the AA so that it is centered on the patient and sits comfortably and securely on the patient.
c. Position the arms of the patient to the sides of the body or up over the head. If the arms are placed above
the head, do not allow the patient to cross arms or interweave fingers.
d. Place a pad between any cable and the patient.
3. Use the straps that are located on both sides of the PA to secure the AA to the table top. The AA should be snug
against the patient, but ensure that there is no patient discomfort.
4. Plug the cable into the port (P1, P2 or P4) that is located in the direction the cable exits the coil.
Note that port 3 cannot be used for the AA coils.
5. Lock the connector plug by rotating the spindle handle until the Lock symbol is visible.
The AA has one raised laser mark positioned in the center of the coil. The sections of the PA are indicated
on each edge of the table, which identify the element groups.
Figure 3-50: P connector, 1 = unlock, 2 = lock

6. Position another AA component on the patient overlapped as shown in Figure 3-51.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

Figure 3-51: Overlap of the two AA coils

7. Repeat the plug in, coil lock and IntelliTouch strip instructions for the second AA coil.

Alternatively, you can plug in and lock both coils and then define the reference point by pressing the
IntelliTouch strip in the order in which you plugged in the coils. View the IROC instructions for instructions as
you plug in the coils.

8. Place a landmark over the region of interest.

9. Proceed to scan.

Follow this storage guideline when using the AA coil.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-69

Figure 3-52: Anterior Array Coil Positioner

Table 3-14: Image legend

# Description
1 Anterior Array Coil Positioner.
2 AA coil placed on positioner.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

TDI CO IL SUITE

Whole body patient position procedure

Use these steps when using the TDI coil for whole body imaging.

CAUTION
Do not carry any of the coil components by the cable. Damage to the coil component may occur. The coil may
not work if damaged.

1. Remove the head filler and the patient comfort pad.

Figure 3-53: Table with head filler removed

2. Place the Head Neck Array posterior component at the head end of the patient table.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-71

Figure 3-54: Head Neck Array posterior component in place

3. Place the patient comfort pad in the Head Neck Array posterior component, and place the PA comfort pads on
the table.
Position the patient supine in the Head Neck Array posterior component with the shoulders resting against
the coil.
4. Place the Head Neck Array anterior component on the Head Neck Array posterior component.

CAUTION
Do not pick up or carry the Head Component by the mirror attachment. To avoid damaging the coil, pick up
and carry the Head Component using two hands on the bottom of the coil.

CAUTION
Ensure that no hair or fabric is caught between the components. Failure to comply may cause artifacts and
decreased image quality.

5. Secure the Head Neck Array anterior component to the Head Neck Array posterior component using the
latches that are located on both sides of the Head Neck Array posterior.
6. Plug the Head Neck Array posterior connector into P2 port
Figure 3-55: P2 connector is on the table's right side as you face the magnet cover

7. Position the AA on the patient chest with Head Neck Array overlap as shown in Figure 3-56.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

Figure 3-56: 1 = overlap of AA and Head Neck Array

8. Plug the AA components into P1 or P4 ports.

9. Lock the connector plug: rotate the spindle handle until the Lock symbol is visible.
Figure 3-57: P connector, 1 = unlock, 2 = lock

10. Secure the AA to the patient table with straps. Adjust the straps until the coil is snug against the patient.
11. Press IntelliTouch strop where it aligns with the center of the first connected AA coil to complete coil
identification.
12. Repeat the plug in, coil lock and IntelliTouch strip (where it aligns with the center of the coil) instructions for
the second connected coil. See overlapped coils as shown in Figure 3-58
Figure 3-58: Overlap of the two AA coils

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-73

13. Place a landmark over the region of interest.

The Head Neck Array has one raised laser mark on the center of the Head Neck Array Anterior component.
The AA has one raised laser mark positioned in the center of the coil. The sections of the PA are indicated
on each edge of the table, which identify the element groups.
When using the AA, always landmark to the center of the coil.
14. Proceed to scan.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

MAGN ET DISP L AY S

Magnet displays introduction

This section describes the magnet displays available on your MR system.

In-Room monitor concept

In-room display coil screen
In-room display gating screen
In-room display patient setup screen
In-room display scan time and table location screen
Setup In-Room Display procedure
Reset in-room monitor trackball procedure
Set-up patient information on in-room monitor procedure

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-75

MAGN ET DISP L AY S

In-Room Display concept

The IRD 1 is a shielded touch panel color monitor. The monitor and scan room interface provides immediate feedback
on patient information, preparation, coil setup, coil connectivity, and gating information.
Figure 3-59: Example of a system with an inter-active In-room monitor

Figure 3-60: In-room display

Table 3-15: In-room display monitor description

# Description
1 Setup In-Room Display procedure
2 In-room Display gating screen

1In-Room Display

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

# Description
3 In-Room Display scan time and table location screen
4 In-Room Display coil screen
5 Patient comfort procedure

Related topics
Equipment components introduction
In-Room Display patient setup screen

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-77

MAGN ET DISP L AY S

In-Room Display coil screen

Figure 3-61: Example of a coil screen

Table 3-16: Coil screen selections

# Description
1 Port column:
Indicates the port in which the coil is plugged into.

Connected Coil column:

Black text indicates the connected coil.
Orange text indicates that there is an operator action required.
Red text indicates that there is an error condition.
2 The Notes area displays coil Notes.
Color code that coordinates with coils that can be connected to the ports illustrated on
the right side of the screen.
Description of abbreviated terms.
3 If Coil tab is orange consider the following:
There is an operator action required, which is posted in the Notes area.
You cannot proceed to scan until "Coil" in the tab is no longer orange.
The scan time is not displayed in the upper right corner of the display because you cannot
proceed to scan when Coil is orange.
4 Coil port area is a representation of the coil connectors

Color scheme

Green ports indicate a coil is plugged in or active.

Red and blue outlines indicate coil channels that are compatible with the port. View the
Notes area on the coil tab for details.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

# Description
Notes are displayed at the bottom of the screen to identify the problem.

Number system

P1 represents the left coil port located at the head end of the patient table.
P2 represents the right coil port located at the head end of the patient table.
P3 and P4 represent the coil ports located at the foot end of the patient table.

Related topics
Equipment components introduction
RF coil connector
In-room display concept
Setup In-Room Display procedure

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-79

MAGN ET DISP L AY S

In-room Display gating screen

Figure 3-62: Gating screen

Table 3-17: Gating screen selections

# Description
1
ECG icon : select to toggle the display between all four waveforms and the cardiac
only waveform.

Respiratory gated icon : select to toggle the display between all four waveforms
and the respiratory only waveform.

Peripheral gated icon : select to toggle the display between all four waveforms and
the peripheral gated only waveform.
2 Waveform display: ECG gating, peripheral gating, and respiratory.
3 The colors of the electrodes are displayed: white= RA, black=LA, green=RL, red=LL). For
example, if you see a bad signal on VCGI, re-position the white and red electrodes.
4 Click to invert the waveform.
5
Settings icon : select to toggle the Settings control panel on/off.

Reset icon : select to reset the gating system.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

Settings control panel

The options on the Settings control panel can also be accessed from the Gating Control screen. The Settings control
panel allows you to do the following:

Select the best trigger lead.

Invert the ECG waveform
Select the cardiac gating lead type: VCG, Standard or third party.
Apply a noise filter for Standard gating leads.
Figure 3-63: Settings control panel

Related topics
Equipment components introduction
In-Room monitor concept
ECG gated exam procedure

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-81

MAGN ET DISP L AY S

In-Room Display patient setup screen

The Patient Information screen displays patient information and allows selection of Patient Weight, Auto Start and
Patient Position orientation. The green landmark line changes from dashed to sold when the landmark is established.
Figure 3-64: In-room Patient Setup screen

Figure 3-65: Example of an In-room display header

The far left text indicates the patient table location relative to the landmark (S = superior, I = inferior). If the
landmark has not been established, this field is not displayed.
The scan time counts down once scan begins. The field is not displayed until a landmark has been established and
there is no error on the coil tab.

Date of Birth
Date of Birth is useful as a table-side secondary patient identification field.

Patient Weight
Select the Patient Weight text field to display the keypad. Select the appropriate numbers to enter a weight and
select OK.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

Figure 3-66: Patient Setup with patient weight

Related topics
Equipment components introduction
In-room display concept
Setup In-Room Display procedure

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-83

MAGN ET DISP L AY S

In-Room Display scan time and table location screen

The in-room display of the scan time and table location is not interactive. It displays the scan time remaining and the
table location.
Figure 3-67: Scan time and table location

Scan Time icons

There are several icons that can display on these tabs: Patient Setup, Gating, Coils and Fan Light. The icons appear in
the scenarios described in the table. They must be resolved so that you can proceed to scan.
Figure 3-68: Example of Scan Time iROC display with icon

Table 3-18: Scan Time In-room monitor icons

Scan Time icon Description

This icon represents that the table needs to be
raised. The animation of the vertical table icon mov-
ing up and down stops once the table is all the way
up and can connect and move into the bore. The
icon then becomes still when the table is at the full
up position.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

Scan Time icon Description

This icon indicates that the table has no home or
has lost the home position. The animation of the
home icon flashing stops once the table is in the
home position.

This icon represents that the table needs to be elec-

trically docked. The animation of the plug icon mov-
ing in and out stops once the coil is properly
seated. The icon then displays as the plug seated.

This icon represents that the table needs to be

mechanically docked. The animation of the table
dock icon moving up and down stops once the table
is properly docked. The icon then displays as table
docked.

Related topics
In-room monitor coil screen
In-room monitor gating screen
In-room monitor patient setup screen
Setup In-Room Display procedure
Equipment components introduction

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-85

MAGN ET DISP L AY S

Setup In-Room Display procedure

Use these steps to view the various tabs from the In-Room monitor display.

1. From the In-Room display, use the touch screen on the magnet cover to access its functions. There are 5
tabs available:
Patient Setup - displays the patient information and allows selection of weight, Auto Start and patient
orientation.
Scan Time - only displays scan time and table location.
Gating - displays waveforms and allows selection of lead and invert. Press the Gating tab on the In-room
monitor to turn it on. If gating is already turned on, the waveforms selected from the operator console are
shown. If gating was turned off from the operator console and the In-room displays the gating tab, switch
to another tab and return to the gating tab to turn on gating again.
Coils - only displays the currently plugged in coil.
Fan Light - controls the bore fan speed and the light brightness.

In-Room display screen saver

If any of the following events do not occur within 60 minutes, the screen saver appears on the in-room display:

new exam or end exam

change to any patient data displayed on the IRD1
change to the table position
change to the connected coil

Related topics
Equipment components introduction
Landmark with touch and go strip
Reset In-room monitor touch screen
Set-up patient information from In-Room Display procedure

1In-Room Display

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

MAGN ET DISP L AY S

Reset In-Room monitor screen procedure

Use these steps to reset the screens on the magnet control panel, if it is not active.

1. From the header area of the screen, click the Tools icon .
2. In the System Management work area, click the Service Desktop Manager tab.
3. From the Service Desktop Manager screen, click Service Browser.
4. From the MR Service Desktop – Insite Browser, click Diagnostic tab/icon.
5. In the left screen panel, click Hardware Location to open the file tree.
6. Click Magnet Room to open the file tree.
7. From the Magnet Room list, click InRoom Display.
8. From the right panel, click Reset IRD Console. It takes approximately 3 minutes to reset.

Related topics
Set-up patient information from In-Room Display procedure
Setup In-Room Display procedure

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-87

MAGN ET DISP L AY S

Set-up patient information from In-Room Display pro-

cedure
Use these steps to define the patient weight and orientation and activate auto start from the in-room monitor.

Prerequisite
The patient name field must be completed before you change the patient weight, select AutoStart or Patient
Position.

1. Setup an exam and click Start Exam from the Worklist Manager.
2. From the in-room display, use the touch screens to select Patient Setup tab.
3. From the Patient Setup tab, touch the weight text field to display a numeric keypad.
4. From the numeric keypad, touch the number you want to enter. Repeat this for each number you want to
enter.
Figure 3-69: Numeric keypad

Touch the arrow key to backspace.

Touch Cancel to erase the text in the weight field.
Once you acquire the first series, you are unable to access the key pad to change patient weight.

5. When you are satisfied with the number in the text field, touch OK.
The pop-up key pad closes.
6. Auto Start is now selectable. To turn on Auto Start, touch the Auto Start check box.
7. To change the patient orientation selection, touch the desired patient orientation icon arrows

Related topics
Setup In-Room Display procedure
Reset In-Room monitor screen procedure

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

MAGN ET CO N TRO L S

Magnet controls introduction

This section describes the magnet control concepts and procedures available on multiple MR system platforms.

Magnet controls concept

Patient comfort procedure
Patient alert system concept
Patient alert procedure

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-89

MAGN ET CO N TRO L S

Magnet controls concept

Magnet controls provide the method for setting up patient comfort and scanning. The magnet controls are on two
panels located on both sides of the magnet cover. The control panels have the same buttons, they are just located in
a mirror image of each other. The control panel may have a subset of backlit buttons that light up to show what
typically is the next step in the workflow. The lights are only typical next steps. You can choose to select another
button at any time.
Table 3-19: Magnet control buttons

Button label Description

Abort or Stop Scan stops a scan during either prescan, an active scan, or
after Pause Scan is pressed.

Pause Scan temporarily halts scanning.

Start Scan restarts a study if Pause Scan is pressed, or cradle motion exceeds
2 mm.

Alignment turns alignment lights on or off. When the alignment lights are on,
this button is lit and the “landmark on” message is posted on the status panel.

Landmark enters the defined landmark.

Advance to Scan advances the defined landmark to magnet isocenter.

In advances the cradle into the bore.

To advance the cradle quickly, press In/Out Fast button and simultaneously
press the In button.

Out retracts the cradle from the bore.

To retract the cradle quickly, press In/Out Fast button and simultaneously press
the Out button

Stop Table halts in-and-out cradle movement. This button overrides all other
cradle motion commands.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

Button label Description

Back to Landmark returns the table back to last landmarked position.

Home returns the cradle to the home position, fully retracted on the patient
transport.

Related topics
Equipment components introduction

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-91

MAGN ET CO N TRO L S

Patient comfort procedure

Use the following steps to adjust the light and fan inside the magnet.

Considerations
The bar illumination status is defined as follows:

No bars = fan/light off.

One bar = low.
Two bars = medium.
Three bars = high.

Adjust the fan or light level from the magnet room

Table 3-20: Light and Fan controls.

Icon Description

Light controls the light within the magnet opening.

There are three settings.

Fan controls the circulation of air within the magnet opening.

There are three settings.

1. From the magnet room, touch the Fan Light tab.

2. Touch the light or fan control. Each time you touch the control the light/fan moves up to a higher level. The
level indicator remains illuminated to indicate the level status.
Figure 3-70: Example of fan and light set to the second level

Turn off the magnet fan or light

Select the fan or light option until the level indicator next to it is not illuminated.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

Adjust the fan or light level from the control room

1. Display the Gating Control screen.

a. From the footer area of the screen, click the Gating, Fan Light controls icon .

b. Alternatively, in the header area, click the Tools icon to open the System Management work
area. Click the Gating/Fan/Light tab to open the Gating Control screen.
2. From the Fan Light Control area of the Gating Control screen, click the up/down arrows to adjust the speed of
the fan or intensity of the light inside the magnet.
Figure 3-71: Fan Light Control area of Gating Control screen, with fan on low and light off

Related topics
Equipment components introduction
Patient alert procedure

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-93

P ATIEN T AL ERT

Patient alert introduction

The patient alert system is comprised of a squeeze ball and a control box. The control box is typically located at the
operator console.
The squeeze bulb is connected to the foot end of the table.
Figure 3-72: Squeeze bulb connection

Figure 3-73: Patient alert system: squeeze bulb

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

Figure 3-74: Patient holding alert squeeze bulb

Figure 3-75: Patient Alert control box

Procedures
Patient alert procedure

Related topics
Equipment components introduction
Patient alert procedure

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-95

P ATIEN T AL ERT

Patient alert procedure

Use the following steps to set the patient up with the alert bulb.
The patient alert port is a Type BF applied part.

1. Give the patient the alert bulb. The bulb is a rubber product and not latex.
2. Instruct the patient to loosely hold the alert bulb and to only squeeze the bulb to bring you into the scan room
to consult with the patient and attend to his needs.
Figure 3-76: Patient holding alert bulb

3. If the patient squeezes the rubber ball end of the alert system, a loud sound is heard in the control room.
Press RESET to stop the alarm and reactivate it. Go into the scan room and attend to the patient's needs.
Figure 3-77: Patient Alert control box: Steady/Pulse button on left and Reset button on right

Adjust the patient alert sound pattern

Press the STEADY/PULSE toggle button on the control box to select the sound pattern. The Patient Alert control box
is typically located on the operator’s console or mounted on a wall close to the desk.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

Related topics
Equipment components introduction

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-97

TABL E

SIGNA™ Premier eXpress mobile table concept

The SIGNA™ Premier eXpress mobile table is a patient transport device that includes an embedded high-density,
posterior RF array. It can be removed from the scan room to simplify positioning patients and to speed scan room
evacuation in emergency situations.

IMPORTANT: The SIGNA Premier eXpress mobile table is not interchangeable with eXpress GEM table and
therefore it can only be docked to the SIGNA Premier RX28 system.
Figure 3-78: Patient transport table

Table 3-21: Image legend

# Description
1 Table pedals
2 Brake/Steer-lock caster
3 Table base controls
4 IntelliTouch
5 Side rails/arm boards
6 IV pole
7 Patient security straps
8 Table transport handle
Embedded posterior array coil. Fillers are located at the north and south end of
9
the table top
10 Coil ports

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

Table pedals
Table pedals are used to dock/undock the table from the magnet and to move it up/down.
Figure 3-79: Table pedals

Figure 3-80: Dock (1)

Figure 3-81: Undock (2)

Figure 3-82: Electronic dock (3)

Figure 3-83: Up (4)

Figure 3-84: Down (5)

There are also up and down pedals at the magnet base.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-99

Figure 3-85: Up and down pedals on either side of the magnet base

Brake/Steer-lock caster
Figure 3-86: 1 = Brake pedal, 2= neutral pedal, 3 = steer-lock pedal

There are three brake and steer-lock pedals.

l (1) Brake pedal depressed to brake the table.

l (2) Neutral pedal depressed to free both pedals for swivel.

l (3) Steer-lock pedal depressed to steer the table. The steer-locking castor only locks a single wheel so
that you can steer the table; it does not stop or lock the table in place.

Table base controls

Figure 3-87: Table base controls

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

Table 3-22: Image legend

# Description
1 Up/down pedals
2 Transport/emergency release lever
The electronic or manual dock connection is located at the magnet end of the table. The table base has an
emergency release lever and up/down pedals.

IntelliTouch
The IntelliTouch landmark strip is located on either side of the table.

Side rails/arm boards

Figure 3-88: Side rail / arm board

Squeeze the lever underneath the arm board to unlock its current position.
Figure 3-89: Underside of arm board

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-101

Raise the side rails when using the table to move patients between locations.
The rails in the horizontal locked arm board position will support 60 pounds.
The arm boards can hold any position between the horizontal (90 degree) position and the top most (150
degree) position from vertical.

IV pole
Figure 3-90: IV pole receiver hole

The MR compatible IV Pole can be inserted into the receiver holes located on either side of the table and at the foot
and head end of the table.

Patient security straps

Figure 3-91: Security strap attached

The security straps can be slid into both sides of the table from either the head or foot end. Security straps across
the arms, abdomen, or legs provides safety for the patient and help control patient motion.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

Cradle release handle

There are multiple methods to remove the cradle from the magnet bore. For details see Emergency cradle release
procedure.

Table transport bar

Figure 3-92: Table transport bar and movement button

The table transport bar can be raised to a comfortable position so that you can move the table. To move the bar into
the up position, press the silver button on the side of the table.
To avoid pinching fingers or hands between the table and other objects, place your hands on the top of the Table
Transport bar when moving the table.

Embedded posterior array coil

The table is divided into thirds: the coil array and the magnet and foot end. The fillers provide a flat surface on which
the patient is positioned. The fillers can be removed and replaced with a compatible coil, for example the head or
neurovascular array coil, or stay in place and be used with coils such as a flex coil or the anterior array coil.
Figure 3-93: 1 = table fillers, 2 = posterior array coil

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-103

Figure 3-94: Cradle without fillers

A base plate must be inserted in the head coil pocket when the head coil is used with feet first head scans.
For details, see Base plate for SIGNA Premier eXpress mobile table.

TDI posterior array

The TDI posterior array has 32 elements and the Air posterior array has 60 elements. Both are 120.5 cm long and
48.6 cm wide, and are designed to support parallel imaging in all 3 planes.
Figure 3-95: TDI Posterior array

Coil ports
There are 4 coil ports.
Figure 3-96: Front end of table

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

Port 1 allows 1-32 channel receive only coils. It is outlined in red and blue.
Port 2 allows 1-32 channel transmit/receive coils. It is outlined in red and blue.
Figure 3-97: Foot end of table

Port 3 allows 1-16 channel receive only coils. It is outlined in red.

Port 4 allows 1-32 channel receive only coils. It is outlined in red and blue.

Microphone and speaker

There are two microphone/speakers on the table.
Figure 3-98: Microphone/speaker at front end of table

Figure 3-99: Microphone/speaker at foot end of table

PAC ports
There are four ports at the foot end of the table from which you can connect the following:

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-105

patient alert device

respiratory bellow
peripheral gating device
ECG device

WARNING
Do not allow the ECG cable connector end to touch the patient; patient burns can result. Use a thermal
resistant material or patient comfort pad to keep the connector end from touching the patient. See the
figures below for proper positioning.
Figure 3-100: Patient comfort pad positioned underneath ECG cable connected to the ECG port

Figure 3-101: Patient comfort pad wrapped around the ECG cable connected to the ECG port

For details, see SIGNA Premier: PAC for eXpress mobile table concept.

Table Specifications
For Patient Support Information specification details see:

Related topics
Dock and undock the table procedure for SIGNA Premier eXpress mobile table
Patient transfer procedure for SIGNA Premier eXpress mobile table

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

TABL E

SIGNA™ Premier eXpress mobile table Base plate

concept
The SIGNA™ Premier eXpress mobile table has a gap between the PA coil and the feet first head coil position.
When the head coil is in use for a patient positioned feet first, a base plate must be inserted flat inside the head coil
pocket. The head coil fits firmly into the base plate.
Figure 3-102: Base plate positioned in head coil pocket

Table 3-23: Image legend

# Description
1 Coil
2 Base plate
3 Head coil pocket

Considerations
The base plate positions the head coil to the appropriate location so that there is no signal loss or image
quality impact when using feet first positioning with a head coil.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-107

Figure 3-103: Example of a spine with no base plate and with base plate

Table 3-24: Image legend

# Description
1 Spine image with no base plate in place. Note the signal loss.
Spine image with the base plate in place. Note the improved
2
image quality.

A label is placed in the head coil pocket under the filler panel as a reminder to always use the base plate with
the head coil for feet first positioning.
Comfort tilt is not compatible with the base plate.

Related topics
Equipment components introduction
SIGNA Premier eXpress mobile table concept

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

TABL E

SIGNA™ Premier: stationary table concept

The stationary table includes an embedded high-density, posterior RF array. It can be raised and lowered to simplify
moving the patient on and off the table. Although the terms cradle and table are often used synonymously, the cradle
is a part of the table that moves the patient into and out of the magnet.
The patient table cradle is a Type BF applied part.
For details related to table specifications, see Patient Support Information.
Figure 3-104: Patient table

Table 3-25: Table selections

# Selection
1 Head end
The head end of the table has two coil ports and table filer area.
Figure 3-105: Head end of table

Figure 3-106: Head end with table filler in place

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-109

# Selection

2 Table movement pedals

Figure 3-107: Table pedals: 1 = Up motion, 2 = Down motion

Up and down pedals used to raise and lower the table.

IMPORTANT! The patient table is permanently fixed to the magnet system. Always have a
non-ferrous gurney placed outside the magnet room for emergency patient transportation.
3 Coil ports
Figure 3-108: Head end of table with two (P1 and P2) coil ports.

Figure 3-109: Foot end of table with two (P3 and P4) coil ports and a connected patient alert squeeze bulb

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

# Selection

4 Cradle release
The cradle release is at the foot end of the table.
Patient removal using the cradle release handle can be much quicker than the Out button on the
magnet enclosure. Grasp the handle and squeeze the lever to pull the cradle to the end of the
table.
Figure 3-110: Cradle release handle

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-111

# Selection
Use the cradle release handle in the event of power outage to the magnet room or after
pressing the Emergency Stop button.
5 IntelliTouch landmark strip and TDI Posterior array
The landmark strip is located on either side of the table.
The posterior array is a 32 element phased array coil. It is designed to support parallel imaging in
all 3 planes. For coil dimensions, see Coil Configurations.
Figure 3-111: Arrow points to landmark strip and TDI posterior array

1 = TDI Posterior Array.

2 = This line shows the coil area.
3 = IntelliTouch Landmark strip
4 = Landmark limit

Patient security straps

The security straps can be slid into both sides of the table from either the head or foot end.
Security straps across the arms, abdomen, or legs provides safety for the patient and help
control patient motion.

PAC ports
There are four ports in the PAC from which you can connect the following:

patient alert device

respiratory bellow
peripheral gating device
ECG device

For details, see : SIGNA™ Premier: PAC for stationary table concept

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

Procedures
Patient transfer procedure

Related topics
Equipment components introduction

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-113

TABL E

Dock and undock the table procedure for SIGNA™

Premier eXpress mobile table
Use these steps to dock or undock the table. The table has five pedals, three of which are used to connect (dock) and
remove (undock) the table from the magnet.
For details regarding the combined weight of the patient, coils, pads, etc. see SIGNA Premier eXpress mobile
table specifications.

IMPORTANT! The table undock powers down the PAC hardware, which stops the physiological waveform display
on the system screen Waveform tab and the in-room display Gating tab. The waveform appears as a flatline with no
triggers.
After the table is docked, the power to the PAC hardware is restored. It takes about 20 seconds for the physiological
waveform to appear on the system screen Waveform tab and in-room display Gating tab. A message is displayed on
both the Waveform Tab and the Gating tab.

1. To dock the table, follow these steps and refer to Figure 3-112.
Figure 3-112: Brake pedal, 2= neutral pedal, 3 = steer-lock pedal

a. Remove the brake by stepping on the steer locking caster pedal or the neutral pedal.
b. Set the steer locking caster, if necessary.
c. Line up the table to the table base and push table towards table base.

d. When the connections for the table and table base are close and aligned, step on the Dock pedal
.

e. Step on the Electronic Dock pedal to connect the table electronics to the magnet. This engages
the touch and go landmark and automatic detection of coils features.

f. When the table is connected to the magnet, raise the table: step on the Up pedal at the table
base or at the side of the magnet.

IMPORTANT! After the mechanical dock but before the electronic dock, it is possible for the table
top to move freely, thus resulting in loss of the home position. To recover, engage the electrical dock

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

on the Magnet control panel.

2. To undock the table, follow these steps.

a. Remove the brake by stepping on the steer locking caster pedal or the neutral pedal.
b. Set the steer lock caster, if necessary.

c. Step on the Undock pedal .

d. At the foot end of the table, pull directly back for a few feet.
e. If the Table Transport bar is lowered, push the silver transport bar button and pull the transport bar to the
up position. Move the table.
Figure 3-113: Table transport bar

To avoid pinching fingers or hands between the table and other objects, place your hands on the top of
the Table Transport bar when moving the table.

Related topics
SIGNA Premier eXpress mobile table concept

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-115

TABL E

Dock and undock the table procedure

Use these steps to dock or undock the table. The table has multiple pedals, three of which are used to connect (dock)
and remove (undock) the table from the magnet.

For details regarding the combined weight of the patient, coils, pads, etc. see Patient Support Information table:

1. To dock the table, follow these steps.

a. Remove brake by stepping on the brake/in-line locking caster toggle.

b. Set the straight-line locking caster if necessary.

c. Line up the table to the table base and push table towards table base.

d. When the connections for the table and table base are close and aligned, step on the Dock pedal
.

e. Step on the Electronic Dock pedal to connect the table electronics to the magnet. This engages
the touch and go landmark and automatic detection of coils features.

f. When connected, to raise the table, step on the Up pedal at the table base or at the side of the
magnet.
2. To undock the table, follow these steps.
a. Remove brake by stepping on the brake/in-line locking caster toggle.
b. Set the straight-line locking caster if necessary.

c. Step on the Undock pedal .

d. At the foot end of the table, pull directly back for a few feet.
e. Push the silver transport bar button and pull the transport bar to the Up position. Move the table.
Figure 3-114: Table transport bar

Related topics
Equipment components introduction

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

STO P AN D ABO RT

Emergency stop and abort scan buttons concept

Emergency stop
The Emergency Stop button disables power to the patient handling and scan related equipment when pressed. It
does not shut down the magnetic field. The Emergency Stop buttons are located on either side of the magnet cover.
Figure 3-115: The Emergency Stop button

Abort scan
The Abort Scan buttons are located on the magnet control panels. They stop an active scan.
Figure 3-116: Abort Scan button

Related topics
Equipment components introduction
In-Room Display concept

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-117

P HAN TO M BREAKAGE

Phantom breakage of spillage considerations

Information regarding MR phantom content solutions and spill procedure (NiCl2 (nickel chloride), MSDS 8363917) is
shipped with your phantom. In the event of a chemical spill, notify the building security. They will alert the spill team.
In the event of the DAQA phantom breaking and resulting in a nickel chloride spill, keep the following in mind. The
information below is an extract from MSDS 8363917:

Health hazard information

Routes of Entry: Inhalation, ingestion, skin or eye contact.
Target Organs: Skin, paranasal sinus, lungs, gastrointestinal system, kidneys and liver.
Symptoms and Effects of Exposure: Metallic taste in the mouth. Exposure can result in irritation of the mucous
membranes and the respiratory system. Contact with the skin can result in itchy sensations, redness, erythema,
contact dermatitis, eczema, sensitization, or loss of fats and lipids. Contact with the eyes can result in conjunctivitis.
Other symptoms include dizziness, giddiness, delirium, confusion, lassitude, loss of strength, asthma, nausea,
vomiting, headache, fever or hypothermia, anorexia, loss of sense of smell, diarrhea, anuria, liver damage, jaundice
and convulsions.
Animal experiments have resulted in observable birth defects.
Cancers of the lung and nasal sinuses in Nickel workers have been known for more than 50 years to be associated
with nickel refining, nickel plating, and nickel polishing.
First Aid:

If this chemical gets in the eyes, immediately flush the eyes with large amounts of water, occasionally lifting
the lower and upper lids. Get medical attention immediately. Contact lenses should not be worn when
working with this chemical.
If this chemical gets on the skin, immediately wash contaminated skin with soap or mild detergent and water.
If this chemical soaks clothing, immediately remove clothing and wash contaminated skin with soap or mild
detergent and water. Get medical attention promptly.
When this chemical has been swallowed and person is conscious, immediately give the person large
quantities of water or milk. Remove by gastric lavage unless patient is vomiting. Do not make an unconscious
person vomit. Get medical attention immediately.

Spill, leak and disposal procedures

Observe all federal, state and/or local regulations when storing or disposing of this substance. Contact local and/or
state environmental authorities to insure proper compliance.
This substance does not meet the definition of a hazardous waste as defined by the Resource Conservation and
Recovery Act (RCRA) (40CFR260).

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

PAC

SIGNA™ Premier: PAC for stationary table concept

The PAC connections are located on one side of the patient table and connects the ECG leads, peripheral gating
device, respiratory bellows, and patient alert bulb to the system. Each cable has a unique connector and cannot be
accidentally plugged into the wrong port. Disconnected cables can be stored into drawers in the patient table.
Figure 3-117: The drawers are located on either side of the foot end of the table

Figure 3-118: PAC unit located at the foot end of the table

Table 3-26: Image legend

# Port connection Name Description

1 ECG Six-pin connection for the thin film or high
impedance ECG1 leads (Type BF applied part).
ECG cable (P/N: 5570806-2) should only be used
with the Signa Premier fixed table system.

1ElectroCardioGram

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-119

# Port connection Name Description

2 Peripheral Two-port fiber optic connection for the
Gating peripheral gating lead (Type BF applied part).

3 Respiratory Single port for the respiratory bellow (Type BF

bellows applied part).

4 Patient Single port connection for patient alert system

Alert (Type BF applied part).

Related topics
Equipment components introduction

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

PAC

SIGNA™ Premier: PAC for eXpress mobile table

concept
The PAC connections are located at the foot of the SIGNA™ Premier eXpress mobile table.
There are multiple ports that allow you to connect the following to the MR system:

ECG leads
Peripheral gating device
Respiratory bellows
Patient alert bulb

Each cable has a unique connector and cannot be accidentally plugged into the wrong port.
Figure 3-119: Port connections

Table 3-27: Table legend

# Port connection Name Description

1 Peripheral Two-port fiber optic connection for the
Gating peripheral gating lead (Type BF applied part).

2 Patient Single port connection for patient alert system

Alert (Type BF applied part).

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-121

# Port connection Name Description

3 Respiratory Single port for the respiratory bellow (Type BF
Bellow applied part).

4 ECG Six-pin connection for the thin film or high

impedance ECG1 leads (Type BF applied part).

Peripheral gating
Figure 3-120: Peripheral gating port

To connect the peripheral gating cable, insert the connector into the port.
To remove the peripheral gating cable, grasp the connector plug and pull it out of the peripheral gating port.

Patient alert
Figure 3-121: 1 = strap to hold Patient alert tubing, 2 = metal tab on Patient alert connector

To secure the tubing, guide it under the plastic strap (1).

To connect the patient alert cable, insert the connector into the port.
To remove the patient alert cable, press the metal tab at the connection (2) and pull it out of the port.

1ElectroCardioGram

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

Respiratory gating
Figure 3-122: Respiratory gating port

To connect the respiratory gating cable, insert the connector into the port.
To remove the respiratory gating cable, grasp the connector plug and pull it out of the respiratory port.

ECG
Figure 3-123: ECG port

Only use ECG cable (P/N: 5801659-3) with the Signa™ Premier eXpress mobile table.

The connector portion of the cable is NOT allowed to enter the bore in order to prevent the risk of a patient
burn.
If the cable connector is inside the bore during a scan, a message displays identifying that if you proceed to
scan, series performance is derated for safety compliance. Click OK to acknowledge the message.
If you proceed to scan with the cable connected, another message displays in the footer area of the screen
that alerts you to the derated system performance.
To get full system performance, remove the cable from the port.

To connect the ECG cable, insert the connector into the port.
To remove the ECG gating cable, grasp the connector plug and pull it out of the ECG port.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-123

Related topics
SIGNA Premier eXpress mobile table specifications

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

SY STEM SP ECIF ICATIO N S

SIGNA™ Premier: system specifications concept

This section provides technical system specifications for the SIGNA Premier 3.0T system.

For details regarding spatial magnetic field compatibility, see Spatial magnetic field data.
Static magnetic field plots for siting (rule of thumb - assumes no ferromagnetic materials) may be found at:

http://www.gehealthcare.com/company/docs/siteplanning.html#mr

3.0T technical specifications

Table 3-28: Magnet information

Component Specification
Magnet Type Super-Conducting
Static Field Strength 3.0T
Bore Dimension 163 cm x 70 cm x 70 cm
Cryogen Type Liquid Helium
Boil Off Rate Zero under normal operating conditions

Table 3-29: Gradient information

Component Specification
Gradient type Non resonant, actively shielded, rapidly switching
Premier XT Premier
Peak Amplitude
80 mT/m 65mT/m

Premier XT Premier
Slew Rate
200 T/m/s 200T/m/s

Premier XT Premier
Rise time to Maximum Amplitude
400 microseconds 328 microseconds

Table 3-30: RF information

Component Specification
Transmit RF
Types of RF transmit coils Body Coil and Extremity Coils
Amplifier peak RMS power 15kW/channel (30kW total) for body, 4.5kW for local transmit
Amplifier nominal center frequency 127.72 MHz
Maximum transmit bandwidth +/- 0.650 MHz
Receive RF
Minimum/Maximum reception frequency 127.315 MHz / 128.126 MHz
Nominal RF reception center frequency 127.72 MHz
Receive Bandwidth +/- 250 kHz

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-125

Table 3-31: Patient comfort information

Component Specification
Patient space size 163 cm x 70 cm x 70 cm
Ventilation In bore patient ventilation system
Communication In bore 2 way intercom system
Lighting Variable intensity LED lighting

Table 3-32: Patient support information for stationary table

Component Specification
The table is stationary. The patient table cradle is a Type BF applied part.

53.5 cm. (21.1 inches) to 93 cm. (36.6 inches)

Height, cradle surface to floor
continuous

245 cm (96.5 inches) length x 56 cm (22 inches)

Cradle length and width width
Scannable range 182 cm (71.65 inches)
Positioning accuracy +/- 0.5 mm (0.020 inches)
Table safe working load 279 kg. (615 lbs)
Maximum patient load when attached to scanner or
250 kg. (551 lbs.)
when it is used as a transport
For details about the SIGNA Premier mobile table, see SIGNA Premier eXpress mobile table specifications.

Related topics
Equipment components introduction

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

EQ UIP MEN T CO MP O N EN TS

SIGNA Premier eXpress mobile table specifications

Table 3-33details the technical system specifications for the SIGNA™ Premier eXpress mobile table. The table is
detachable and mobile. The patient cradle is a Type BF applied part.
Table 3-33: SIGNA™ Premier eXpress mobile table specifications

Component Specification
Height, cradle
70 cm (27.6 inches) to 93 cm (36.6 inches) continuous
surface to floor
Cradle Length up
236 cm (scannable range is 205 cm or 80.7 inches)
to coil ports
Cradle width 56 cm (22.0 inches)
Longitudinal speed 1.9 cm/sec (0.75 inches/sec) to 30 cm/sec (11.8 inches/sec)
Landmark Table has IntelliTouch landmark capability
IV pole 88 cm (34.65 inches) when extended
Positioning
+/- 0.5mm (0.020 inches)
Repeatability
279 kg (615 lbs) when the table is docked, undocked, and in transport, or in a vertical
Table safe working
lift. Safe working load includes patient weight plus the weight of any accessories or
load
equipment placed on the patient table.
A maximum patient weight of 27 kg (60 lbs). They are not designed to hold the
Side rails/
patient’s full weight. The armboards can be moved to a down, horizontal, and any
Armboards
position between horizontal and 150 degrees from vertical.
Maximum Table
Mass (including 608 kg (1340 lbs) includes patient table mass plus safe working load
safe working load)
Positioning straps Table attachment for patient positioning straps

Related topics
SIGNA Premier eXpress mobile table specifications

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-127

SY STEM MAN AGEMEN T

System Management introduction

The System Management work area allows you to access the Service Desktop Manager, Error Log, Gating Control
screen, iLINQ, System Preferences, e-Report, and the Protocol Management tab. You can perform planned
maintenance and software performance tests, save raw data, reorganize protocols, or connect to TiP Virtual Assist
from these areas.

Procedures
Open system management work area procedure
System Management work area
Open the Service Desktop Manager procedure
e-report procedure
Error log view messages procedure
Legacy Image Converter procedures
Planned Maintenance procedures
Raw data save procedure
Remote full software download procedure
Remote software patch download procedure
Remote service configuration procedure
Create a software download user role procedure
Secure service access procedure
Service Notepad write a message procedure
TiP Virtual Assist activation procedure

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

USER IN TERF ACE

System Management work area

In the header area, click the Tools icon to open the System Management work area.
Scroll to the bottom of the graphic to see details.
Figure 3-124: System Management work area

Table 3-34: Systems Management work area image legend

# Description
1 Tools icon
2 Applications area
3 System Management work area

Applications and work area

Each tab displays different screens in the System Management work area.

Service Desktop Manager screen

Error Log screen

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-129

Gating Control screen

System Management Protocol screen

Related topics
System management Introduction

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

SY STEM MAN AGEMEN T

Open System Management work area procedure

Open the System Management work area access the Service Desktop Manager, Error Log, Gating Control screen,
iLINQ, System Preferences, and the Protocol Management tab. You can perform planned maintenance and software
performance tests, save raw data, change the system date and time, reorganize protocols, or connect to TiP Virtual
Assist from these areas.

From the header area of the screen, click the Tools icon to open System Management work area.

Related topics
Session introduction
System Management introduction

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-131

SY STEM MAN AGEMEN T

Open the Service Desktop Manager procedure

Use these steps to open a Service Desktop Manager Session to access the Guided Install and Utilities programs.

1. From the header area of the screen, click the Tools icon .
2. In the System Management work area, click the Service Desktop Manager tab to view the Service Desktop
Manager screen.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

SY STEM MAN AGEMEN T

e-Report procedure
Use these steps to view, print to pdf, or export a report.

1. From the footer area of the screen, click e-Report icon.

An "i" next to the icon indicates an unread report .

2. From the View Service Reports screen, click the desired Unread report option box, and click View.
The report opens.
The report is moved to the Reports list.
Click View Reports to go back to the View Service Reports list, to view unread and read reports.
3. To print the report to pdf format, click Print.
4. To export the report, place a USB device in the computer USB drive or a CD in the CD/DVD drive, from the
View Service Reports screen, select the desired report(s) and click Export.
5. From the Media pop-up window, select CD, DVD, or USB. Click OK to start the export.
6. Click Close to exit the application.

Related topics
System management introduction

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-133

SY STEM MAN AGEMEN T

Error log view messages procedure

Use these steps to view error log messages or to view the time an error message occurred.

View system messages

1. In the header area, click the Tools icon to open the System Management work area.
2. Click the Error Log tab on the left side of the screen.
3. On the Error log screen, click View Log.
4. Click Select Viewing level and choose a viewing level.
5. Click OK.
6. Use the buttons at the bottom of the screen to navigate through the error log.

Considerations
Additional messages are displayed at the following locations:

View the Message area to the right of the Patient List.

From the scan work area, view the Message area on the Scan Parameters screen.

Related topics
Service Notepad write a message procedure
System management introduction

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

SY STEM MAN AGEMEN T

Legacy Image Converter procedure

Use these steps to convert images on your MR system so that they can be displayed on a pre-11.0 MR system.

1. In the header area, click the Tools icon arrow.

2. Click Command Window... to open a command window.
3. Type LIC and press Enter.
4. From the Legacy Image Converter screen, select the exam and series for processing. The following image
types are not supported and cannot be converted:
TRICKS, FIESTA-C, VIBRANT, PROPELLER
Raw data images (embedded Pfiles)
Legacy format images (these images are already in the correct format)
Foreign images (non-GE images)
GSPS objects
SR objects
5. Click Start to begin image processing.
While images are being processed, you can click Cancel to stop the active conversion.
Once processing starts, a new exam with the same exam number is added to the Browser. As images are
converted they will appear in the image browser under the newly created exam. (See Identifying
Converted Images below for discriminating between the original and the legacy format exams.)
6. Only one exam may be selected at a time and within this exam it will only process the selected series (more
than one series can be entered). Therefore, to process more exams, return to step 4.
7. When processing has completed the Cancel button will be disabled and the Start and Close button will
become available.
8. Review the message area for errors, then press the Close button on the LIC user interface. The LIC user
interface screen will disappear.
The new exam is created using the same exam, series, and image numbering as the original. Legacy images
can be identified by the annotation "Signa 3.0T SYS" rather than your system (for example: "SIGNA
Premier") when displayed in the viewer.
After networking the images to a pre-11.0 Lx scanner (e.g. 9.x, 10.x), the legacy format images can be
identified by type "Advt" rather than "DICO" in the image browser.
9. The converted images can be used with legacy system applications such as CV flow analysis on AW3.1. Once
networked to either a Lx scanner (pre-11.0 versions) or an AW 3.1 or 4.0 workstation, the converted images
can be further sent to Genesis (5.x) systems. (The unconverted 11.x-format images cannot be sent to a
Genesis systems.)

Messages and error conditions

Successful Conversion
The following message is logged in the message box when conversion has completed successfully for each series
being processed:
"Series #: Passed: Processed xxx Images"

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-135

Unsuccessful Conversion
If processing is attempted on a series containing unsupported image types, one of the following messages is
displayed and no images are converted for that series.
"Series #: Failed: Fiesta-c, Tricks, Vibrant etc series not Supported."
"Series #: Failed: fMRI Series Cannot be converted."
"Series #: Failed: Post Processed Images Cannot be converted."
"Series #: Failed: Raw data Images Cannot be converted."
"Series #: Failed: Monarch Images Cannot be converted."
"Series #: Failed: Filtered (non-SCIC) Images Cannot be converted."
"Series #: Failed: Legacy Images Cannot be converted."

Other Error Conditions

If multiple exams are selected from the Patient List and you click Start, the following error is displayed:
"Multiple Exams Not Supported"
Select a single exam, then select the series within the selected exam for processing. If multiple exams need to be
converted, you must convert one exam at a time.
If you click Start a second time without changing the selection in the Patient List, the following message is displayed
(no image processing will occur):
"Exam #: Failed: Already Converted/Rejected"
This prevents accidental generation of multiple copies of the same image set. It is possible to close the LIC
application and restart it to create a duplicate set of converted images.

Related topics
System management introduction

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

SY STEM MAN AGEMEN T

Planned Maintenance procedures

Use this information to help you respond to PM Assist messages that display periodically on your system.

PM Date message
The PM Date message, "This system should have Planned Maintenance performed before <date>", where <date> is
the last day of the current month, displays when the response has been a Yes to the PM Due message. The prompt is
posted to the Operator Attention area at the start of each new patient prescription. The message appears once and
is overwritten by any other message being posted in the area. No acknowledgment is required.
Follow these steps for the PM Overdue and PM failure message displays.

1. For the PM Overdue, the message displays if the Planned Maintenance interval has been too long.
a. Type your initials in the text box.
b. Type the date in the text boxes.

Once a response is made, the system startup is completed with no further waiting.

2. For the PM Failure message displays when there are certain failures that have not been resolved within 21
days of the last PM. The message appears during system startup and in the Operator Attention area at the
start of each new patient prescription. The message appears once and is overwritten by any other message
being posted in the area.
a. Type your initials in the text box.
b. Click OK.

System management introduction

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-137

SY STEM MAN AGEMEN T

Raw data save procedure

Use these steps to save Raw data immediately after a scan has completed. Because the raw data resides in the
temporary memory of the system, you must save the raw data before starting the next series. Please be patient
during the raw data transfer.

1. From the header area of the screen, click the Tools icon .
2. From the System Management work area, click the Service Desktop Manager tab.
3. On the Service Desktop Manager, click Service Browser.
4. From the MR Service Desktop screen, complete the following:
a. Click Utilities tab.
b. From the Utilities tab, click Raw File Manager.
c. From the Raw File Manager area of the Service Desktop screen, click Click here to start this tool.
5. From the Raw File Manager screen, select the data from the TPS area.
6. Click TPS to Disk.
The raw data is saved on the system hard disk until it is removed.
Raw data uses disk space, and, as the disk becomes full, system performance can be degraded.
7. Click File > Exit.

Related topics
System management introduction

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

SY STEM MAN AGEMEN T

Secure Service Access procedure

Secure Service Access is a soft service license key that enables various levels of service software tools packages. If
you have a SSA1 license, you are required to renew the soft service license yearly.

Considerations
Depending on your Soft service license contract, your key may expire in 1 year from first date used. Please
refer to service license page for expiration dates.
For additional information on your SSA license, contact your local sales/service representative.
To find how to order a new license and more details regarding the new Secure Service Access customer
website link, please refer to your “Service Licensing” section in the Service Documentation.

Use these steps to access the SSA screen.

1. From the header area of the screen, click the Tools icon .
2. From the Tools menu, click Install Service Licenses.
Alternatively, from the Service Desktop Manager screen. click Service Browser. From the MR Service
Desktop Insite Browser, click Insite Service License.
3. The Service License screen displays.

1Secure Service Access

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-139

Figure 3-125: Example of a Service License screen. Your screen will vary based on the licenses on your system.

Table 3-35: Image legend

# Description
Service License Expiration area displays the Service License name and its expiration date.
1 l Click Refresh to update the list.
l Click a license from the list and click Remove to remove a service license.
2 Your service license ID that is required to order new licenses.
3 Use a CD, DVD or USB drive to install a new Service License file (used by service representative).
Click View Log to view the date, License name and its status.
4
Click Eject USB Key (used by service representative) to remove the USB service key.

4. Click the X in the upper right corner to close the screen.

For more information about your licenses, contact your GE sales/service representative.

Related topics
System Management introduction

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

SY STEM MAN AGEMEN T

Remote service configuration procedure

Remote Service Enables system connectivity to GE Healthcare's back office. A valid GE System ID and an internet
connection to the system is needed in order to establish this connectivity.
Use these steps to configure InSite Remote service on your system,

1. In the header area, click the Tools icon to open the System Management work area.
2. Click the Service Desktop Manager tab.
3. Click Service Browser .
4. From the Service browser, click the Configuration tab.
5. From the left pane, select Configure Insite.
6. Click Click here to start this tool and complete all fields.

The Agent Configuration screen displays.

Figure 3-126: Agent Configuration screen

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-141

CAUTION
Disabling connectivity disconnects the system from the GE Healthcare Back Office. This will make the system
unreachable for remote service or AutoSC sweeps.
If connectivity is disabled, it can be enabled again by clicking the Enable Connectivity Button.

Ensure that the CRM number displayed is exactly the same as the System ID that belongs to your system.
If this is not configured correctly, then update the correct system ID in the Service ID & System ID fields
under the System Configure tab in Guided Install.
Guided Install modifications in relation to System ID and Networking information updates are only
allowed in the root login environment

7. If internet connectivity to the system is established via proxy, then enable Proxy setting and provide Proxy
credentials.
8. If internet connectivity to the system is established via DNS, then configure the DNS Option in Guided Install
under the Networking tab.
Guided Install modifications in relation to System ID and Networking information updates are only allowed
in the root login environment
9. Click Submit once all the information has been entered. It could take up to 5 minutes for connectivity to be
established. The refresh button can be used to check the correct status.
10. Observe the following, which indicates connectivity is successfully established:
Running is Yes.
Registered is Yes.
CRM Verified is Yes.
Quarantine is No
11. If entitled, GE Remote Service involves analysis of system performance data and downloading software
updates. This data can be sent back and forth from the system through one of the following methods. Note
that data collected through these methods are used only to enhance product/service quality.
Proactive Diagnostics (ProDiags): Automatic push of system hardware parametric data at regular intervals
Sweeps: Automated scripts that login from the GE back office to pull only system configuration and
performance data
Software Download: Used to download software updates in the form of service packs to the system
12. Click an item in the Feature List window to enable or disable the remote features.
13. Contact GE service if you have a problem configuring InSite.
14. Click Disable Connectivity if you want to stop remote service connection.
15. Click X to exit the Configure InSite screen.

Related topics
System management introduction

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

SY STEM MAN AGEMEN T

Create a software download user role procedure

Use these steps to create an authorized EA3 user role for GE Software Installer Group.

1. From the Remote Software Update screen, click Preferences.

Figure 3-127: Remote Software Update screen

2. From the Preferences screen, click User Administration Tool.

Figure 3-128: Preferences screen

3. Enter User name root and your password and click Login.
Figure 3-129: Password screen

4. From the Local User tab, click Add Local User.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-143

Figure 3-130: Local User tab

5. From the Add User screen, type information for each of the following and then click Add User:
A unique User ID
Full Name
Password
Confirm Password

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

Figure 3-131: Add User screen

6. Click Add To Groups.

Figure 3-132: Groups area of Local User tab

7. From the Add Membership for User screen, select GESoftwareInstallerGroup and click Add Memebership.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-145

Figure 3-133: Add Membership for User screen

8. From the bottom area of the screen, click Apply Configuration and close the screen.
Figure 3-134: Bottom area of screen

9. Logout or reboot the system.

System logout procedure
System restart procedure

Related topics
System management introduction
Remote software download procedure

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

SY STEM MAN AGEMEN T

Remote software patch download procedure

Use these steps to accept and install software service packs.

Pre-requisite
Only users that have the GESoftwareInstaller Group status can execute the remote software download.
Reference the Privacy and Security for MR systems for Role-based membership considerations. The url link to
the Privacy and Security for MR systems operator manual is:

https://www.gehealthcare.com/security

Consideration
If you do not have GESoftwareInstaller Group privileges, and a software patch is available when you are booting up
the system, you will have to click X and then you can proceed to normal Logon.
Figure 3-135: Update Ready to Install screen with Later selected

To become an authorized EA3 user, see Administrator assigns EA3 roles procedure.

Procedure
Use this steps if you have GESoftwareInstaller Group privileges.

1. Power up the system and logon. For logon procedure details, see System logon procedure.
2. If a software patch is available for installation the Update Ready to Install screen displays.
Figure 3-136: Software Download Manager screen

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-147

a. From the Software Download Manager screen, complete the following:

Click the checkbox next to the item you want to download.
Click Install Now.
Note the installation time, which may influence your decision to start or delay the installation.
b. Optional: To view installation details related to the selected download, click Show Details.
Figure 3-137: Details screen

3. Once you have accepted an Install Now, the following screen appears.
Figure 3-138: Continue to install screen

a. Click the Acknowledge box.

b. Click Continue to Install.
The following screen appears while the installation occurs. Note the installation progress bar.
Figure 3-139: Installation screen

4. When the installation is finished (the message area reads INSTALLED), click Close to exit the screen and the
system continues with startup.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

Figure 3-140: Installation complete screen

Considerations

Decline Updates

If you decline the remote software patch, then your service engineer must install the patch at your facility.
Figure 3-141: Decline Updates selection

In all modes, if you select Decline Updates, the following screen appears, from which you must enter text in all fields
and click the Acknowledgment box:

First Name
Last Name
Role
Reason for declining
Acknowledgment box
Figure 3-142: Decline System Update screen

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-149

Once the text fields are completed, click Decline Update and the following status gets updated.
Figure 3-143: Decline Updates screen

Service Pack icons

Once the MR system is up and operational, if a software download is available, an icon appears in the footer area of
the screen.
Figure 3-144: Software download icon

The icon changes based on conditions described in the table below.

Table 3-36: Service Pack icons

Icon Description

Download icons display when a software is available for download ( ) and

percentage of completion once the download begins.
Click the icon to see an information screen about the service pack. Click Close to
close the information screen.
Once you start the download, the icon updates as the download progresses, for
example:

25% completion
50% completion
75% completion
100% completion
Resume icon displays if you have paused an install by clicking the pause download
icon. You can toggle between the pause and resume icons.
Figure 3-145: Pause download

Figure 3-146: Resume download

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

Icon Description

Install icon displays when a service pack has been successfully installed. The icon
automatically turns off 20 seconds after it is displayed.
Fail icon displays when a service pack has failed to install. The icon automatically
turns off 20 seconds after it is displayed.
Backoffice icon displays when the MR system is connected to Backoffice. The fre-
quency at which the system checks Backoffice for software updates is every 24
hours.

Related topics
System management introduction
Remote full software download procedure

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-151

SY STEM MAN AGEMEN T

Remote full software download procedure

Use these steps to install a full software once you are logged onto the system.

Pre-requisite
Only users that have the GESoftwareInstaller Group status can install the full software.
Reference the Privacy and Security for MR systems for Role-based membership considerations. The url link to
the Privacy and Security for MR systems operator manual is:

https://www.gehealthcare.com/security
Several tasks need to be completed before performing a full software update and these full software updates can
occur several times a year.

Locate your MR GE Software upgrade USB media, it is sent with your software collector. Typically, the
administration, IT person or the Radiology department manager has the MR GE Software upgrade USB media.
Do not use any other USB media to save the software downloads.
Back up all images! A full software update will erase ALL images, be sure to film and archive all images before
starting this update.
Schedule your full software downloads to occur at the end of your clinical imaging day. The system must be
idle and powered on.

It is very important to remove any save info (DVD) from the drive. If you don't remove the DVD the install
will be corrupted.

Post a note on scanner to not touch or reboot scanner while its installing the software.

Procedure

1. From the footer area of the screen, note the Remote Software icon .

This icon displays when a new software update(s) is available to install and the MR system is up and
operational.
Figure 3-147: Software download available icon

2. Once a software download Icon is present and the system is ready for the full software install, the person
performing the software install must have the role as a GE software installer. Follow these steps to switch
users and login with the correct privileges:
a. From the header area of the screen, click the Tools icon.
b. From the System Management work area, click the Service Desktop Manager tab.
c. From the Service Desktop Manager, click Lock Screen Switch User.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

Figure 3-148: Top area of Service Desktop Manager

The Logon screen displays. For logon procedure details, see System logon procedure.

3. From the front of the computer, insert the MR GE Software upgrade USB media into either of the USB ports.

Do not use the MR GE Software upgrade USB media for other save procedures.

4. From the footer area of the screen, click the Remote Software icon .

5. From the Service updates screen, complete the following.

Figure 3-149: Service updates screen

a. Click the Full MR Software containing latest features check box.

b. Note the installation time and make sure that the scanner is free for the full installation time.
c. Click Install Now.
6. When the system has detected that the correct USB media is installed the following screen displays.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-153

Figure 3-150: Software ready to install screen

a. Click acknowledgment check box.

b. Click Continue to Install.

7. From the Secondary confirmation prompt, complete these steps.

Figure 3-151: Confirmation prompt

a. Click the acknowledge check box.

b. Click Continue install.

To click Cancel at this point is not recommended. It will close the Update Ready to Install screen.

8. View the following screens as the installation progresses.

It is suggested that if you leave the computer for some time during the installation (for example, at
end of day), post a note to other MR users to inform them they must wait until the install is completed
before they start a scan.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

Figure 3-152: Example of a splash screen showing installation progress

9. To exit the Set Time/Date screen, click File > Quit.

The system reboots once Guided Install is closed.

10. Post successful update and quitting the Date and Time screen, a prompt appears over the Set Time/Date
screen instructing you to verify that the Time/Date is correct. Click Yes to the prompt and the prompt screen
closes. If you need to change the Time/Date see System date and time procedure for details.
Figure 3-153: Install completed prompt

11. When the install is finished, INSTALLED appears under status on the Update Ready to Install screen.
a. Respond to any prompts when the media creation is completed.
Figure 3-154: Installation complete screen

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-155

Considerations

Error scenarios
Figure 3-155: Example of an error message that appears below the Pre Install Check Status area

When the USB device is not connected the following error displays:

"FAIL: No USB media found. Ensure only the MR GE Software Upgrade USB media is plugged in."

When the wrong USB is detected, the following error displays:

"FAIL: Improper USB media detected. Ensure only the MR GE Software Upgrade USB media is plugged in."

When more than one USB is detected, the following error displays:

"FAIL: More than one USB media detected. Ensure only the MR GE Software Upgrade USB media is plugged in."

Related topics
System management introduction
Remote software download procedure

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

SY STEM MAN AGEMEN T

Service Notepad write a message procedure

Use these steps to write a message that will be posted on the Error Log.

1. In the header area, click the Tools icon to open the System Management work area.
2. Click the Error Log tab.
3. Click View Current Messages.
4. On the Scan Error Log screen, click Notepad.
5. Verify that the Number Lock keypad is off.
6. In the Service Notepad text box, type a message.
7. Click Save to save the message to the error log and close the window.
Clear erases the message and allows you to write a new message.
Exit closes the Service Notepad screen without posting your message on the Scan Error Log.

Related topics
Error log view messages procedure
System management introduction

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-157

SY STEM MAN AGEMEN T

TiP Virtual Assist activation procedure

Use these steps to activate TVA for receiving live-on-demand support to troubleshoot system performance.

1. In the header area, click the Tools icon to open the System Management work area.
2. From the Service Desktop Manager tab, click TiP Virtual Assist.
3. Click Accept to view the Remote training screen and connect the console to TVA.
The buttons displayed depend on the current status of the training session.
Click Exit TVA to close the screen without connecting to TVA.

Related topics
System management introduction

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

GUIDED IN STAL L

Guided Install introduction

This section describes the guided install topics available on MR system platforms.

Guided install procedures

Map a protocol to HIS/RIS code procedure
Configure MR with the HIS/RIS system procedure
SPR Snap procedure
Set default protocol library procedure
Patient anonymize settings procedure
System date and time procedure

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-159

GUIDED IN STAL L

Map a protocol to HIS/RIS code procedure

Use these steps to map a protocol to a particular HIS/RIS code.

8. From the Scanner Protocol - RIS Protocol code Mapping area, enter the Action Code and Coding Scheme
Designator for the selected scanner protocol.
Figure 3-157: RIS Protocol code Mapping area

9. Click Configure.

Each time a worklist item comes in with the same Action Code and Coding Scheme Designator, the exam is
launched with the protocol selected form the Auto Mapping Configure screen.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

Figure 3-158: RIS Protocol Code area

10. From the Guided Install menu bar, click File > Quit.
11. Click Yes.

Related topics
Protocol introduction
Set default protocol library procedure
Guided Install introduction

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-161

GUIDED IN STAL L

Configure MR with the HIS/RIS system procedure

The ConnectPro MR application allows you to download a modality worklist to your MR system. The MR system must
be configured to obtain data from the HIS1 / RIS2 system and to map protocols to action items. The actual
configuration must be done by a service engineer with the assistance of the facility’s Information Technology
department. Through the HIS/RIS and SCP tabs on the Guided Install panel, the server and port setup and the SCP
(charge codes used by the scanning facility when billing insurance) can be established.

1. Navigate to the Service Desktop Manager.

2. On the Service Desktop Manager, click Guided Install.
3. From the list of applications, click HIS/RIS DICOM.
4. Click Start.
5. Select SCPConfigure or PPS Configure from the left side of the Guided Install window to check if the system
is configured with HIS/RIS.
If it is not configured, notify your service engineer or work with your site IT team to configure your MR
system with your HIS/RIS system.
6. Select any of the other options from the left side of the Guided Install window and make adjustments as
needed.
7. When all work is completed on the Guided Install screen, click Configure and respond to any prompts.
8. To exit Guided Install, from the Guided Install menu bar, click File > Quit.
9. Click Yes.
10. Reboot the system to activate your changes.

Related topics
Guided Install introduction
Worklist Manager orientation

1Hospital Information System

2Radiology Information System

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

GUIDED IN STAL L

SPR snap procedure

Use these steps to acquire an SPR1 snap for the following scenarios:

Anytime there is a system hang, lock or crash. A crash can be defined as anytime the system as a whole or
any part of the system quits functioning completely. When in doubt, run an SPR Snap regardless. It takes only
minutes and you don’t have to stop any other function to do so.
Anytime a problem forces you to reset the TPS or re-boot the computer.
Run the SPR Snap, if possible, before resetting or re-booting the system. If this is not possible (for example, if
the screen/mouse freezes), run the SPR Snap immediately after the re-boot.

An SPR Snap is a script that is run on the scanner that captures a file with the following:

all of the most recent error messages

the most recent protocol run
log files that may indicate where a problem occurred
your description of what went wrong

This file can then be viewed for analysis by the engineering group.

1. In the header area, click the Tools icon to open the System Management work area.
2. Click Service Desktop Manager tab.
3. On the Service Desktop Manager, click Guided Install if it is not already selected.
4. From the list of applications in the Service Desktop Manager, click Spr Snap.
5. Click Start.
6. From the SPR snap screen, complete the following fields.
a. From the left panel, click sprsnap.
b. Select Yes or No to the question "Store SPR Information onto DVD?" .
If you respond with a Yes, insert a DVD into the DVD drive.
c. Select Yes or No to the question "Remove SPR directory when done?". This option is only available if you
selected Yes to the "Store SPR Information onto DVD?" question.
Typically select No so that, if needed, your service engineer can view the SPR directory.
d. Select how far back you want to retrieve the system log files.
Number of retrieve days are: 2, 7, 15 and 30.
An SPR snap can sometimes take as long as 15-20 minutes. Generating traces for the core files is one
of the most time consuming parts of an SPR snap. Selecting a shorter retrieval day value can
significantly reduce the SPR snap time, particularly if it has been a long time since a software load from
cold was performed.
e. Type and enter a brief description of the problem in the problem text field.

1Software Problem Report

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-163

7. Click SPR SNAP.

A busy cursor appears while the snap is in progress.
8. Click OK to the message prompt. Record the SPR snap location, if desired.
9. From the left panel, click Log file and scroll to the bottom of the list to view the SPR snap, if desired.
10. From the Guided Install menu bar, click File > Quit.
11. Click Yes.

Related topics
Guided Install introduction

Set default protocol library procedure

Use these steps to set the default protocol library, humanoid and to automatically have a set of filters applied by
anatomical area.

1. In the header area, click the Tools icon to open the System Management work area.
2. Click the Service Desktop Manager tab.
3. From the Service Desktop Manager, click Guided Install.
4. From the list of applications, click Protocol Manager.
5. Click Start.
6. From the left panel, click Default Configuration.
7. From the Default Configuration screen and from the Library menu, typically select your site library.
8. Click one of the options for Humanoid: Adult or Pediatric.
9. If desired, select an Anatomy area from the menu and then click the desired filters that you want to
automatically be applied to that anatomical area. Repeat this action for each anatomical area.
10. Click Configure.
11. From the Guided Install menu bar, click File > Quit.
12. Click Yes.

Related topics
Protocol introduction
Guided Install introduction
Map a protocol to HIS/RIS code procedure

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

GUIDED IN STAL L

Patient anonymize settings procedure

Use these steps to change the level of anonymizing patient information.

1. Open the Service Desktop Manager.

2. Click Guided Install.
3. From the Guided Install list, click Anonymization Settings.
4. Click Start.
5. In the left portion of the Guided Install screen, click Patient Anonymization Settings.
6. Select Partial or Full from the menu.
7. Click Configure.
The Configure button only becomes available when you change the Anonymize setting from the selection
that is displayed when you first entered the window.
The anonymization setting displayed in the menu is activated once you click Configure.
8. Click OK.
You do not have to reboot to activate the new anonymization mode.
9. From the Guided Install screen menu bar, click File > Quit.
10. Click Yes.

Related topics
Patient anonymize procedure
Guided Install introduction
Image Management Tools introduction

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-165

GUIDED IN STAL L

System date and time procedure

Use these steps to change the date or time that is displayed in the footer area of your MR system.

Considerations
If the scanner time drifts out of synchronization with the actual time, it is probable that the Network Time
Protocol server was not configured to synchronize time with the MR scanner. Please consult with your service
engineer to properly configure the Network Time Protocol server.
If your MR system is configured with Network Time Protocol server, any date or time setting done in Guided
Install will be overridden with the time supplied by the Network Time Protocol server.

Procedure
1. Restart your MR system.
2. From the Logon screen, click root login.
This action logs you on as a Root User.
Figure 3-159: Logon screen

3. Enter the following information.

Figure 3-160: Root Username screen

a. In the Username field, type root .

b. Click Next.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

Figure 3-161: Password screen

c. In the Password field, type operator.

If the password was changed, consult with your system administrator for the correct password.
d. Click Sign In.

4. From the Guided Install Starter screen, click Yes to launch Guided Install.
Figure 3-162: Guided Install Starter screen

5. From the Basic Configuration section on the Guided Install screen, click Set Time Date.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-167

Figure 3-163: Guided Install screen

6. From the Set Time/Date screen complete these steps.

a. Select the desired geographic area and/or time zone and click Set Time Zone.
b. From the Date/Time/Zone area, select an option from the menus or click Current Date/Time/Zone.
Use the arrow buttons to change the values.
c. Respond to any confirmation prompts.
d. Click Configure.

7. From the Guided Install menu bar, click File > Quit.
8. Restart your MR system.

Related topics
Image Management Tools introduction

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

GUIDED IN STAL L

Auto start procedure

Use these steps to activate the auto start feature.

1. From the header area of the screen, click the Tools icon .
2. Click the Service Desktop manager tab.
3. On the Service Desktop Manager, click Guided Install.
4. Select GI: FE mode in the program list and click Start.
5. Place the cursor in the Install window and click to activate.
6. At the root password prompt, type your password and press Enter to display the Guided Install screen.
If you do not know the password, consult your site administrator.

7. To activate Enable Auto-start, follow these steps.

Figure 3-164: HIPAA/Security screen Enable Auto-start

a. From the Preferences menu, click HIPAA/Security.

b. From the HIPAA/Security screen, click the Enable Auto-start option.
Auto-start enables the scanner applications to automatically begin before a user logs on. A message
displays with a 30 second count-down at logon.
c. Click Configure to accept your configuration changes.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-169

8. To close the Guided Install screen, click File >Quit.

9. In the Message box, click Yes to confirm the quit action.
10. From the Tools menu, click System Restart to reboot the computer.

Related topics
Data Privacy introduction

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

SY STEM MAN AGEMEN T

iLinq procedure
Use this procedure to contact GE regarding system problems or application questions. For iLinq to be active you must
have:

a GE service/application contract
InSite checkout must be completed

1. Follow these steps to send a message to GE.

a. From the Footer area of the system, click the iLinq icon to open an iLinq window.
Figure 3-165: iLinq screen

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-171

b. Complete the form with as much information as possible to explain your reason for contacting GE.
c. From the bottom of the iLinq form, click Submit Form.
d. From the top of the iLinq form, click Messages to view message details.
Note the Reference number.
Figure 3-166: Example of message area

2. Follow these steps to view a message from GE.

a. From the footer area of the screen, click the iLinq icon , which indicates a message is received
from GE.
b. Click Messages to open the message window and view the response.
c. Click the desired message check box to view the message content.
d. To delete a message, when desired, click the Message check box next to the message you want to delete
and then click Delete to erase the message from iLinq.
3. To view details about the iLinq application, from the menu bar, click About.
4. To view the iLinq Help screen, from the menu bar, click Help.
Scroll to the bottom of the Help screen to view the various iLinq icons that appear in the footer of the
screen.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

EQ UIP MEN T

Connect to Guided Focus Ultrasound system pro-

cedure
Use this procedure to remotely connect to a Guided Focused Ultrasound system.

Prerequisite
Your GE service representative must setup the connection through Guided Install.

Procedure
1. From the screen footer area, click the External Host icon.
Figure 3-167: External Host icon located in the screen footer area

2. From the External Hosts menu, click the desired host.

Figure 3-168: External Host screen

Only one external host can be connected at any time.

3. Click Ok to allow permission for the External host to access the MR system.
This connection allows the Guided Focus Ultrasound system to remotely control the MR system.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 3-173

3-174 5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

Chapter 4: Patient handling

Patient preparation depends on a range of factors including the type of study, the RF coil being used, and the
patient’s condition. Regardless of the type of examination, patient comfort and safety are of primary importance.

Procedures

Cardiac patient setup

Setup the coil procedure
ECG gated exam procedure
Peripheral gated exam procedure

Patient padding
Padding introduction
Cardiac coil padding tips for cardiac scan considerations
Surface coil padding considerations
Whole body padding considerations

Patient handling procedures from Safety chapter

Screen patients and personnel procedure
Prepare the patient procedure
Protect the patient from RF burns procedure
Protect the patient's eyes and ears procedure
MR compatibility test guidelines
Protect the security and exclusion zones procedure
Patient emergencies procedure

Patient handling procedure from Equipment chapter

Patient alert procedure

Other procedures
Patient transfer to a stationary table procedure
Patient transfer to SIGNA Premier eXpress mobile table procedure
Patient position procedure
Patient landmark procedure
Landmark with the alignment light procedure
Patient return to landmark procedure
MR-Touch: patient setup procedure

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 4-1

PROCEDURE

Patient transfer to a stationary table procedure

The table is designed to accommodate the transfer of ambulatory, wheelchair, and gurney patients. For table weight
specification details, see:

SIGNA™ Premier: system specifications concept

Note that the MR magnet is always on even when the system is not acquiring scan data. The only
exception to this is if service has ramped down the magnet or it has been quenched.

1. Make sure the patient has completed the screening sheet and has removed all metal items.
2. Bring the patient to the table either in a non-ferrous wheelchair or non-ferrous gurney, or escort the
ambulatory patient into the scan room.

WARNING
Do not bring conventional life-support equipment into the magnet room, because it may contain metal parts
and may malfunction or cause patient injury or equipment damage.

3. If the patient is using a wheelchair or gurney, lock the wheels.

4. If using a coil, place it on the table. For details, see:
Connect coils procedure
6. Step on the Up and Down foot pedals at the magnet end of the table to adjust the table height.
7. Transfer the patient onto the table.
8. Help the patient with any medical accessories he or she may have.
9. Raise the table to scanning height.
10. Remove any wheelchairs or gurneys from the scan room.
11. To remove the patient from the table, follow these steps:
a. Adjust the table height while paying careful attention to all health lines, to safely transport the patient
back to a gurney, wheel chair, or to exit the table and walk out of the scan room or prep area.
b. Bring either a non-ferrous wheelchair or non-ferrous gurney into the room, next to the table, and lock the
wheelchair or gurney wheels.
c. Transfer the patient off the MR table and move the transportation device out of the scan room.

Related topics
Patient handling
Patient position procedure

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

PROCEDURE

Patient transfer to a SIGNA Premier eXpress mobile

table procedure
The table is designed to accommodate the transfer of ambulatory, wheelchair, and gurney patients. For table weight
specifications details, see

SIGNA™ Premier eXpress mobile table specifications.

SIGNA™ Pioneer: eXpress mobile table specifications

Note that the MR magnet is always on even when the system is not acquiring scan data. The only exception to this
is if service has ramped down the magnet or it has been quenched.

WARNING
Do not bring conventional life-support equipment into the magnet room, because it may contain metal parts
and may malfunction or cause patient injury or equipment damage.

3. If the patient is using a wheelchair or gurney, lock the wheels.

4. If using a coil, place it on the table.
5. Step on the Up and Down foot pedals at the magnet end of the table to adjust the table height.
Figure 4-1: Up and down pedals on either side of the magnet base

6. Transfer the patient onto the table.

7. Help the patient with any medical accessories he or she may have.
8. Raise the table to scanning height.
9. Remove any wheelchairs or gurneys from the scan room.
10. To remove the patient from the table, follow these steps:
a. Bring the patient out of the magnet using the table movement buttons while paying careful attention to all
health lines.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 4-3

b. Adjust the table height while paying careful attention to all health lines, to safely transport the patient
back to a gurney, wheel chair, or to exit the table and walk out of the scan room or prep area.
c. Bring either a non-ferrous wheelchair or non-ferrous gurney into the room, next to the table, and lock the
wheelchair or gurney wheels.
d. Transfer the patient off the MR table and move the transportation device out of the scan room.
11. To bring the table in or out of the scan room to a patient prep area, follow these steps and refer to Figure 4-2.
Figure 4-2: 1 = Brake pedal, 2= neutral pedal, 3 = steer-lock pedal

a. To avoid pinching fingers or hands between the table and other objects, place your hands on the top of the
Table Transport bar when moving the table.
b. Raise the side rails before you move the patient on the table between locations.
c. Undock the table from the magnet.
For docking/undocking, brake/steer-lock caster and table foot pedal details, see:
SIGNA Premier: dock/undock eXpress mobile table procedure
d. Steer the table to the location where the patient is moved to or from the table.
e. Step on the brake pedal to lock all wheels to prevent the table from moving during patient transfer.
f. Adjust the table height to safely transport the patient back to a gurney, wheel chair, or to exit the table
and walk out of the prep area.
g. Once the patient is securely on or off the table, to move the table, step on the neutral pedal.

Related topics
SIGNA Premier: eXpress mobile table concept
SIGNA™ Pioneer: eXpress mobile table concept
Patient handling chapter

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

PROCEDURE

Patient position procedure

Thoroughly review all patient preparation and screening information in the MR Safety chapter, prior to scanning a
patient or allowing anyone into the MR scan room.

1. Position the patient on the table, either head or feet first.

Typically, use head or feet first for body scans and head first for head and neck.
For table weight specification details, see:
SIGNA™ Premier: system specifications concept
All MR healthcare providers that work with the patient must be trained to reduce the risk of patient
muskuloskeletal injury such as fracture, dislocation or subluxation during the transfer of the patient on/off
the table, positioning the patient on the table, positioning coils on the patient, etc.
2. Position the patient either supine, prone, left decubitus, or right decubitus.
From the Scan control panel, match the patient's position and orientation with the selection made on the
Patient Orientation button. Click the arrows to change the patient orientation icon.
Ensure that the patient forms no closed body loops. For details, see step 4.

Selection Description

Head first, supine orientation.

Head first, right decubitus orientation.

Head first, left decubitus orientation.

Head first, prone orientation.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 4-5

Selection Description

Feet first, supine orientation.

Feet first, right decubitus orientation.

Feet first, left decubitus orientation.

Feet first, prone orientation.

3. Position the imaging coil, if needed.

Each coil, other than the body coil, has an operator manual. Refer to the coil operator manual when setting
up the patient for an exam.
Use the supplied coil pads with the coil at all times. The coil should never come into contact with the
patient.
Never let the coil’s RF1 cables come into contact with the patient. Position cables under a cushion
whenever possible.
Use only approved, undamaged RF coils.
Inspect coils for damage and wear. Do not use a coil that is not functioning properly, e.g., tuning problems
or intermittent poor quality images.
When using the Head Neck Array coil, it is recommended to first place the base of the coil on the table
then position the coil on the patient. Storing the coil on the table or the bore entry is not advised.

WARNING
All coil components must be plugged in when they are in the scanner. This includes coil components that
should be plugged into the system and coil components that should be plugged into another coil component.
Leaving components unplugged can damage the coil, or cause harm to the patient.
4. Position the patient with padding.
Review the Contact Point Heating section of the MR Safety Guide (#2381696) for patient positioning
information.

1Radio Frequency

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

For more patient padding details, see Padding introduction.

Position the patient so that there is no direct contact between the patient's skin and the bore of the
magnet or an RF coil.
Hand-to-hand, calf-to-calf, and elbow to side contact should be avoided. To help prevent a patient burn
from closed loops formed by clasped hands, hands touching the body, from thighs touching, or from the
patient’s breasts contacting the chest wall over a small area, insert nonconducting pads at least 0.25
inches thick between touching parts.
Figure 4-3: Patient positioned with non-conducting pads

5. Position the patient with straps. Insert the straps into the mounting track on the table and wrap the straps
around the patient. Straps are to stabilize, not restrain the patient.
Figure 4-4: Strap inserted in table mounting track

If you find it difficult to insert the strap into the track or move it in the track, then slightly bend the strap
base on a hard surface.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 4-7

Figure 4-5: Bend the strap base

Figure 4-6: Bent strap that more easily slides in the mounting track

6. Provide blankets, pillows, etc. for patient comfort.

7. If necessary, attach cardiac leads and the respiratory device.

ECG gated exam procedure

Peripheral gated exam procedure
Respiratory bellows procedure

WARNING
Do not use waveforms for physiological monitoring. Patient condition may not be reflected, resulting in
improper treatment.
8. Remove any accessory devices from the bore of the magnet that are not required for the procedure.
9. Keep electrically conductive material that must remain in the magnet bore from directly contacting the
patient by placing insulation between the conductive material and the patient.
10. Place a clean cotton sheet over the coil and comfort pad so the patient's skin does not come in contact with
the coil or the comfort pad.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

11. Position RF cables down the center and directly out of the bore (i.e., not along side of the MR system or close
to the body coil or other transmit RF coil), without looping or crossing the cables.
Route the cables so there are no loops (conductive loops can be circular, u-shaped, or s-shaped) in any
cables in the magnet.
Use the appropriate gating cable for surface coil imaging.
Use only MR system recommended monitoring equipment, ECG leads, wires, electrodes, and other
components and accessories.
Follow all instructions for the proper operation of physiologic monitoring or other equipment provided by
the manufacturer of the device.
12. Provide the patient with the patient alert bulb so that the patient may signal you if needed.
If your patient tells you he or she is experiencing a burning sensation, stop the scan.
13. Explain breathing instructions, table movement, length of exam, gradient noise, adjustment of mirror on head
coil, etc.
Instruct the patient not to clasp his or her hands or cross his or her feet in the magnet bore.
14. Provide the patient with hearing protection.
Review the Acoustic Noise section of the MR Safety Guide.

Closely monitor the patient (especially those who are unconscious) during the procedure. If the patient reports
sensations of heating or other unusual sensation, discontinue the procedure immediately and perform a thorough
assessment of the situation.

Related topics
Patient landmark procedure
Patient return to landmark procedure
Patient handling

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 4-9

PROCEDURE

Patient landmark procedure

Use these steps to define a landmark. A scan cannot begin until a landmark has been established.

Landmark with IntelliTouch (Touch-n-Go) strip

If no landmark has been established, the in-room monitor does not display a green landmark line nor scan time.
Figure 4-7: In-room display with no green line and no scan time

1. Press the IntelliTouch landmark strip on either side of the table at the location where you want to establish a
landmark. The landmark location appears as a dotted green line on the in-room display.
Figure 4-8: Landmark location is dotted green line

2. Press Advance to Scan from the Magnet control panel within 5 seconds of pressing the Touch and Go strip.
The cradle position reads zero and the landmark changes from a dotted to solid green line on in the in-room
display.
If more than 5 seconds elapse between touching the Touch and Go strip and pressing Landmark or
Advance to Scan, the green landmark line is removed from the in-room display and the previous
landmark is used if one has been established for the current patient.

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

To display the dotted green landmark line, press the Touch and Go strip again, and then press Landmark
or Advance to Scan to establish the landmark.
Figure 4-9: Landmark is a solid green line

3. Press and hold Advance to Scan until the Stop Cradle button turns white.
The cradle advances to the landmark location.
Make sure all health lines are long enough to accommodate movement before you press and hold Advance
to Scan to move the cradle to magnet isocenter.
4. Adjust the in-bore light and fan.
For details see the Patient comfort procedure.
5. Leave the scan room and enter the console room to begin scan prescription.
Close the scan room door during the acquisition to prevent RF leaks.
An open door prevents scanning.

Related topics
Landmark with the alignment light procedure
Patient return to landmark procedure
Patient handling
SIGNA™ Premier: stationary table concept

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 4-11

PROCEDURES

Landmark with the alignment light procedure

Axial and sagittal alignment lights help position the area of interest at isocenter.

1. Press the Alignment light button on the Magnet control panel.

CAUTION
Exposing eyes to laser alignment lights may result in eye injury.

l Do not stare directly into the laser beam.

2. Press the table movement buttons to advance the cradle until the axial alignment light rests at the desired
landmark. Confirm centering with the sagittal alignment light.
3. Press Landmark button from the Magnet control panel. The cradle position reads zero.
4. Make sure all health lines are long enough to accommodate movement and then press Advance to Scan to
move the cradle to magnet isocenter.
The alignment lights automatically turn off.
5. Adjust the in-bore light and fan.
For details see the Patient comfort procedure.
6. Leave the scan room and enter the console room to begin scan prescription.
Close the scan room door during the acquisition to prevent RF leaks.
An open door prevents scanning.

Related topics
Patient return to landmark procedure
Patient handling
SIGNA™ Premier: stationary table concept

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

PROCEDURES

Patient return to landmark procedure

Once you have started scanning, you can remove the patient from the magnet bore and then return the patient to
the scan position without losing the landmark. This may be done to prep the patient for another phase of the exam,
give the anxious or claustrophobic patient a break between acquisitions, etc.

1. When the system is in between scans, press the Out button (fast or slow) to bring the patient out of the
magnet bore. For table movement details, see:
Magnet controls concept
2. When the patient is ready to be placed back into the magnet, press the Back to Landmark button.

Related topics
Patient landmark procedure
Patient handling

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 4-13

P ATIEN T P ADDIN G

Padding introduction
Preventing patient warming is one of the most important safety measures you must take into consideration as you
prepare a patient for an MR exam. Appropriate RF padding and proper patient positioning are the most effective
means of preventing injury related to RF heating. The following are a few “golden rules” to remember as you position
and pad your patients:

Only use GE approved RF padding.

Approved padding must be a minimum of 0.25 inches (0.635 cm) thick.
Appropriate padding must be used EVERY time without exception.
Sheets and gowns are not a substitute for approved RF padding.
Never allow your patient’s skin to come in direct contact with the scanner bore or any surface coil or cable.
If a patient does not fit in the MR scanner bore with the required padding, another modality should be used to
image the patient.

While some of these rules may seen a little tough to follow at times, remember that RF injury, which can in extreme
cases include burns such as the one you see below, can happen very quickly and your patient may not have time to
warn you in time to prevent an injury.
Figure 4-10: Elbow RF Burn

The following are a series of short vignettes that will assist you in properly positioning and applying RF padding to
your patients. Should you need more information on prevention of patient warming than what is provided here, refer
to your surface coil and MR Safety Manuals. If you need help beyond the documentation please do not hesitate to
reach out to your local Applications Specialists.

Related topics
Whole body padding considerations
Surface coil padding considerations
Cardiac coil padding tips for cardiac scan considerations
Protect the patient from RF burns procedure

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

P ATIEN T P ADDIN G

Whole body padding considerations

In this first example, some general guidelines are reviewed for positioning the RF padding.

Notice that padding is positioned not only at the patient’s sides to prevent their arms from touching the bore,
but that padding is also placed between the hands and thighs and between knees and ankles to prevent
forming conductive loops.
An important consideration when padding your patients is that you will need to double check the position of
the pads once the patient is in the bore. Table movement may dislodge padding and expose skin to the
scanner bore.

Related topics
Padding introduction
Surface coil padding considerations
Cardiac coil padding tips for cardiac scan considerations
Protect the patient from RF burns procedure

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 4-15

P ATIEN T P ADDIN G

Surface coil padding considerations

Surface coils present different challenges from a patient RF padding perspective.

First rule of thumb is to remember to use all manufacturer provided padding to prevent motion and the
patient’s skin from coming in contact with the coil, and to also use additional padding if appropriate to secure
an opposing extremity to prevent contact with the coil which could also lead to burns or motion artifacts.
Just as with the whole body RF padding demonstration, you’ll need to make certain that the patient’s skin
does not come into contact with the scanner bore and that padding is placed between the hands and thighs
to prevent conductive loops.
A final safety consideration for surface coils is to ensure that the patient does not come into contact with the
coil cable, therefore you may need to use additional RF padding to protect the patient.
Care should also be taken to ensure the cable is not looped in the bore and that it is routed down the center
of the scanner bore.

Related topics
Padding introduction
Whole body padding considerations
Cardiac coil padding tips for cardiac scan considerations
Protect the patient from RF burns procedure

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

P ATIEN T P ADDIN G

Cardiac coil padding tips for cardiac scan con-

siderations
RF padding with the cardiac coil is another example where you’ll need to follow your basic padding recommendations
to prevent contact with the scanner bore and prevent conductive anatomical loops, but there are a couple of
additional steps you’ll need to take to ensure patient safety.

The cardiac coil does not require additional RF padding to be placed between the patient and the anterior coil
component, but you should use the manufacturers pad on the posterior component of the coil for patient
RF protection. You should also cover the patient with their gown before placing the anterior component of the
coil and make certain both the anterior and posterior elements are in alignment.
Secure the coil snugly, but comfortably with the straps.
As is the case of all surface coils ensure that the cables do not come in contact with the patient and that they
are not looped and that they are routed down the center of the bore. As you can see, there is cabling that we
need to isolate from the patient, so be sure to use as much padding as needed.
If you are using the cardiac coil, it’s likely you are also using the ECG leads and cable. The rules for the ECG
cable are the same as the coil cable. Route the ECG cable down the center of the bore, do not loop the ECG
cable and do not allow it to come in contact with the coil cable.

Related topics
Padding introduction
Whole body padding considerations
Surface coil padding considerations
Protect the patient from RF burns procedure

5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2 4-17

4-18 5860865-1EN (2021-07) Rev.2

Prime EN
No ratings yet
Prime EN
274 pages
Aquilion Prime SP
No ratings yet
Aquilion Prime SP
18 pages
GE Revolution EVO Installation Guidelines
No ratings yet
GE Revolution EVO Installation Guidelines
18 pages
Definium 656 HD Gen 6.1 Brochure JB31626XX
100% (1)
Definium 656 HD Gen 6.1 Brochure JB31626XX
12 pages
VCT Console Upgrade - Brochure - Q1 2017
No ratings yet
VCT Console Upgrade - Brochure - Q1 2017
3 pages
Artis Q Zen Floor CSPL 259 7437
No ratings yet
Artis Q Zen Floor CSPL 259 7437
10 pages
SCENARIA View Application
No ratings yet
SCENARIA View Application
25 pages
Siemen DataSheet Collimators
No ratings yet
Siemen DataSheet Collimators
6 pages
CT GE Optima CT660 Brochure
No ratings yet
CT GE Optima CT660 Brochure
16 pages
DuraDiagnost 4.0 Specifications
No ratings yet
DuraDiagnost 4.0 Specifications
32 pages
ASR-4000E Digital Mammo
No ratings yet
ASR-4000E Digital Mammo
5 pages
Artis Q Zen Biplane Card CSPL 221 7621
No ratings yet
Artis Q Zen Biplane Card CSPL 221 7621
10 pages
Intera 1 5t 2009
No ratings yet
Intera 1 5t 2009
16 pages
Infinix I Biplane
No ratings yet
Infinix I Biplane
36 pages
Symbol FP S XL Surgical Rev M en
0% (1)
Symbol FP S XL Surgical Rev M en
14 pages
R302a PDF
No ratings yet
R302a PDF
157 pages
Luminos Q.namix T CSPL 1376 13153 1118444
No ratings yet
Luminos Q.namix T CSPL 1376 13153 1118444
10 pages
Excite1 5T
No ratings yet
Excite1 5T
43 pages
Aquilion ONE - Product Data For TMSE & International - MPDCT0412EAB - Low
No ratings yet
Aquilion ONE - Product Data For TMSE & International - MPDCT0412EAB - Low
20 pages
E6 - Interconnections Mri Ge Signa Pioneer
No ratings yet
E6 - Interconnections Mri Ge Signa Pioneer
24 pages
Philips DigitalDiagnost C90 Rel1.1 Specifications Spread Pages (NOV2020)
No ratings yet
Philips DigitalDiagnost C90 Rel1.1 Specifications Spread Pages (NOV2020)
27 pages
Siemens 64slices CT - Odt
No ratings yet
Siemens 64slices CT - Odt
3 pages
Toshiba Ultimax-I
No ratings yet
Toshiba Ultimax-I
10 pages
Siemens Magnetom Essenza 1.5T Overview
No ratings yet
Siemens Magnetom Essenza 1.5T Overview
4 pages
Revolution Maxima Brochure
No ratings yet
Revolution Maxima Brochure
16 pages
Lity Dicom Surgery Gehc Dicom Conformance Brivooec715 785 865 Vwks1 XX Doc1188156 Rev3 PDF
No ratings yet
Lity Dicom Surgery Gehc Dicom Conformance Brivooec715 785 865 Vwks1 XX Doc1188156 Rev3 PDF
4 pages
Folleto MRI Ovation - 035T
No ratings yet
Folleto MRI Ovation - 035T
11 pages
Aria Spec Sheet - Final
No ratings yet
Aria Spec Sheet - Final
2 pages
GE MR660 128 Slice CT Scan
No ratings yet
GE MR660 128 Slice CT Scan
16 pages
DP-50 Expert: Ultrasound System
No ratings yet
DP-50 Expert: Ultrasound System
4 pages
Definium 6000 I/II/III System: GE Healthcare
No ratings yet
Definium 6000 I/II/III System: GE Healthcare
2 pages
Rayos X Philips Duradiagnost
No ratings yet
Rayos X Philips Duradiagnost
4 pages
Siemens Espree Brochure - Open and TIM 2 281 29
No ratings yet
Siemens Espree Brochure - Open and TIM 2 281 29
19 pages
MOBILETT Elara Max: Transforming X-Ray Care
No ratings yet
MOBILETT Elara Max: Transforming X-Ray Care
20 pages
Vision C Site Shop Drawing and Lead Sheet
No ratings yet
Vision C Site Shop Drawing and Lead Sheet
27 pages
Scan Canon Aquilion-Lightning
No ratings yet
Scan Canon Aquilion-Lightning
2 pages
衛部醫器輸字第035415號-Spectral CT 7500-111-10-03
No ratings yet
衛部醫器輸字第035415號-Spectral CT 7500-111-10-03
14 pages
Discovery IGS 7 Data Sheet - 2020
No ratings yet
Discovery IGS 7 Data Sheet - 2020
20 pages
BrightView X and XCT Technical Specifications Data Sheet
No ratings yet
BrightView X and XCT Technical Specifications Data Sheet
6 pages
Mri Ge Profile Brochure
No ratings yet
Mri Ge Profile Brochure
6 pages
Quantum Q-VISION HF Series Brochure
100% (1)
Quantum Q-VISION HF Series Brochure
6 pages
The "Performance Standard" in Digital Imaging: Imple, Stylish, Erformance C-Arm
No ratings yet
The "Performance Standard" in Digital Imaging: Imple, Stylish, Erformance C-Arm
2 pages
GE Healthcare Site Readiness Guide
No ratings yet
GE Healthcare Site Readiness Guide
19 pages
Asteion Vi VR Mpdct0123eag
No ratings yet
Asteion Vi VR Mpdct0123eag
10 pages
Discovery XR656HD Product Datasheet
No ratings yet
Discovery XR656HD Product Datasheet
25 pages
Cios Flow Replace Part
0% (1)
Cios Flow Replace Part
25 pages
Ziehm Solo en
No ratings yet
Ziehm Solo en
14 pages
Technical Spec - Project EKAT - OEC Elite 4K II
No ratings yet
Technical Spec - Project EKAT - OEC Elite 4K II
4 pages
Samsung Gm85 Quick User Manual: - Simplified Manuals
No ratings yet
Samsung Gm85 Quick User Manual: - Simplified Manuals
3 pages
VIVIX-S V Series
No ratings yet
VIVIX-S V Series
12 pages
ROV224 02 CNT Life White Paper 27072021
No ratings yet
ROV224 02 CNT Life White Paper 27072021
16 pages
Veterinary MRI System Specifications
No ratings yet
Veterinary MRI System Specifications
15 pages
Cs Imaging v7 System Requirements
No ratings yet
Cs Imaging v7 System Requirements
4 pages
CT Scanner for Efficient Imaging
No ratings yet
CT Scanner for Efficient Imaging
15 pages
Compact Mobile C-arm System Overview
No ratings yet
Compact Mobile C-arm System Overview
4 pages
C-Arm Schematics 8800
No ratings yet
C-Arm Schematics 8800
66 pages
CT - Emea - Optima Ct660 Spatial Enhanced Brochure 2012-10
No ratings yet
CT - Emea - Optima Ct660 Spatial Enhanced Brochure 2012-10
10 pages
Gemini Hand Book
No ratings yet
Gemini Hand Book
104 pages
Architect en
No ratings yet
Architect en
418 pages
Victor EN
No ratings yet
Victor EN
346 pages
UMR 780 1.5T User
No ratings yet
UMR 780 1.5T User
240 pages
Ziehm 8000 en
No ratings yet
Ziehm 8000 en
237 pages
Esaote Mri User Manual
No ratings yet
Esaote Mri User Manual
328 pages
Gehc-Dicom-Conformance Oec One CFD Doc2198430 Rev9
No ratings yet
Gehc-Dicom-Conformance Oec One CFD Doc2198430 Rev9
117 pages
Beijing MRI 1.5T User en
No ratings yet
Beijing MRI 1.5T User en
160 pages
MR 0.36 User
No ratings yet
MR 0.36 User
40 pages
C-Arm Fujifilm DR-XD Vie
100% (1)
C-Arm Fujifilm DR-XD Vie
212 pages
HUR Product Catalogue ENG 2025 v1.1
No ratings yet
HUR Product Catalogue ENG 2025 v1.1
29 pages
SCM-510W: Holter Software
No ratings yet
SCM-510W: Holter Software
80 pages
Doc Spec Brochure e v - Giường Giảm Áp Lực Cột Sống
No ratings yet
Doc Spec Brochure e v - Giường Giảm Áp Lực Cột Sống
2 pages
Broschuere GB MUSCA 2023 Web
No ratings yet
Broschuere GB MUSCA 2023 Web
3 pages
2.Máy Tập Vận Động Thụ Động Khớp Gối- Catalgoue Tiếng Anh
No ratings yet
2.Máy Tập Vận Động Thụ Động Khớp Gối- Catalgoue Tiếng Anh
1 page
Oscar Prime en
No ratings yet
Oscar Prime en
94 pages
En Technical Whitepaper 41 2019 Dose Management For 2d Imaging at Ziehm Imaging
No ratings yet
En Technical Whitepaper 41 2019 Dose Management For 2d Imaging at Ziehm Imaging
6 pages
Zen 7000 EN
No ratings yet
Zen 7000 EN
89 pages
FX-8200 en V02 4L011489P
No ratings yet
FX-8200 en V02 4L011489P
170 pages
IGS 6 With 31cm FPD Brochure 2020
No ratings yet
IGS 6 With 31cm FPD Brochure 2020
10 pages
Opescope Acteno en
No ratings yet
Opescope Acteno en
306 pages
Oscar 15 EN
No ratings yet
Oscar 15 EN
86 pages
Robot Tập Luyện Dáng Đi - Datasheet t Anh
No ratings yet
Robot Tập Luyện Dáng Đi - Datasheet t Anh
2 pages
Allia IGS 7 ECO Brochure
No ratings yet
Allia IGS 7 ECO Brochure
15 pages
Allia IGS 530 Eco Brochure
No ratings yet
Allia IGS 530 Eco Brochure
14 pages
Mkt-000-00007482-En Rev B Intelect RPW 2 Brochure Digital
No ratings yet
Mkt-000-00007482-En Rev B Intelect RPW 2 Brochure Digital
8 pages
FX 8300 Catalogue
No ratings yet
FX 8300 Catalogue
4 pages
Lokomat Nanos Datasheet
No ratings yet
Lokomat Nanos Datasheet
2 pages
Zenition 30 Brochure
No ratings yet
Zenition 30 Brochure
2 pages
Zenition 70 Brochure
No ratings yet
Zenition 70 Brochure
12 pages
GE HealthCare Surgical Imaging Portfolio Overview
No ratings yet
GE HealthCare Surgical Imaging Portfolio Overview
18 pages
OEC One CFD C-Arm Sustainability - JB23833XX Apr23
No ratings yet
OEC One CFD C-Arm Sustainability - JB23833XX Apr23
12 pages
Interruptor Bajo Voltaje.2
No ratings yet
Interruptor Bajo Voltaje.2
16 pages
AIPM Part 2
No ratings yet
AIPM Part 2
17 pages
Online Book Store MBA Project Report
No ratings yet
Online Book Store MBA Project Report
84 pages
PL/I for ELTP Trainees
100% (3)
PL/I for ELTP Trainees
106 pages
60+ Data Engineer Interview Questions and Answers
No ratings yet
60+ Data Engineer Interview Questions and Answers
16 pages
Bus Signal Timing Questions
No ratings yet
Bus Signal Timing Questions
7 pages
Domicile Certificate
No ratings yet
Domicile Certificate
3 pages
Fluent UDF Tutorial.: An Airfoil in A Free Shear Layer (A Wake, or Due To The Stratification of The Atmosphere)
No ratings yet
Fluent UDF Tutorial.: An Airfoil in A Free Shear Layer (A Wake, or Due To The Stratification of The Atmosphere)
3 pages
Business Promotion Hub
No ratings yet
Business Promotion Hub
11 pages
Epson Printer Comparison Finalv2
No ratings yet
Epson Printer Comparison Finalv2
6 pages
10 Minute Mailasd
No ratings yet
10 Minute Mailasd
2 pages
Calcutta High Court LDA Exam Paper 2019
100% (1)
Calcutta High Court LDA Exam Paper 2019
49 pages
Sikorsky Final Report
No ratings yet
Sikorsky Final Report
36 pages
Note On Lattice - Vadim - 2024
No ratings yet
Note On Lattice - Vadim - 2024
62 pages
Log
No ratings yet
Log
4 pages
Arturo Filio Resume ATS
No ratings yet
Arturo Filio Resume ATS
1 page
Overview of Soft Computing Techniques
No ratings yet
Overview of Soft Computing Techniques
40 pages
Checking Account Information for Estate
No ratings yet
Checking Account Information for Estate
4 pages
NG Simon Mastering Swiftui Ios 17 Updated 2024
No ratings yet
NG Simon Mastering Swiftui Ios 17 Updated 2024
989 pages
18 Xltek EMU40EX EEG PSG System M
No ratings yet
18 Xltek EMU40EX EEG PSG System M
70 pages
Interview Questions 100+
No ratings yet
Interview Questions 100+
40 pages
Regenerative Braking Explained
No ratings yet
Regenerative Braking Explained
14 pages
TD - Video Tagging For Moj
No ratings yet
TD - Video Tagging For Moj
19 pages
Module 3: Foundations of Doctrine and The PAF Air Power Structure
No ratings yet
Module 3: Foundations of Doctrine and The PAF Air Power Structure
3 pages
12th IDEAL Q Bank - Tamil
No ratings yet
12th IDEAL Q Bank - Tamil
59 pages
Understanding I2C Protocol Basics
No ratings yet
Understanding I2C Protocol Basics
22 pages
Tasks and Multithreading
No ratings yet
Tasks and Multithreading
37 pages
How To Upload Image Files For Procurement HRZ19CD03
No ratings yet
How To Upload Image Files For Procurement HRZ19CD03
2 pages
Doca0101en 04
No ratings yet
Doca0101en 04
164 pages
HMI Calculator Integration Guide
No ratings yet
HMI Calculator Integration Guide
13 pages